orro

Owners Manual Au�•

2001 Audi allroad

2001 Audi allroad

2. 71 V6-cylinder engine .

'
 VEHICLE LITERATURE --
---

In addition to this Owner's Manual, The Owner's Manual For safety reasons please note
your Audi comes with a Maintenance and the supplements should be read also the information regarding
booklet, Warranty booklet and for carefully and as soon as possible to ac­ additional accessories, modifi­
some models, special supple­ cations and parts replacement
on page 262.
quaint yourself with your vehicle.
ments.
Pay special attention to the chapter en­
Moreover, depending on the model and titled "Vehicle operation". There you The other chapters are also important
the equipment, there may be additional will see how to drive safely and eco­ because correct operation of the ve­

y
instruction booklets delivered with nomically, and how to minimize pollu­ hicle - in addition to proper care and
our vehicle (for example, Sound tion. maintenance- serves to maintain the
System Operating Instructions). value of the vehicle. In many cases, it
If you are missing one of these publica­ may also be one of the conditions for
tions, or if you believe that the informa­ upholding warranty claims.
tion is not complete, contact your au­
thorized Audi Dealer for assistance.

2
 VEHICLE LITERATURE

Notes explaining this manual: Please note that items marked with an Illustrations
This manual describes all the equip­ asterisk * may be standard on certain Each illustration in the manual shows a
ment intended at the time of printing. models, optional on others or not avail­ feature and I or equipment which your
able on your model.
Some of the equipment may be avail­ yehicle may or may not have, depend­
able at a later date or not at all. • If one of the Warning and indica­
tor lights marked with a STOP­
rng on the model. The illustrations are
simply to show you how a feature looks
sign comes on while you are driv­ and its function.
� WA R N I N GS ing, move a safe distance off the road,
Alphabetical Index
concern safety and are high­ turn off the engine, turn the emergency
flasher on and use other warning de­ At the back of this book, you will find an
lighted like this througnoui
vices to alert other motorists. Go to extensive Alphabetical Index. This will
this manual. help you to find information quickly by
listed page in your manual for explana­
tions. using key words.
� Texts identified by this sym-
bol and w'itten in italics anJ
Table of Contents

important notes l'ega,ding the

On the following page, you will find the

environment and how you can

Table of Contents which describes a l l

help to p'otect it.

the features of your vehicle in the order
they appear in this manual.
Texts printed in bold type refer
to possible damage to your ve­
hicle, or to other important infor­
mation.
 VEHICLELITERATURE ------

Indication of directions The Maintenance booklet If you sell your Audi

Whenever a direction is specified (for explains how you can keep your Audi in all literature should be left in the vehicle
example: left, right, forward, backward, top driving condition by having it ser­ to make the Warranty terms as well as
etc.), you should imagine yourself as viced regularly. Always have the Main­ all operating, safety and maintenance
sitting in the vehicle facing in the driving tenance booklet with you when you information available to the next owner.
direction. If something is explained take your vehicle to an authorized Audi
which is different from this position, it Dealer for service. Your Service Adviser If you change your address or if
will be clearly identified. will record each scheduled service. you bought this Audi used
be sure to send in a "Notice of Address
The Warranty booklet In Canada, Change" I "Notice of Used Car Pur­
contains detailed information about the this literature is also available in French. chase" post card. This card can be
warranties covering your Audi. To obtain a copy, contact your dealer or found in the Warranty booklet or ob­
write to: tained from your authorized Audi
Au Canada, on peut se procurer un ex­ Dealer.
emplaire en franc;:ais de ce document It is in your own interest that we
aupres du concessionnaire ou de: are able to contact you should
Volkswagen Canada, Inc.
the need arise.
Customer Assistance/
Assistance a Ia Clientele,
777 Bayly Street. West.
Ajax. Ontario L 1 S 7G7

4
------ TABLE OF CONTENTS

IGENERAL ILLUSTRATION Rear seats 0 0 • • 0 • • 0 • • • • • • 86 Radio frequency display 1 38

Luggage compartment , 0 0 88 Auto-Check system 0 0 0 o 0 138
General illustration 0 0 0 . • • • 8
Rear facing child seat bench 0 0 0 0 0 92 Speed warning . 0 0 0 • 0 0 • • • • 0 • 0 0 144
Warning and indicator lights 10
Ski sack 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 . 96 Trip computer 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • 0 146
Adjustable steering column Switches 148
I SAFETY FIRST
0 • 0 • • 0 0 0 0 • 0 0 0 0

(tilt and telescopic) 0 0 0 0 • 0 0 98 Ride height adjustment

Welcome 13 Pedals 102 (4 Level Air Suspension) 153
1 03
0 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 , 0
. . . 0 0 0 • • • •

Safety first 0 0 • 0 • 0 0 0 0 • 0 • 13 Parking brake lever 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • 0 Turn signals,

5-speed automatic transmission headlight dimmer switch lever 0 0 156
Safety belts 14
(Trptronic®)
• . . 0 0 0 • 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 . 0 • 104 Cruise control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • 158

Airbag system 0 • • • • • • • 0 0 • • • • • • • 25
Acoustic park assist 112 Wiper and washer system 150
1 13
0 • • • 0 0

Child safety . . . . . . . . 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 44
Ignition switch 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Climate controls 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 0 152
Starting procedures 114 Power roof 168
ICONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
. 0 • • 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 • • • • • •

Stopping engine 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • • 115 Interior lights, reading lights 171

Keys 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • • • • • • • • 0 0 • • 0 56 Instrument cluster 0 0 0 0 0 0 116 Luggage compartment light 0 0 0 0 172
Power locks 59 Service Interval Display 121 Audi Homelink®
Warning I Indicator lights
0 0 0 0 • 0 . - . 0 0 0 • •

Power windows 69 0 0 0 0 0 0 • 122 Universal Transmitter . 0 0 • • • • 173

Mirrors 0 • • 0 0 0 • • • • • • - • • • • 0 • • • 0 72 On Board Diagnostic system 0 0 0 128 Sun visors 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 .. . • . . • 177

Head restraints 75 Driver information system 0 • 0 • • • 130 Sun shade 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • , • • • • • • 0 0 177

Front seats 0 0 0 • • 0 • • 0 76 Menu display 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 131 Glove compartment 178

Memory for front seats , . . . . 0 • • 0 81 Rear lid I door open indicator 0 0 0 137 Coat hooks 179

Center armrest 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 • • • • • • 0 85 Outside air temperature 0 • 0 0 0 0 0 0 137 Ashtray 180

5
TABLE OF C ONTENTS --
--

Cigarette lighter I Socket . . . . . . 181 Electronic Stability Program Wiper blades 251
lires I Wheels
.

Storage compartments 182 (ESP) . .... .... ........

. 205 252
Steering wheel with Driving with your quattro® . . . .. 207 .
Difficult operating
Audio controls . . . . . . . • • . . . . 0 1 85 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . _ . . . _ . . 208 conditions . . . . . .. . 262
Steering wheel with Additional accessories,
radio and telephone equipment
in the steering wheel . 186
I VEHICLE CARE Modifications and
Parts replacement . . . . . .. . 262
Mobile telephones and Cleaning and protection 212

IDO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE
CB radios . . 189 Fuel tank . .. .. ... 222
earphone . . • 1 90 Fuel supply . _ . . . . . . _ . . . ... . . . . 225
First aid kit 263
Maintenance
. . . . • .

Roof rack . . . . . 191 . . • • . . 228

Emergency
Engine hood .. .. 231
warning triangle . . ..
I VEHICLE OPERATION
. . . . . 263
Engine compartment 232
Jack and tools . . . . • . _ . . . . • . . . . 264
Engine oil . . .. . . . . . . . 234
The first 1,000 miles (1 500 km) - Spare wheel . . . . . . . .... . . 266
and afterwards . . . . . . 1 93 Engine cooling system 238
Changing a wheel .. 267
o • • • • •
. . . . . . . . . .
. . . • . . .

Operate your vehicle safely . ... 194 Power steering 241

.
Fuses . . . .. .. . ... . . . . . . _ . . . . 274
Operate your vehicle economically Brake fluid .. 242
Replacing bulbs 277
Installing I
and minimize pollution . 195 . Battery . . . 244
Driving on rough roads or Air cleaner 248 replacing a radio 277
rugged terrain .. . . ..... 199 Spark plugs 249 Emergency starting
.
278
Braking . ... . .......... . . 201 Belts . . . . . 249 Emergency towing with
Windshield I
. _ _ . . • . . . . .

Electronic differential lock commercial tow truck 281

(EDL) 204 headlight washer container . . . . . 250 Lifting vehicle . .... 283

6
------ TABLE OF C ONTENTS

ITECHNICAL DATA
Engine data 286
Capacities . . ' . . . • . . . 287
Dimensions 288
Weights . . . . 289
Vehicle identification . 290

I CONSUMER INFORMATION
Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . 292
Outside the U.S.A. or Canada . . . 292
Service Repair Manuals o • 0 • • 293

I ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Index 296

7
GENERAL ILLUSTRATION ------

General illustration

?�
I
I
I
;
!

\
',

--·-·- __
1-B4S:s?:i
;::_·�=1
 ------- GENERAL ILLUSTRATION

Page Page
1 Power window switches 69 18 Thumbwheel for seat heating 150
2 Door handle 59 19 Switch for rear window defogger 151
3 Power locking switch 62 20 Climate controls 162
4 Light switch 148 21 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 80
5 Air vents 165
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 81

Turn signals I headlight dimmer switch lever

22 Gearshift lever or
6 . . . 1 56 Selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 1 58
23 Adjuster control for outside mirrors 72
7 Instrument illumination 149
24 Parking brake lever 1 03
Horn, driver's airbag
Radio I CD I buttons
8 • • • • • 0 • • 0 • • 0 0 • • 0 • • • 0 • • • 0 25
. 25 Navigation System switch or
Radio I CD I telephone buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
1 86 Cup holder • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 0 • • • • 0 • • • • 0 • • • • • 182
Instrument cluster . . . . . . 26 Storage compartment
Warning I indicator lights
9 116
27
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 22 Service wallet compartment

Windshield wiper I washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 83
• • • • • • • • 0 0 • • • • • • • • • •

10 1 60
Trip computer function control switch 146
28 Adjustable steering wheel 98

Steering lock I ignition I starter switch

. . . . . . . . .

11 113
29 Data Link Connector (DLC) for On Board
Diagnostics (OBD)
Switch for the Electronic Stability Program (i::SP)
128
12 1 52
Switches for the ride hei ght adjustment and 30 Release lever for engine hood 231
level display • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 0 • • 0 • • 0 0 • • 0 0 • • • • 1 53 31 Memory for driver's seat 81
13 Emergency flasher 1 52 Notes
14 Cup holder 1 82 • Some features mentioned are standard equipment on some
15 Glove compartment (lockable) 1 78 models only and options on others.
• For technical reasons, the arrangement of the switches and indi­
16 Front passenger's airbag 25 cator/warning lights may differ. The governing factor is the symbol
17 Radio on the switch itself.

9
G ENERAL ILL USTRATION ----

Warning and indicator lights

Symbol Page Symbol Page

EPC Electronic power control 1 23 Brake

BRAKE (USA models) • 126

;oo� Side marker lights I headlights 123

Brake
� Self-leveling suspension 1 23 (CD) (Canada models) • 1 26

@ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) 1 24 0 Generator, Battery voltage 127, 143

� Electronic immobilizer 1 24
t Safety belt 127

¢!:} Turn signals, emergency flasher 1 25, 1 52 Auto-Check system ok I no failure

OK in the checked systems 140

�D High beam 125

Coolant temperature
� Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 1 25
-�- and level • 141

CHECK

AIR
Airbag system 25, 1 25
� Oil pressure • 1 43
BAG
BRAKE Brake lights malfunction
Anti-lock brake system 141
125 LIGHT (USA models)
ABS (USA models)
Brake lights malfunction
9)
Anti-lock brake system
(Canada models) 125 (@) (Canada models) 141

10
---- GENERAL ILL USTRAnON

Note
Symbol Page If one of the lights marked with0 comes on suddenly while you
Headlights I tail lights
are driving, move a safe distance off the road. Turn off the engine,
� malfunction 1 43 turn the emergency flasher on and use other warning devices to
alert other motorists. Go to listed page in your Owner's Manual for
0
explanations.
Brake pads worn 143

rp
w Washer fluid level low 143

iU Fuel level low 143

�N Engine oil level low 144

�ENSOR Engine oil sensor defective 144

818 Speed warning 144

Dynamic headlight dimmer control

=i•
�[) not functioning 1 44

�D Front fog lights 149

0$ Rear fog light 149

11
12
------ SAFETYRRST

Welcome Safety first

Dear Audi Owner, Your safety and the safety of your passen­ These individual safety features, can work
This chapter contains important informa­ gers shouldn't be left to chance. Advances together as a system to help protect you
tion, tips and suggestions on occupant safe­ in technology have made a variety of fea­ and your passengers in a wide range of acci­
ty. tures available to help reduce the risk of in­ dents. These features can't work as a sys­
jury in an accident. The following is a listing tem if they are not always properly adjusted
We've prepared this chapter in order to of just a few of the safety features in your and properly used!
summarize what you need to know about Audi:
such topics as safety belts, airbags, child The following sections provide important in­
safety, seats for children and infants. sophisticated safety belts with tension­ formation about why these features are im­
ers portant, how they work to help protect you
Please make certain that you follow
optimized safety belt geometry through and your passengers and how they must be
the suggestions and warnings given
adjusted and used to get the greatest bene­
- it's in your own interest and in the safety belt anchorages on front seats, fit and reduce the likelihood of injury.
interest of all your passengers. The sections also contain important
safety belt height adjustors front seats,
However, please note, that impor­ WARNINGS which you and your passen­
tant safety information regarding
lateral belt adjustment on outer rear
seats, gers must always heed in order to reduce
your vehicle and its operation will the risk of personal injury.
also be found in all other chapters of safety belt guide for the center rear seat
Safety is everybody's responsibil­
this Owner's Manual. - front airbags ity!
side airbags in the front and rear* seats
Remember - safety first! - head airbags left and right above the
doors
special seat pan structure
- adjustable steering column
padded kneebar integrated into the dash­
board.

1'>
....
 SAFETYRRST -------

Safety belts
J:\. Always wear your This section explains why safety belts are
ffi safety belts! necessary, how they work and how to ad­
just and wear them properly.
Please read all the information
given. and always observe the fol­
� WAR N I N G lowing instructions and warnings.
• Safety belts are the single most
effective means available to re­ For information on child safety see
duce the potential for serious in­ page 44.
iury and death in automobile acci­
dents. For your protection and
that of your passengers. always
properly wear safety belts when
the vehicle is moving.
Why safety belts work
• Pregnant women. iniured, or
Safety belts can't work unless they
physically impaired persons
are worn and worn properly.
should also use safety belts. Like
all vehicle occupants, they are The illustration above shows the passen­
more likely to be seriously iniured gers on a "vehicle" headed for a brick wall.
if they do not wear safety belts. They're not using safety belts.
The best way to protect a fetus is The physical principles are simple. Both the
to protect the mother - through­ vehicle and the passengers possess energy
out the entire pregnancy. which varies with vehicle speed and body
weight. Engineers call this energy "kinetic
energy."

For details see next pages.

1.11.
 SAFETY FIRST

The higher the speed of the vehicle and the The same principles apply to people sitting Unbelted occupants are not able to resist
greater the passengers' weight, the more in a car that is involved in a frontal collision. the tremendous forces of impact by holding
energy there is to be "absorbed" in an acci­ Even at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to tight or bracing themselves. Without the
dent. 50 km/h), the forces acting on the body can benefit of safety restraint systems, the un­
Vehicle speed is the most significant factor. reach one ton (2000 lbs, or 1 000 kg) or restrained occupant will slam violently into
If the speed doubles from 1 5 to 30 mph (25 more. At greater speeds, these forces are the steering wheel, dashboard, windshield,
to 50 km/hl. the energy increases 4 times! even higher. or whatever else is in the way. Their impact
with the vehicle interior has all the energy
Because these passengers are not using People who do not use safety belts are also they had just before the crash.
safety belts, they will keep moving at the not attached to their car. In a frontal collision
same speed the vehicle was moving just they will also continue to move forward at
before the crash, until something stops the speed their car was travelling just be­
them- here, the wall. fore the impact.

15
SAFETY FIRST

Don't rely on airbags alone for protection.

Even when they deploy, airbags provide
only supplemental protection. Airbags are
not supposed to deploy in all kinds of acci­
dents. Although your Audi is equipped with
airbags for the driver and front seat passen­
ger, all vehicle occupants, including the
driver, still have to wear safety belts- re­
gardless of whether their seating position
has an airbag.
Remember too, that airbags will deploy only
once and that your safety belts are always
there to offer protection in those accidents
in which airbags are not supposed to deploy Unbelted passengers in the rear seats en­ Safety belts attach passengers to the car
or when they have already deployed. danger not only themselves but also other and give them the benefit of being slowed
Unbelted occupants can also be thrown out passengers. In a frontal collision they will be down more gently or "softly" through the
of the car where even more severe or fatal thrown forward violently, where they can hit "give" in the safety belts, crumple zones
injuries can occur. and injure the driver or front seat passenger. and other safety features engineered into
today's cars. By "absorbing" the kinetic en­
Safety belts protect ergy over a longer period of time, the forces
Safety belts used properly can make a big on the body become more "tolerable" and
difference. Safety belts help to keep pas­ less likely to cause injury.
sengers in their seats, gradually reduce en­
ergy levels applied to the body in an acci­
dent, and help prevent the uncontrolled
movement that can cause serious injuries.
In addition, safety belts reduce the danger
of being thrown out of the car.

16
--
-- SAFETY FIRST

Although these examples are based on a To further increase the safety for the front
frontal collision, safety belts can also sub­ passengers, the vehicle is equipped with a
stantially reduce the risk of injury in other supplemental airbag system. See page 25.
types of accidents. So, whether you are on The safety belts provided must neverthe­
a long trip or just going to the corner store, less be worn because the front airbags are
always buckle up and make sure others do, activated only in some frontal collisions. The
too. front airbags are not activated by minor fron­
Accident statistics show that vehicle occu­ tal collisions, side and rear collisions, in roll
pants properly wearing safety belts have a overs or in some cases where there is not
lower risk of being injured and a much bet­ enough deceleration through impact to the
ter chance of surviving an accident. Prop­ front of the vehicle.
erly using safety belts also greatly increases I B1H-124 I
the ability of the supplemental airbags to do
their job in an accident. For this reason,
wearing a safety belt is legally required in Belt warning system
most countries including much of the Your vehicle has a warning light for the driv-
United States and Canada. er to remind you to wear the safety belt
The following pages provide important in­ After the ignition is switched on, the warn­
structions to enable you to use safety belts ing light in the instrument cluster will come
properly. Be aura to read and follow on for about 6 seconds along with a warning
the instructions carefully. Heed all tone. As soon as the driver has fastened the
WARNINGS. safety belt the warning tone will stop. The
warning light, however, will stay on for '
about 6 seconds.
Fasten your safety be.lt now and
make sure that your passengers also
properly put on their safety belts.

17
SAFETYRRST -------

How to wear safety belts

properly
'41 WARNING continued � WARNING continued
Safety belts must always be prop­ • Never strap more than one par­ • Never allow safety belts to be­
erly positioned across the strongest son, including small children, into come damaged by being caught in
bones of your body. any belt. It is especially dangerous door or seat hardware. Always
to place a safety belt over a child keep belt buckles free of any ob­
sitting on your lap. struction that may prevent secure
� WARNING • Never place your feet on the in­ locking.
strument panel or on the seat. • Never use comfort clips or de­
Always fasten your safety belts Always keep both feet on the floor vices that create slack in the
before driving off. Always make in front of the seat. shoulder belt portion. However,
sure your passengers are properly clips may be required for the
restrained - even those sitting in • Never wear belts over rigid or
breakable objects in or on your proper use of some child restraint
the rear. systems.
clothing, such as eye glasses,
Safety belts can work only when
pens, keys, etc., as these may • Torn or frayed safety belts can
used properly. Never wear safety
cause injury. tear and damaged belt hardware
belts in any other way than illus­
• Do not wear the shoulder part of can break in an accident. Inspect
trated and described in this sec­
the belt under your arm or other­ belts periodically.
tion. Always observe the follow­
wise out of position. If belts show damage to webbing,
ing precautions:
bindings, buckles. or retractors,
• Never wear belts twisted. • Several layers of heavy clothing have them replaced.
may interfere with proper posi­
tioning of belts and reduce the
overall effectiveness of the sys­
tem.

18
 SAFETY FIRST

Seating capacity Lap-shoulder belt

fh1 WARNING continued Your Audi has 5 seating positions, 2 in the The front and rear seats are equipped with
• Keep the belts clean. front and 3 in the rear. Each seating position three-point safety belts.
Dirty belts may not work properly has a safety belt. The three-point belts in the front passenger
- see also .. Cleaning and protec­ and rear positions each have a convertible
tion .. page 218. locking feature in addition to the emergency
• Safety belts that have been
� WARNING locking feature. The convertible locking fea­
worn and loaded in an accident ture is used when a child seat is installed,
Never let more people ride in the see page 5 1 .
must be replaced with the correct vehicle than there are seat belts
replacement safety belt by an au­ available. Be sure everyone riding The retractors i n the combination lap-shoul­
thorized Audi Dealer. Replace­ in the vehicle is correctly re­ der belts allow the system to adjust to your
ment may be necessary even if strained with a separate seat belt. size and movements as long as the pull on
damage cannot be clearly seen. the belt is slow.
• Safety belt anchorages that Hard braking or a collision locks the belt. The
have been loaded in an accident belt will aIso lock when you drive up or down
must be inspected by a qualified a steep hill or in a sharp curve.
workshop or an authorized Audi
Dealer.
• Never modify. disassemble, or
try to repair your safety belts.

19
SAFETY RRST -------

• To fasten, grasp belt tongue and pull the

belt in a continuous slow motion across
your chest and lap.
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle on
the inboard side of the seat. Push down un­
til it is securely locked with an audible click.
Pull belt to check!

� WA RNING
• Always make sure the safety
belt tongue is inserted into the
Fastening the safety belt buckle for the same seating posi­ Adjusting shoulder seat belt
tion.
• Adjust your seat before fastening Belt height adjustment front seats
• Attaching the safety belt to the
the safety belt. See page 76.
buckle for another seat could re­ Safety belt height adjustors for the
duce safety belt effectiveness and front seats can be used to adjust the
cause injury. height of the shoulder portion of the safety
� WARN I N G belt. This feature will help you properly posi­
Safety belts offer optimum protec­ tion the shoulder portion of the safety belt
tion only when the seat back is up­ across your shoulder.
right and belts are properly posi­ • Press the handle slowly up or down so
tioned on the body. Improperly that the shoulder portion of the safety belt
positioned safety belts can cause is positioned nearly midway over the shoul­
serious personal injury in an acci­ der.
dent.
• Pull on the shoulder belt to check
whether the belt anchor is securely locked
in place.

20
------ SAFETY FIRST

-- - -·- ··
--·-- ---··- -
B4D-221
------ ----'

The shoulder belt must be positioned over

the shoulder.
� WARNING � WARNING
It must never rest against the neck
• Always position your safety belt Pregnant woman should espe­
and must fit against your body. The
properly over your body for maxi­ cially make sure to wear the lap
lap belt must be worn low and tight
mum safety. An improperly posi­ portion of the safety belt as low as
across the pelvis. Sea illustration
tioned safety belt can cause seri­ possible across the pelvis and be­
above.
ous injury in an accident. low the rounding of the abdomen.
Pull belt tight. The best way to protect the fetus
• Safety belts worn too loose will
fat your body move too far forward is to protect the mother - through­
in a crash. out the entire pregnancy.
A loose belt can also shift its posi­
tion on your body from the strong
bones to mora vulnerable soft tis­
sua and cause serious injury.

21
SAFETY RRST -------

Lateral belt adjustment outer rear The outer rear seats are equipped with a
l
Safety belt guide for the center
seats lateral shoulder belt adjustment. rear seat
• To adjust the shoulder belts of the outer The three-point belt adjusts itself to suit the
Passengers sitting in the rear must position
safety belts over their body as outlined for seats. move the belt guide towards the height of the occupant.
the front occupants. center of the vehicle for taller occupants, or
The above illustration shows the belt fitted
towards the outside for shorter occupants.
The shoulder belt must be positioned over on a person of average height.
See symbols on the belt guide.
the shoulder.
It must never rest against the neck
and must fit against your body. The
lap belt must be worn low and tight
across the pelvis.
See illustration above. Pull belt tight.

22
 SAFETY FIRST

Convertible Locking Retractor Deactivating the locking retractor

(CLR) The locking retractor is deactivated by un­
The convertible locking retractor is neces­ fasten ing the safety belt and allowing the
sary to secure child restraint systems. safety belt to retract completely to its
stowed position. The safety belt can now be
The retractors for the front passenger's seat
used as an ordinary three-point safety belt
and the rear seat three point safety belts are
without the additional locking feature.
equipped with an automatic locking feature
in addition to the emergency locking fea­ If a person sitting In the passenger
ture. seat or rear wearing the safety belt
should activate the locking retrac­
If you need to install a child restraint system
tor. then the safety belt must be un­
on the front passenger's seat or on one of
fastened in order to deactivate the
the rear seats, it must be secured by use of
locking retractor.
-see pages 32 and 51 for important safety
For occupants who may be smaller, the the belt after activating the locking feature

placing the belt in the guide, if otherwise the

position of the belt should be adjusted by
information related to the use of child re­
straints on the front seat.
� WARN I N G
belt would run across the wearer's neck
instead of over the center of the shoulder Activating the locking retractor Never unfasten the safety belt to
(see illustration). deactivate the locking retractor
• Slowly pull the belt all the way out. while the vehicle is in motion. You
If the occupant moves a long way to one
side and the belt slides out of the guide it. • Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for would not be protected at all and
must be placed back in the guide by hand. that seating position (pull o n it to check!) could suffer serious injury in an ac­
an d guide the rest of the belt with your hand cident.
back in place; while doing this you should
hear a clicking sound. This sound signals
that the locking retractor has been acti­
vated.
SAFETYRRST ------

Belt tensioner
� WARNING
The retractors for the three-point safety
belts are equipped with belt tensioners. • Safety belt systems including
Sensors activate the belt tensioners in fron­ belt tensioners cannot be re­
tal collisions when deceleration is high paired. Special procedures are re­
enough. This tightens the belt and takes up quired for removal and installation
belt slack. Taking up the slack helps to re­ of this system. Therefore. any
duce forward occupant movement during a work on the safety belt system
collision. must be performed only by an au­
thorized Audi Dealer.
The belt tensioner can only be activated
once. The belt tensioner will not be acti­ • The belt tensioner system
vated if the safety belt is not in use. works for one accident only. If belt
tensioners have been activated.
Never let the belt remain extended
Unfastening the safety belt the system must be replaced.
over a rear seat back that has been
• Push the red release button on the folded forward. The rear belt ten­
buckle. The belt tongue will spring out of the sioner will be activated unnecessar­
Notes
buckle. ily in an accident and then have to be
replaced. • When the safety belt tensioner is acti­
• Let the belt to wind up on the retractor as
The belt tensioner will not activate in a light vated, a fine dust is released. This is normal
you guide belt tongue to its stowed posi­
frontal collision insufficient to actuate the and is not caused by a fire in the vehicle.
tion.
tensioner or in any side, rollover, or rear-end • Observe all safety regulations if the ve­
collision. hicle or individual parts of the system, par­
ticularly the safety belt or airbag, are to be
scrapped. Your authorized Audi Dealers are
familiar with these regulations and can per­
form this service for you.

24
--
--- SAFETYRRST

Airbag system
Your vehicle has two front and four System components The system must be inspected
side airbags, one front and one side air­ The airbag system consists of the following: if the indicator light:
bag for each front seat occupant, one side • does not come on when the ignition is
• electronic control module,
airbag" for each rear seat occupant sitting switched on,
on the left and right rear seat. • an inflatable airbag with gas generator in­
side the steering wheel, • does not go out after a few seconds after
In addition, your vehicle is equipped with the ignition is switched on, or
head airbags* on the left and right sides to • an inflatable airbag with gas generator in­
protect occupants seated next to the front side the instrument panel tor the front pas­ • comes on while driving.
and rear doors. senger, In the event of a system malfunction, the in­
• supplemental side airbags in the back­
dicator light will stay on continuously to
serve as a constant reminder to have the
rest padding of the front and rear seats*,
system repaired.
• an inflatable curtain head airbag above
the doors on each side,
• an AIRBAG indicator light in the � WARNING
instrument cluster ( see "Warning I Indica­
tor lights" page 1 25). If any of these conditions occur,
have the alrbag system inspected
The indicator light in the instrument cluster
immediately by your Audi Dealer.
(readiness light) will light up for a few sec­ Otherwise, the airbags in your ve­
onds each time the ignition is switched on. hicle may not work properly in
The light monitors the electronic control case of a frontal collision or a side
module, sensor circuits, and system wiring. impact.

25
SAFETY FIRST

Front airbags may not inflate in certain fron­

tal collisions. Vehicle damage, repair costs
or even the lack of vehicle damage is not
necessarily an indication of proper airbag
operation.
The front airbags can only provide additional
protection for the chest and face of the
driver and the front seat passenger when...
• safety belts are worn properly,

• the seats have been positioned so that

the occupant is properly seated as far as
possible from the airbag

Front airbag It is very important to remember that front • and the head restraints have been prop­
airbags only supplement the three point erly adjusted.
The airbag for the driver is located in the safety belts in some frontal accidents in Airbags do not protect the lower part of the
steering wheel hub and is marked "AIR­ which the vehicle deceleration is high body.
BAG." See illustration above. enough to activate the airbags.
The airbag for the front passenger's seat is Safety belts are important to help keep front
located in the instrument panel above the seat occupants in the proper seated posi­
Front airbags are not activated ... tion so that airbags can unfold properly and
glove compartment and is also marked with
• if the ignition is switched off provide added protection as intended.
"AIRBAG." See right illustration.
• in side collisions

• in rear-end collisions
• in roiJovers

For more details see next pages.

26
------ SAFETYRRST

Remember too, airbags will deploy only How the front airbag system works
� WARNING
�
once and only in certain kinds of accidents The airbag system is designed so that in a
-your safety belts are a� ways t ere t? off�r severe frontal collision the driver and
• To reduce the risk of injury
protection in those acc1dents m wh1ch air­ front passenger airbags are triggered. Th�
when the front airbags inflate, the
bags are not supposed to deploy or when front airbags will not inflate in frontal colli­
driver and passenger should al­
they have already deployed.
�
ways sit in an upright position and sions in which vehicle deceleration is not
must never lean against or place An airbag is not a substitute or the safety high enough, or in side or rear collisions, or
any part of your body too close to belt. It is part of the overall veh1cle safety sy­ in rollovers.
the area where the front alrbags stem. The airbag system works most effec­ It is not possible to define an airbag trig�er­
are located. tively when used with the safety belts. ing range that will cover every poss1ble
Therefore, always wear your safety belts. angle of impact, since the circumstances
• See "Importance of proper seat­
See pages 14 to 24. will vary considerably between one acci­
ing position" in this section at
pages 29 and 37 and heed all It is important to remember that 'JI:'hile the dent and another.
WARNINGS. supplemental airbag system. IS d�s�g�ed to Important factors include, for example, the
reduce the likelihood of senous lnJUnes, 1t nature ( hard or soft) of the object which the
G Occupants who are unbelted, can cause swelling, bruising, and minor
out of position or too close to the car hits, the angle of impact, vehicle speed,
abrasions. and etc.
airbag can be seriously injured by
an airbag as it unfolds with great
force in the blink of an eye. For
seat adjustment, see page 76.

27
SAFETYRRST --
---

The triggering of the airbag system de­

pends on the vehicle deceleration rate
� WARNING
caused by the collision and registered by
• The fine dust created when air­
the control unit. If this rate is below the ref­
bags deploy can cause breathing
erence value programmed into the control
problems for people with a history
unit, the airbags will not be triggered, even
of asthma or other breathing con­
though the car may be badly damaged as a
ditions.
result of the accident.
• To reduce the risk of breathing
When the system is activated, the airbags
problems, those with asthma or
fill with a propellant gas, break open the
other respiratory conditions
padded covers, and inflate between the
should get fresh air right away by
steering wheel and the driver and between
getting out of the car or opening
the instrument panel and the front passen­
windows or doors.
ger. Fully inflated airbags in combination with
properly worn safety belts slow down and • If you are in an accident in
All this takes place within the blink of an
limit the occupant's forward movement and which airbags deploy, wash your
eye, so fast that many people don't even
help to reduce the risk of injury to the head hands and face with mild soap and
realize that the airbags have deployed. The
and upper torso. water before eating.
airbags also inflate with a great deal or force
and nothing should be in their way when The airbags will deflate immediately after • Be careful not to get the dust
they deploy. the deployment so that the front occupants into your eyes or into any cuts or
can see through the windshield again. scratches.
When the system is activated, fine dust is • If the residue should get into
released. This is normal and is not caused your eyes, flush them with water.
by a fire in the vehicle. It could irritate skin.

28
--
-- SAFETY FIRST

Importance of proper seating

position � WARNING '4 WARNING continued
In a collision airbags must inflate within a • Sitting too close to the steering • Children age 1 2 or younger
blink of an eye and with considerable force. wheel or instrument panel will de­ should always ride in the rear seat.
The supplemental airbags could injure you crease the effectiveness of the air­ If children are not properly re­
if you are not seated properly. Therefore in bags and will increase the risk of strained, they may be severely in­
order to help the airbag to do its job, it is im­ personal injury in an accident. jured or killed when an airbag
portant, both as a driver and as a passenger inflates. Never let children ride un­
• If you are unrestrained, leaning
to sit properly at all times. By keeping room restrained or improperly re­
forward, sitting sideways or out of
between your body and the front of the pas­ strained in the vehicle.
position in any way. your risk of in­
senger compartment, the airbag can inflate
jury is much higher. You will also • Adjust the front seats properly.
fully and completely and provide supple­
mental protection in certain frontal colli­
receive serious or fatal injuries - Never ride with the backrest re-
sions. See page 76 for information on the
from the airbag if you are up clined.
against it or too close to it when it
adjustment of the front seats and also - Always sit as far as possible
"Front seats" page 78, for details on the op­
inflates.
from the the steering wheel or
eration of the seat adjustment controls. It's • To reduce the risk of injury
the instrument panel.
especially importantthat children be proper­ when an alrbag inflates, always
ly restrained. See chapter "Child safety", wear safety belts properly.
page 44. See "How to wear the safety belts
properly" on page 18.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

29
 SAFETY FIRST --
--

Adjusting the driver's seat

� WAR N I N G continued For detailed steps for adjusting the driver's
- Always sit upright with your seat please see "Front Seats" on page 76.
back against the backrest of We recommend that you adjust the driver's
your seat. seat as follows:
Never place your feet on the in­ - adjust the seat in fore and aft direction so
strument panel or on the seat. that you can easily push the pedals all the
Always keep both feet on the way while keeping your knee slightly
floor in front of the seat to help bent.
prevent serious injuries to the - adjust the seatback so that when you sit
legs and hips if the airbag in­ with your back against the seatback, you
flates. BBN-163
can still grasp the top of the steering
There is a lot that you and your passengers wheel.
can do to help the individual safety features adjust the steering wheel- see chapter
installed in your Audi work together as a "Adjustable steering column" page 98.
- the distance from the center of your
system.

breastbone to the center of the airbag

cover on the steering wheel must be at
least 1 0 inches (25 em) or more. See il­
lustration.

. 30
------- SAFETYRRST

adjust the passenger's seat as far as pos­

� WARNING � WARNING sible to the rear of the fore and aft adjust-
1)1ent range.
• Never sit closer than 10 inches • Pointing the steering wheel to­
(25 em) to the steering wheel. ward your face decreases the abil­
ity of the supplemental driver's air­
• If you cannot sit more than
bag to protect you in an accident.
� WARNING
10 inches (25 em) from the steer­
ing wheel, we recommend that • Holding the steering wheel the • Always keep both feet on the
you investigate whether adaptive wrong way can cause serious inju­ floor in front of the seat.
equipment may be available to ries to the hands, arms and head if • Never place your feet on the in­
help you reach the pedals and in­ the driver's airbag inflates. strument panel or on the seat. If
crease your seating distance from • Never hold the steering wheel at the airbag inflates and your feet
the steering wheel. the 1 2 o'clock position or with are on the instrument panel or on
your hands at other positions in­ the seat, your could receive seri­
side the steering wheel rim or on ous personal injuries.
Adjusting the steering wheel the steering wheel hub.
For detailed steps for adjusting the steering
wheel please see "Adjustable steering col­ Some other important points to
umn" page 98. Adjusting the passenger's seat know
Adjust the steering wheel so that the steer­ For detailed steps for adjusting the pas­ Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye
ing wheel and airbag cover points at your senger's seat please see "Front Seats" on with great force, things you have on your lap
chest and not at your face. The steering page 76. or have placed on the seat could become
wheel should be adjusted so that you can We recommend that you adjust the passen­ dangerous projectiles and be pushed into
hold the outer rim of the steering wheel ger's seat as follows: you if the airbag inflates.
comfortably with your hands at the 3 o'clock
and 9 o'clock positions. - backrest upright (never reclined)
place your feet on the floor in front of the
passenger's seat Always head all WARNINGS
on next page.

31
SAFETY RRST -------

Child restraints on the front seat -

. � WARNING �, WARNING continued important things to know
• Objects between you and the • Never transport items on or in All children, especially 1 2 years old and
airbag can increase the risk of in­ the area of the front passenger younger should always ride in the back seat
jury in an accident by interfering seat. Objects could move into the properly restrained for their age and size.
with the way the airbag unfolds or area of the front alrbags during The airbag on the passenger side makes the
by being pushed into you as the braking or other sudden maneuver front seat a potentially dangerous place for
airbag inflates. and become dangerous projectiles a child to ride. The front seat is not the saf­
that can cause serious personal in­ est place for a child in a forward-facing child
• Never hold things in your hands
jury if the airbags inflate. seat. It is a very dangerous place for an in­
or on your lap when the vehicle is
fant or a larger child in a rearward-facing
in use. • Never recline the front passen­
seat.
• Never place or attach accesso­ ger's seat to transport objects.
ries or other objects (such as cup Items can also move into the area
holders, telephone brackets or of the side airbags or the front air­
even large and bulky objects) on bag during braking or sudden ma­
the doors, over or near the area neuver. Objects near the airbags • Never install rear-facing child
marked ,.Airbag" on the steering can become projectiles and cause seats or infant carriers on the front
wheel, instrument panel, seat injury particularly when the seat is passenger seat. A child will be se­
backrests or between those areas reclined. riously injured and can be killed
and yourself. These objects could when the passenger airbag in­
cause injury in a crash especially flates.
when the airbags inflate.

32
 SAFETY FIRST

For this reason, and because children are If exceptional circumstances require the
M WARNING continued generally better protected- when properly use of a forward-facing child seat on the
restrained according to their age and size ­ front seat, the child's safety and well-being
• The inflating airbag will hit the
in a rear seating position, we strongly rec­ require that the following special precau­
child seat or infant carrier with
ommend that children always sit in the back tions be taken:
great force and will smash the
seat. See "Child Safety" on page 44.
child seat and child against the
backrest, center arm rest, or door. � WARNING
• Always install rear-facing child � WARNING
seats or infant carriers on the rear If, in exceptional circumstances,
seat. Forward-facing child seats you must install a forward-facing
installed on the front passenger's child restraint on the front passen­
seat may interfere with the deploy­ ger's seat:
A child seat or infant carrier installed on the ment of the airbag and cause seri­ make sure the forward-facing
front seat may be struck and knocked out of ous injury to the child. Install for­ seat has been designed and cer­
position by the rapidly inflating passenger's ward-facing child seats on the rear tified by its manufacturer for
airbag in a frontal collision. The airbag could seat. usa on a front seat with a pas­
greatly reduce the effectiveness of the child senger front and side airbag.
restraint and even seriously injure the child
Always follow the manufactur­
during inflation.
er's instructions provided with
the child seat or carrier.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

33
SAFETYRRST --
---

'4 WARNING continued � WARNING

- Always move the passenger To be sure the side airbags can
seat into its rearmost position, deploy in a side impact:
as far away from the airbag as • Never place protective seat cov­
possible before installing the ers or replacement upholstery
child restraint. The backrest over the front seatbacks that have
must be adjusted to an upright not been specifically approved by
position. Audi. Since the side airbaga
- For more important information deploy out of the side of the seat­
on the use of child restraints in back, they would not be able to
your Audl, see ""child seats"", deploy and protect properly.
page 44. • Do not use additional seat cush­
Supplemental side airbags ions that cover or interfere with
The supplemental aide airbags are in the areas where the side airbags
the backrest padding for the front and outer inflate.
rear* seats (see illustration). • Damage to the original seat cov­
The outboard side of each front backrest ers or to the seam in the area of the
and the location of the airbags in the back­ side airbag module must be re­
rest are marked with the word "AIRBAG." paired immediately by an autho­
The supplemental side airbaga can rized Audi Dealer.
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper
torso on that side of the car that is struck in
a side collision.

34
------- SAFETYRRST

The supplemental side airbags inflate only A side airbag is not a substitute for the It is )'lOt possible to define an airbag trigger­
in severe side collisions occuring on safety belt. It is part of the overall vehicle ing range that will cover every possible
the impact side of the vehicle. safety system. The airbag system works angle of impact, since the circumstances
The supplemental side airbags will most effectively when used with the safety will vary considerably between one acci­
not inflate... belts. Therefore, always wear your safety dent and another.
belts. See pages 1 4 to 24. Important factors include, for example, the
• if the ignition is switched off
It is important to remember that while the nature ( hard or soft ) of the object which the
• in frontal collisions supplemental side airbag system is de­ car hits, the angle of impact, vehicle speed,
• in side collisions in which vehicle signed to reduce the likelihood of serious in· and etc.
deceleration is not high enough juries, it can cause swelling, bruising, and The triggering of the airbag system de­
minor abrasions. pends on the vehicle deceleration rate
• in rear collisions
How the supplemental side airbag caused by the collision and registered by
• in rollovers.
system works the control unit. If this rate is below the ref­
Under some accident conditions, both front erence value programmed into the control
and side airbags may inflate. In a side collision the supplemental side air­ unit, the. airbags will not be triggered, even
bags can help to reduce the risk of injury to though the car may be badly damaged as a
Remember too, airbags will deploy only
the upper part of the body on the side of the result of the accident.
once and only in certain kinds of accidents
car that is struck in a side collision.
-your safety belts are always there to offer
protection in those accidents in which air­ In order to assure this additional protection,
bags are not supposed to deploy or when the side airbag must inflate within the blink
they have already deployed. of an eye during a collision.

35
 SAFETY FIRST

----
--- ----
-- -

When the system is activated, fine dust is

� WARNING released. This is normal and is not caused
by a fire in the vehicle. It could irritate your
To reduce the risk of injury when
skin.
the supplemental side airbag in­
flates.
always sit in an upright position
and do not lean against the area
� WARNING
where the supplemental side • The fine dust created when air­
airbag is located. bags deploy can cause breathing
always make sure that safety problems for people with a history
balta are worn properly, of asthma or other breathing con­
ditions.
- a child must never rest his/her
When the supplemental side airbag is acti­ head against the side trim panel • To reduce the risk of breathing
vated, it breaks through a seam on the side in the area where the supple­ problems. those with asthma or
of the seatback identified by the AIRBAG la­ mental aide airbag inflates. An other respiratory conditions
bel. It inflates between the side trim panel inflating airbag can cause seri­ should get fresh air right away by
and the passenger within the blink of an eye ous or fatal injury. getting out of the car or opening
at very high speed and with great force. The windows or doors.
supplemental side airbag could injure you if
see "Importance of proper seat­
• If you are in an accident in
your seating position is not proper or upright ing position.. in this section at
pages 29 and 37 and heed all which airbags deploy. wash your
or if items are located in the area where the hands and face with mild soap and
supplemental side airbag inflates. This ap­
WARNINGS.
water before eating.
plies especially to children. See also "Child
Safety". on page 44.

36
----- SAFETYRRST

Some other important points to

M WARNING continued � WARNING know
• Be careful not to get the dust Failure to maintain an upright and Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye
into your eyes or into any cuts or proper seating position will in� with great force, things you have on your lap
scratches. crease the risk of personal injury or have placed on the seat could become
when the supplemental side air� dangerous projectiles and be pushed into
• If the residue should get into
bag inflates. To reduce the risk of you if the airbag inflates.
your eyes, flush them with water.
injury that can be caused by an in�
flating supplemental side airbag:
Importance of proper seating Never lean against the door and
� WARNING
position over the area where the side ai� • Objects between you and the
bag is located. airbag can increase the risk of in�
In a collision supplemental side airbags
must inflate within a fraction of a second - Navar let anyone to place their jury in an accident by interfering
and with considerable force. In order to help hand, lag or face near the sup� with the way the airbag unfolds or
the airbag to do its job, it is important, both plemental side airbag. by baing pushed into you as the
as a driver and as a passenger to sit properly - Do not let anyone sitting in the airbag inflates.
at all times. By keeping room between your front seat put their hand out of • Never hold things in your hands
body and the side of the passenger the window or lean against the or on your lap when the vehicle is
compartment, the airbag can inflate fully door. in use.
and completely and provide supplemental
protection in certain side collisions. - Never let anyone sitting in the
rear seat hold onto the sides of
the front seat backrest.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

37
SAFETY FIRST

Child restraints on the front seat ­

1\1 WARNING continued �� WARNING continued important things to know
• Never place or attach accesso­ • Use the built-in coat hooks only The airbag on the passengerside makes the
ries or other objects (such as cup for lightweight clothing. Do not front seat a potentially dangerous place for
holders. telephone brackets. or leave any heavy or sharp-edged ob­ a child to ride. The front seat is not the saf­
even large. bulky objects) on the jects in the pockets which may in­ est place for a child in a forward-facing child
doors. over or near the area terfere with side airbag deploy­ seat. It is a very dangerous place for an in­
marked .,Airbag" on the seat back­ ment and can cause personal inju­ fant or a larger child in a rearward-facing
rests or between those areas and ry in an accident. seat. For additional important information
yourself (an umbrella. bag. etc.}. and WARNINGS please see chapters
• Never recline the front passen­ "Front airbags" and "Child Safety," begin­
Such objects can become danger­ ger's seat to transport objects.
ous projectiles and cause injury if ning on page 44.
Items can also move into the area
the supplemental side airbag in­ of the side airbags during braking
flates. or sudden maneuvers. Objects
• Always prevent heavy objects near the supplemental side airbag
from knocking against or hitting can become projectiles and cause
the sides of the seatbacks. This injury particularly when the seat is
could damage the side airbag sys­ reclined.
tems and they would not deploy in
case of an accident!

38
 SAFETY FIRST

The head airbags will not inflate... How the head airbag system works
• if the ignition is switched off In the event of a side-impact collision, the
• in frontal collisions head airbag deploys to reduce the risk that
persons sitting next to the doors will be in­
• in side collisions in which vehicle jured if their heads strike the windows or
deceleration is not high enough door columns. In addition, the head airbag
• in rear collisions protects occupants from objects hurtled
• in roll-overs.
into the vehicle from the outside, such as
broken glass.
Under some accident conditions, front and In order to provide optimal protection for ve­
side and head airbags may inflate. hicle occupants, the airbag system is de­
Remember too, airbags will deploy only signed so that the head and side airbags on
once and only in certain kinds of accidents the accident side are always triggered to­
Head airbags (SIDEGUARD) -your safety belts are always there to offer gether.
protection in those accidents in which air­ Therefore, the conditions under which the
The head airbags (inflatable curtain head bags are not supposed to deploy or when
airbags) are located on the left and right head airbags are deployed are identical to
they have already deployed. those for the side airbags. See page 35.
sides above the doors underneath the head­
liner. These locations are marked with the A head airbag is not a substitute for the
word "AIRBAG". safety belt It is part of the overall vehicle
safety system. The airbag system works
The head airbags are inflated together with most effectively when used with the safety
the supplemental side airbags only in se­ belts. Therefore, always wear your safety­
vere side collisions occuring on the impact belts. See pages 1 4 to 24.
side of the vehicle.

39
SAFETY RRST --
---

Importance of proper seating

� WARNING position
• The fine dust created when air­ In a collision head airbags must inflate
bags deploy can cause breathing within a fraction of a second. In order to help
problems for people with a history the airbag to do its job, it is important, that
of asthma or other breathing con­ driver and passengers sit properly at all
ditions. times. By keeping room between your body
and the side windows, the airbag can inflate
• To reduce the risk of breathing fully and completely and provide supple­
problems. those with asthma or
mental protection in certain side collisions.
other respiratory conditions
should get fresh air right away by
getting out of the car or opening � WARNING
windows or doors.
When the head airbag is triggered, it de­
• If you are in an accident in • To be sure the head airbags can
ploys from above in a downward direction,
covering the side windows and door col­ which airbags deploy. wash your deploy properly and can help to re­
umns like a curtain - see illustration. It hands and face with mild soap and duce the risk of injury In a side col­
therefore helps to protect both the front and water before eating. lision:
rear occupants at the same time. • Be careful not to get the dust - Never lean your head. arm or el­
To make certain that this additional protec­ into your eyes or into any cuts or bow against the door. windows
tive functions is effective, make certain that scratches. and the area of the head airbags.
the areas in which the airbags deploy are • If the residue should get into Never put your arm. hand or
free of obstacles. your eyes. flush them with water. head out of the window.
When the system is activated, fine dust is
released. This is normal and is not caused
by a fire in the vehicle. It could irritate your
skin.

40
 SAFETY FIRST

Some other important points to Care, Service and Disposal of

know
� WARNING Airbags
Because head airbags inflate in the blink of • Do not swivel the sun visors to Parts of the airbag system have been
an eye with a certain force, things you have the side if you have any objects installed at different places on your Audi.
on your lap or have placed on the seat could clipped onto them (for example Servicing or repairing in an area of the car
become dangerous projectiles and be pens). If the airbag should deploy, could impair airbag performance.
pushed into you if the airbag inflates. you could be injured by these ob­ Some general requirements for airbags
jects. must be observed to make sure the effec­
• Use the built-in coat hooks only tiveness of the system will not be impaired
� WARNING for lightweight clothing. Do not and that discarded components do not
• Objects between you and the
usa any hangers when hanging cause injury or pollute the environment.
airbag can Increase the risk of in­ clothing on the coat hooks. Do not
jury in an accident by interfering leave any heavy or sharp-edged ob­
with the way the airbag unfolds or jects in the pockets which may in­ � WARNING
by being pushed Into you as the terfere with head airbag deploy­
ment and can cause personal in­ A damaged airbag system may not
airbag inflates.
jury in an accident. work properly in an accident. In­
• Only genuine Audi roll-up sun­ correct service procedures could
screens may be used on the rear cause an airbag to deploy unex­
doors. pectedly during service, injuring
someone. To avoid damaging the
airbag system, possibly causing
malfunction leading to injury in an
accident or during repair:

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

41
SAFETYRRST -------

� WARNING continued ftl WARNING continued �, WARNING continued

• Do not cover, obstruct, or • Never place protective seat cov­ • The manufacture date can be
change the steering wheel horn ers or replacement upholstery found on the Safety Compliance
pad or airbag cover or the instru­ over the front and rear seatbacks Sticker located on the left door
ment panel, particularly in the area that have not been specifically ap­ jamb as well as on the Vehicle
of the passenger side airbag mod­ proved by Audi. Since the side air­ Identification Label in your
ule. bags deploy out of the side of the Maintenance booklet. It is abso­
• For cleaning the horn pad or in­ seatback, it would not be able to lutely essential to observe this
strument panel, use only a soft, deploy and protect properly. date in order to assure that the sy­
dry cloth or one moistened with • Do not use additional seat cush­ stem is in good working order.
plain water. Solvents or cleaners ions that cover or interfere with • If components of the airbag sys­
could damage the airbag cover. Do the areas where the side airbags tem must be discarded, or ifthe ve­
not make any repairs, adjust­ inflate. hicle must be scrapped, certain
ments, or modifications to any • Damage to the original seat cov­ safety precautions must be ob­
parts of the airbag system. ers or to the seam in the area of the served. Your authorized Audi
• Do not modify the front bumper side airbag module must be re­ Dealer knows these precautions
or vehicle body structure. paired immediately by an autho­ and can give you the necessary in­
rized Audi Dealer. formation. Failure to follow these
precautions and procedures could
• The airbag system must be re­
increase the risk of personal in­
placed by your authorized Audi jury.
Dealer no later than 14 years after
the manufacture date of your ve­
hicle.

42
------- SAFETY RRST

Please be sure that this manual al­

'4 WA R N I N G continued ways remains with your Audi when­
ever you lend your vehicle to
• Any work on the airbag system.
another person or if you sell it so
such as removing/installing, re­
that this and other important infor­
pairing. or any work on the steer­
mation will always be available to
ing wheel. instrument panel . front
the driver and passengers.
seats or electrical system (Includ­
ing the installation of audio equip­
ment. mobile telephones and CB
radios. etc.) must be performed by
a qualified technician who has the
. training and special equipment
necessary. Improper handling may
result in injury.
• For any work on the airbag sys­
tem. we strongly recommend that
you see your Audi Dealer.
• The alrbag system can be acti­
vated only once. After an alrbag
has inflated. it must be replaced.

43
SAFETYRRST -------

Child safety
The physical principles of what happens
when your car is in an accident, illustrated
� WARNING J'A1 WARNING continued
on pages 1 4- 1 7, apply also to children. But
• Accident statistics have shown An unrestrained or improperly re­
unlike adults and teenagers. their muscles
that children are generally safer in strained child is also at greater
and bones are not fully developed. In many
. the rear seat area than in the front risk of injury or death through con­
respects chrldren are at greater risk of seri­
seating position. Always restrain tac:t with �n inflating airbag. A
ous injury in accidents than are adults.
any child age 12 and under in the su1table child restraint properly
Because children's bodies are not fully de­ rear. installed and used at one of the
veloped, they require restraint systems es­
pecially designed for their size. weight, and
•
.
�
All ve icle occupants and espe­ rear seating positions provides the
highest degree of protection for
Cially children must be restrained
body structure. Many countries and all infants and small children in most
properly whenever riding in a ve­
states of the United States and provinces of accidents.
hicle. An unrestrained or improp­
Canada have laws requiring the use of ap­
erly restrained child could be in­
proved child restraint systems for infants
jured by striking the interior or by
and small children. _ Consult the child seat manufacturer's in­
bemg eJected from the vehicle dur­
Child restraints, like adult safety belts, must structions to be sure the seat is right for
ing a sudden maneuver or impact.
be used properly to be effective. Used im­ your child's size.
properly, they can increase the risk of seri­
ous injury in an accident.

44
 SAFETY FIRST

Using a rear-facing child seat on the

front seat of a vehicle equipped with
ftl WA R N I N G continued
an airbag will seriously injure and
• Never install a rear-facing child
can even kill a child when the airbag
restraint in the forward-facing di­
inflates in an accident.
rection. Such restraints are de­
signed for the special needs of in­
fants and very small children and
� WAR N I N G cannot protect them properly if
• Never install rear-facing child turned forward-facing.
seats or infant carriers on the front
passenger seat. A child will be se­ Child restraints on the front seat -
riously iniured and can be killed important things to know
when the passenger airbag in­
The airbag on the passenger side makes the
Infant seats flates.
front seat a potentially dangerous place for
Infants up to about 9 months old (22 lbs. or • The inflating airbag will hit the a child to ride. The front seat is not the saf­
1 0 kg) receive the best protection in special child seat or infant carrier with est place for a child in a forward-facing child
infant carriers and child seats designed for great force and will smash the seat. It is a very dangerous place for an in­
their age group. Many experts believe that child seat and child against the fant or a larger child in a rearward-facing
infants and small children should ride only in backrest, canter arm rest, or door. seat.
special restraints in which the child's back • Always install rear--facing child
faces the driving direction. These child seats or infant carriers on the rear
seats can be used safely only on the rear seat.
seat of your Audi.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

45
SAFETY FIRST ------

� WARNING 1ft WARNING continued

If, in exceptional circumstances The child would strike the interior
you have no alternative but to of the vehicle and could also be
install a rear facing child seat or in­ struck by the adult's body moving
fant canier an the front passenger forward. The child and the adult
seat, deactivate the front passen­ could injure each another.
ger airbag prior to installing the
child restraint.
Please note, that the side airbag In a frontal accident at a speed of 20-35 mph
for the front passenger seat will (30-56 km/h) the forces acting on a
remain functional even if the front 1 3-pound (6 kg) infant would be more than
passenger alrbag is switched off. 20timestheweightofthe child. This means
Make sure the child restraint has the weight of the child would suddenly be
been designed and certified by its more than 260 pounds (120 kg). Under
manufacturer for use on a front these conditions, only an appropriate child
Babies and older children must restraint properly used can reduce the risk
seat with a side airbag.
never ride in a vehicle sitting on of serious injury.
Always move the passenger seat the lap of an adult. Holding a child
into its raarmost position, as far in your arms is never a substitute
away from the airbag as possible for a child restraint system. The
before installing the child re­ strongest adult could not hold
straint. The backrest must be ad­ onto the child under the forces ex­
justed to an upright position. erted in an accident.

46
--
-- SAFETY FIRST

m WARNING � WARNING
Forward-facing child seats If, in exceptional circumstances,
installed on the front passenger's you must install a forward-facing
seat may interfere with the deploy­ child restraint on the front passen­
ment of the airbag and cause seri­ ger's seat:
ous injury to the child. Install for­ make sure the forward-facing
ward·facing child seats on the rear seat has been designed and cer­
seat if the front passenger airbag tified by its manufacturer for
has not been deactivated. use on a front seat with a pas­
senger front and side airbag.
If exceptional circumstances require the Always follow the manufactur­
use of a forward-facing child seat on the er's instructions provided with
Convertible seats front seat. the child's safety and well-being the child seat or carrier.
A child too large for an infant restraint up to require that the following special precau­ Always move the passenger
4 years old (40 lbs. or 1 8 kg) should be re­ tions be taken: seat into its rearmost position,
strained in a child seat certified for their as far away from the airbag as
weight. possible before installing the
The airbag on the passenger side makes the child restraint. The backrest
front seat a potentially dangerous place for must be adjusted to an upright
a child to ride. The front seat is not the saf­ position.
est place for a child in a forward-facing child
seat. It is a very dangerous place for an in­
fant or a larger child in a rearward-facing
seat.

47
SAFETY FIRST --

Children of average size of about 7 years

and older may use available three point � WARNING
combination lap and shoulder belts. It is
usual�y best to put these children in ap­ �lways position the shoulder por­
tion of the three-point belt mid­
propnate booster seats. Be sure the way over the shoulder of the child.
booster seat meets all applicable safety
The shoulder portion must never
standards.
rest against or across the neck. It
Booster seats raise the seating position of should never contact or remain in
the child and reposition both the lap and front of the face, chin, or throat.
shoulder parts of the safety belt so that they The lap belt portion of the three
pass across the child's body in the right point belt as well as any lap belt
places. alone must always pass as low as
}he rou.ting of the belt over the child's body possible across the pelvis, never
Booster seats IS very Important for the child's protection, over the abdomen. Failure to prop­

Children up to 7 years old (55 1 bs, or 25 kg)

whether or not a booster seat is used. erly route safety belts over a
Chil�ren age 12 and younger should always child's body will cause severe iniu­
are best protected in child safety seats de­ ries in an accident.
signed for their age and weight. Experts say nde 1n the back seat properly restrained for
that the skeletal structure, particularly the their age and size.
pelvis, of these children is not fully devel­
oped, and they should not use the vehicle
safety belts.

48
------- SAFETY ARST

In a collision, airbags must inflate within a

blink of an eye and with considerable force. � WARNING
In order to do its job, the airbag needs room
Never let a child stand or kneel on
to inflate so that it will be there to protect any seat, particularly the front
the occupant as the occupant moves for­ seat. Never let a child ride in the
ward into the airbag. cargo area of your car. If a child is
A vehicle occupant who is out of position leaning forward, sitting sideways
and to close to the airbag gets in the way of or out of position in any way, the
on infloting nirbag. When an occupant is too child is more likely to be injured in
close he or she will be struck violently and a crash and will receive serious or
will r�ceive serious or possibly even fatal in­ fatal injuries if the child comes
jury. into contact with an airbag as it in­
In order for the airbag to offer protection, it flates.
is important that all vehicle occupants, es­ Safety belts and older children
pecially children who must ride on the front
seat in exceptional situations, be properly Children of average size of about 7 years of
restrained and as far away from the airbag age and older may use the lap belt in excep­
as possible. By keeping room between your tional circumstances if the proper use of
body and the front of the passenger three point belts is not possible. Always re­
compartment, the airbag can inflate fully member that children do not have the pro­
and completely and provide supplemental nounced pelvic structure required for the
protection in certain frontal collisions. proper function of lap belts. The child's
safety absolutely requires that a lap belt be
fastened snugly and as low as possible
around the pelvis. Never let a lap belt pass
over the child's stomach or abdomen.

49
SAFETYRRST --
---

� WARNING � WARNING fA, WARNING continued

Failure to properly route safety • An improperly worn safety belt • When buying a child restraint,
balta over a childs body will cause will not provide the best protec­ select one that fits your child and
severe injuries in an accident. tion in an accident and may causa vehicle.
The lap belt portion of the three serious personal injury. Always • Only use child restraint systems
point belt as wall as any lap belt make sure that children and other that fully contact the flat portion
alone must always pass as low as vehicle occupants properly wear of the seat cushion. The child seat
possible across the pelvis, never available restraint systems. Care­ must not tip or lean to either side.
over the stomach or abdomen. fully follow the Instructions pro­ Audi does not recommend using
vided by the manufacturers of child seats that rest on legs or
child restraints. tube-like frames. They do not pro­
Younger children should use a lap belt only
in very exceptional situations and only if no • Commercially available child vida adequate contact with the
child restraint system for the child's size and seats are required to comply with seat.
weight or safer alternative means of trans­ U. S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety • Improperly or inadequately
portation of the child is available. In these Standard (FMVSS) 213 (in Canada installed child restraint systems
exceptional situations, the use of a lap belt CMVSS 213). can increase the risk of injury to
is better than permitting the child to remain • These standards include instal­ children in accidents. Therefore,
totally unrestrained. But remember: a lap lation requirements for using the always carefully read and follow
belt cannot provide the same level of lap portion of a combination lap­ all instructions on installation and
protection as a proper child restraint. shoulder belt such as those use that come with the system.
installed in your vehicle.

50
 SAFETY FIRST

Securing a child seat � WARNING

� WARNING
Convertible Locking Retractor
• Never install rear-facing child • Forward-facing child seats or in­
The retractors for the rear seat three-point
safety belts and the front passenger three­ seats or infant carriers on the front fant carriers installed on the front
point safety belt have a convertible locking passenger seat. A child will be se­ passenger's seat may interfere
feature in addition to the emergency locking riously injured and can be killed with the deployment of the airbag
feature. when the passenger airbag in­ and cause serious injury to the
flates. child. Allow a child to travel on the
If you need to install a child seat at an outer front passenger's seat only in a for­
seating position, you must first activate the • The inflating airbag will hit the
child seat or infant carrier with ward-facing child restraint system
convertible locking feature. Then secure the specifically designed and ap­
child seat by using the seat belt. great force and will smash the
child seat and child against the proved by the child restraint
backrest. center arm rest. or door. manufacturer for use in the front
with airbags. Make sure the pas­
• Always install rear-facing child senger seat is in the rearmost posi­
seats or infant carriers on the rear tion. It is always safer to install a
seat if the front passenger airbag child seat in the rear.
has not been deactivated.

51
SAFETYRRST -------

Activating the convertible • To covert the safety belt into standard If the convertible locking feature has been
locking retractor use after the child restraint is removed, re­ inadvertently activated, the safety belt
• Slowly pull the belt all the way out. lease the tongue from the buckle and allow must be unfastened to deactivate this fea­
the safety belt to fully retract again. The re­ ture. If the convertible locking feature is not
• Hold on to the safety belt while securing tractor will then operate in the normal emer­ deactivated, the safety belt will gradually
the safety belt around the child restraint per gency locking mode for the occupant re­ become tighter and uncomfortable to wear.
the instructions found in the child restraint's straint. The convertible locking feature must be de­
owner's manual. activated to restore normal belt operation
• Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for and greater occupant comfort.
that seating position. Pull on the belt to � WARNING
make sure the safety belt is properly
fastened. Always buckle the child seat firm­ � WARNING
ly in place even if your child is not
• Guide the remaining portion of the belt sitting in it. A loose child seat can Never unfasten the safety belt to
back in place, allowing the retractor to take fly around during a sudden stop or deactivate the convertible locking
up the slack. Press the child restraint in an accident. retractor while the vehicle is in
against the seat cushion as you guide the motion. You would not be pro­
belt into the retractor so that the belt ten­ tected at all and could suffer seri­
sion holds the child restraint firmly in place. Deactivating the convertible ous injury in an accident.
• While the safety belt is retracting, you locking retractor
will hear a continuous clicking noise from The convertible locking retractor is deacti­
the retractor; that means that the convert­ vated by unfastening the safety belt (see
ible locking retractor has been activated. page 24). Allow the safety belt to retract
completely to its stowed position. The
safety belt can now be used as an ordinary
three-point safety belt without the addi­
tional locking feature.

52
 SAFETY FIRST

Child restraint anchorages for

• Install the child restraint in the vehicle • To release the tether strap, loosen the
rear seating position using the LATCH* low­ tension following the child restraint
the rear seats er anchorages according to the child re­ manufacturer's instructions. Depress the
If your child restraint seat or seats are straint manufacturer's instructions. If the spring catch on the hook and release it from
equipped with a tether strap you will want vehicle safety belts are used, activate the the anchorage.
to use one or more of the anchor points pro­ convertible locking retractor feature.
vided on the filler panel. Your vehicle is equipped with threaded fas­
• Guide the tether strap under the rear tening points for the installation of a LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with three child re­ seat head restraints (raise the head restraint anchorage system.
straint anchorages (one for each rear seat­ slightly if necessary) and attach the tether
ing position). See illustration. They have The LATCH system provides lower anchor­
anchorage hook into the opening of the age points located between the seat back
been covered with plastic caps. tether anchorage. Pull on the anchorage and the seat cushion of the rear seat. These
Attaching a child restraint tether hook so that it is held on the anchorage by anchorages are provided for the outboard
strap to the tether anchorage the spring catch of the hook. rear seats of your vehicle.
• Tighten the tether strap firmly following
• Release or deploy the tether strap on the
child restraint according to the child re­ the child restraint manufacturer's instruc­
straint manufacturer's usage instructions. tions.

53
SAFETY RRST ------

These LATCH anchorage points are only in­ Side airbags and child safety
tended for the installation and attachment � WARNING Your Audi comes equipped with 2 front air­
of child restraints specially certified for use • Do not drive the vehicle without bags (driver and front passenger) and 4 side
with LATCH anchorages. Child restraints the head restraints provided. Head airbags (in the front and rear*) which offer
that are not equipped with the LATCH an­ restraints are designed to help re­ the occupants increased protection in the
chorages can still be installed using the ve­ duce injuries. event of a lateral collision.
hicle seat belts.
Some child restraints are certified for instal­ • The child restraint anchorages In or�er t� assure this additional protection,
are only to be used to hold a child the s1de a1rbag must inflate within milli-sec­
lation either with LATCH anchorages or the restraint system in its place. onds during a collision. When the airbag is
vehicle safety belt. It is recommended that a?tivated, it breaks through a seam on the
such child restraints be used with the • Child restraint anchorages are
LATCH anchorages because this system designed to withstand only those s1de of the seatback identified by the AIR­
loads imposed by correctly fitted BAG label, and inflates between the pas­
will provide the easiest and more secure senger and side trim panel at very high
installation. child restraints. Under no circum­
stances are they to be used for speed.
LATCH anchorages are designed to be used adult seat balta or harnesses. The side airbag inflates with such a high
only with child restraints adapted for them. f?rce, that it could injure a child seriously if
h1s I her seating position is not proper up­
• Do not mount two child re­
Always refer to the child restraint manufac­ straint seats on one anchor point.
turer's instructions for proper installation of nght, or 1f 1tems are positioned in the area
• Always follow the instructions
the child restraint using the vehicle LATCH where the airbag inflates.
lower anchorage or safety belts. Never use provided by the manufacturer of
the LATCH lower anchorages to attach safe­ the child restraint which you
ty belts or other kinds of occupant re­ intend to install in your Audi.
straints.

54
 SAFETY FIRST

� WARNING
• To prevent serious injuries, chil­
dren must always be secured in a
vehicle by a child restraint system
appropriate for their age and size.
• A child must never rest his I her
head against the side trim panel in
the area where the side airbag in­
flates.
An inflating alrbag can cause seri­
ous or fatal injury!
• Never place items in the area
where the side airbag inflates. This NEVER DO THISI THIS IS THE RIGHT WAY!
could cause serious injury! DANGER OF INJURY! The illustration shows a child who is prop­
A child who rests his I her head to the side erly secured in a restraint system appropri­
as, shown in the illustration would probably ate to the child's weight, size and age, and
Note be seriously injured by the side airbag when installed on the correct seating position on
If special situations in your family require, it inflates. the rear seat. The illustration shows also
your authorized Audi Dealer can disconnect that there is enough space between the
the rear side airbags upon your request. side airbag and the child.
The side airbag can properly inflate and offer
optimum protection to the child in a broad
range of side accidents.

55
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Keys
B - Valet key

@ !
The valet key has a workshop symbol on it
and fits only the driver's door and ignition
lock.
If you have to leave a key with somebody
else, it may be advisable to give them this
key only.
C - Emergency key
This key fits all locks on the vehicle.
The emergency key is only for temporary
848-371 B48-374 use if the vehicle key should be lost or mis­
placed.
Your Audi comes with tour keys and a plas­ A - Folding master keys with
tic tag. remote control
To fold the key out, press the release button � WARNING
� WARNING (arrow).
Do not leave children unattended
To told the key back in, press the release in the vehicle, especially with ac­
Do not leave your vehicle unat­ button again. cess to vehicle keys. Unsupervised
tended with the key in the ignition The master key fits all the locks on your ve­ use of the keys can result in start­
lock. Entry by unauthorized per-­ hicle. ing of the engine or use of vehicle
sons could endanger you or harm systems such as the power win­
the vehicle. Always lock all doors The function of the remote control is de­
scribed on page 59. dows, etc. which could result in
and take the key. serious injury.
To replace batteries see page 57.

All keys can be inserted into locks either

way.

56
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

D -Tag Electronic immobilizer

This tag gives the key number. Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
For your protection against theft:
immobilizer.
With the help of an electronic component in
• Record the key number and keep it in a the key head, the immobilizer prevents your
safe place, such as your wallet. Do not vehicle from being started by unauthorized
keep it in the vehicle. persons. See page 1 24.
• If you �houlo IOSfl A key, rrovilie your AU­ Therefore, the engine can only be started
thorized Audi Dealer with the key number to using the factory-equipped key.
obtain a duplicate key. If you lose a key, contact your authorized
Note Audi dealer immediately to have the lost key
If you open the driver's door with the key left disabled.
in the ignition lock, a chime will sound. Note Changing batteries master key
This is your reminder to remove the key and In some cases, you may not be able to start Both batteries are located in the cover of the
lock the door. your vehicle if an ignition key of a different key base (8).
vehicle make is also located on your set of We recommend that you have the batteries
keys. changed by your authorized Audi Dealer.
However, if you choose to change the bat­
teries yourself, follow these steps:
Unfold the key.
Using a screwdriver, carefully pry the key
stem (A) from the key base (B).

57
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Notes
\
j • The replacement batteries must be iden­
tical in size and specification to the original
batteries provided.
• Spare batteries are available at your au­
thorized Audi Dealer.
&.. Dispose of dead batteries prop­
� erly so as not to pollute the envi­
ronment. Many stores that sell bat­
teries will accept dead batteries for
recycling or proper disposal.
848-376 I 840-333 t • If you cannot Jock or unlock your vehicle
Remove the cover from the key base (ar­ • Install the new batteries. after you have changed the batteries, then
row). When installing the batteries, make sure the system must be re-synchronized. See
Remove the dead batteries. the side of the battery with the "+" symbol page 60.
on it is facing down. See illustration. A pic­
ture on the inside of the lid shows you the
correct battery position.
• Take the lid with the installed batteries,
place it over the key base and press the two
parts together.
• Place the key base on the key stem and
press both parts together.

58
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Power locks
The power locking system in your vehicle in­ After unlocking the vehicle, you have 60
corporates: seconds to open a door or the rear lid. If you
• Central locking function wait longer than 60 seconds, the vehicle will
automatically lock itself once again. The
• Remote control feature alarm system will be reactivated.
• Anti-theft alarm system • To lock the vehicle press button C for
for detail see page 67. approximately 1 second.
You can either lock your vehicle using the To confirm that the car is locked all four turn
remote control in your folding master signal lights will flash one time.
key or by using the mechanical key.
Remote rear lid release
Activating the power locking system locks
(button B)
or unlocks all doors, the rear lid and fuel filler
flap simultaneously. To unlock rear lid only, press button B
The anti-theft alarm system switches on or Operating locks using remote for at least 1 second. Then open lid within
60 seconds.
off whenever you lock or unlock the vehicle control
with the remote control or key. How to unlock rear lid using the key see
Unlocking and locking page 63.
When locking the vehicle the horn of the
(buttons A and C)
anti-theft alarm system will sound briefly if PANIC switch (button D)
all doors, hood and rear lid are closed prop­ • To unlock just the driver's door Bypushingthe red button Dyou will engage
erly. press button A one time for approxi­ the "panic function." The horn sounds and
The selective unlock feature makes it mately 1 second. the turn signals will flash.
possible to open just the driver's door in­ To unlock all the doors and the rear Press button D again to switch off the "pan­
cluding the fuel filler flap. lid press button A two times. ic function."
All four turn signal lights will flash twice
when the car is unlocked.

59
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ----

Remember-the panic function can be seen Resetting procedure

and heard by other motorists and I or per­ 1 - To synchronize, press button A or but­
sons near you. ton C on the remote control one time.
Use the panic function only if you 2 - Then, within one minute, lock or un­
are In an emergency situation. lock the driver's door with the master
key.
� WARNING The system is now functional.

Do not leave children unattended

in the vehicle especially with ac­ Operating locks using the key
cess to the remote control. The re­ • To lock and unlock the vehicle from
mote control could be used to lock the outside, turn the key in the lock of the
Convenience close I open feature
the doors delaying access to the driver's door or the rear lid.
children in an emergency. You can also lock and unlock the vehicle by
turning the key in the rear lid lock. See You can also close any open windows and
page 63. 1 or the power roof* when you lock your car
• Turn the key one time only to unlock
Resetting the remote control with the key.
If your vehicle will not lock using the remote (A) either the driver's door or respectively Insert the key into the lock of the driver's
control . it could be that the code for the con­ the rear lid. door, turn it to the lock position (B) and hold
trol unit and key needs to be reset. This can until the windows and sunroof are com­
• Turn the key two times to unlock all ve­
occur if you frequently use the remote c�m­ pletely closed. The automatic close function
hicle doors and the rear lid. will stop immediately if the key is released.
trol while standing outside of the effective
range. Always make sure the windows are
not obstructed.
To open all windows: insert your key into the
lock of the driver's door, turn it to the open
position (A) and then hold it in this position.

60
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Unlocking the vehicle and To unlock and open door from To lock vehicle from Inside
opening doors inside You can lock the vehicle from inside by
Each door can be unlocked independently - depressing the locking knobs in the
To unlock and open door from of the power locking system from the inside
outside doors or by
by pulling the inside door handle:
• Press unlock button on your remote con­ - pressing the lower part of power locking
Pulling the handle one time raises the
trol twice or turn the key in the lock of the switch. See next column.
locking knob only.
driver's door or the rear lid two times to the Please note:
Pulling the handle two times opens the
unlock position. The anti-theft alarm system will not be
door.
• Open doors by pulling the outside door turned on when you lock the vehicle from in­
handle. Locking the vehicle side.
When you unlock your vehicle: To lock vehicle from outside If the driver's door is open, or not
closed properly, you will not be able to
- the locking knobs in all doors will rise, • Close all windows and doors properly. lock this door.
- the anti-theft alarm system is turned off, • Press lock button on your remote control
- the anti-theft alarm system readiness or turn the key in the lock of the driver's door
lights in the front doors goes out, or the rear lid to the lock position.
- the .vehicle interior lights come on for When you lock the vehicle:
about 30 seconds. See page 1 7 1 . - all doors and the rear lid are locked, (the
- the seat and mirror memory is activated locking knobs in all doors will lower),
and the driver's seat, exterior mirror and - the anti-t.heft alarm system is turned on,
steering wheel positions are retrieved.
the vehicle interior lights turn off, and
See pages 74 and 83 for more details.
the anti-theft alarm system readiness
lights near the locking knobs in the front
doors will start to blink.

61
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

The power locking switch can also be used

to lock and unlock the vehicle when the driv­
er's door is open and the ignition key is re­
moved from the steering lock.

� WARNING
• H you use the power locking
switch with the doors closed, re­
member that all the vehicle doors
will lock.
Locking doors from the inside can
help prevent inadvertent door
Power locking switch opening during an accident and
The entire vehicle can be locked I unlocked can also prevent unwanted entry Child safety lock for rear doors
from the inside by using the power locking from the outside. Locked doors To prevent children in the back seat from ac­
switch in the driver's door. can, however, delay assistance to cidentally opening the rear doors, a safety
vehicle occupants and rescue mechanism is provided on each rear door.
• To lock all doors, the rear lid and the from the outside in an accident or
fuel filler flap simultaneously, press lower A - Child lock disengaged
other emergency.
part of power locking switch (see illustra­ For the comfort and convenience of adult
• Do not leave children Inside the
tion). rear seat passengers be sure to disengage
vehicle unsupervised. In an emer­
• To unlock all doors, the rear lid and the child lock (position A) when no longer
gency it would be impossible to
the fuel filler flap simultaneously, press the needed.
open the doors from the outside
upper part of the switch. without the key.

62
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

B Child lock engaged Position b:

When the child lock is engaged (position 8),
-

• To unlock rear lid and all doors:

the inside door handle is now locked and Turn key from vertical position (a) twice to
you can only open the door from the out­ position (b).
side. The locking knob must be raised in or­ To unlock rear lid only: Turn key from
der to open the door. vertical position (a) once to position (b).
If the rear lid has been unlocked separately,
the power locking system will lock the rear
lid again after 5 seconds regardless of the
lid's position.
Therefore, never lay your keys down in the
luggage compartment.
Position c:
Rear lid
The power locking system can be operated • To lock rear lid and all doors:
by turning the master or emergency Turn key from position (a) to position (c).
key in the lock on the rear lid. Position d:
Lock positions: With key slot in horizontal position (d), the
rear lid remains locked when the
Position a:
power locking system is actuated. This pro­
With the key slot in the vertical position, the vision has been made to facilitate perma­
rear lid can be locked and unlocked by: nent locking of the rear lid when you leave
the power locking system using the re­ your vehicle in a public garage or workshop.
mote control or the key (see page 59). Take the master key with you and leave the
secondary key with attendant.
- the power locking switch (see page 62).
You can unlock the lid by pressing the re­
mote rear lid release button on your key.

63
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

� WARNING �, WARNING continued

• After closing the rear lid, always • Never leave your vehicle unat­
pull up on it to make sure that it is tended especially with the rear lid
properly closed. Otherwise it left open. A child could crawl into
could open suddenly when the ve­ the car through the luggage
hicle is moving. compartment and pull the lid shut
This is especially important if you becoming trapped and unable to
are travelling with a child sitting get out. To reduce the risk of per­
on the additional rear child seat sonal injury, never let children play
bench*. in or around your vehicle. Always
L-----�[_��� B-�3;� • To help prevent poisonous ex­
keep the rear lid, as well as the ve­
hicle doors, closed when not in
haust gas from being drawn into
Opening and closing the rear lid use.
the vehicle, always keep the rear
To open the lid when the key slot is verti­ lid closed while driving. Never
cal, pull one of the two concealed handles transport objects larger than Keep the rear lid locked at all times
(see illustration, arrow) and raise the lid. those fitting completely into the to prevent unauthorized access to
To close the lid, pull it down and shut it luggage area, because the rear lid the vehicle.
firmly_ cannot be fully closed. For further information see " Luggage
There is a recess in the interior trim of the compartment" on page 88.
lid to make it easier to pull down.

64
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

The remote rear lid release is deactivated

automatically if you lock the rear lid. This en­
ables the driver to lock the luggage
compartment permanently with the key, if
access by other persons is not wanted.
For example, if you should take your vehicle
to a workshop, lock the luggage compart­
ment separately with the master key (lock
in the horizontal position). We recommend

i
I
you use the valet key if you have to leave I
your vehicle at the workshop.
B4B-2Bo-

Remote rear lid release � Child safety lock in the rear lid•
You can open the rear lid from inside the ve­ Vehicles which have child seat bench are
hicle. This feature is very useful when, for equipped also with a child safety lock in the
example, the lock cylinder in the rear lid has rear lid.
frozen. You can activate or deactivate the lock by
• To unlock rear lid, open driver's door and moving the lever at the bottom of the rear
press switch in the door pillar (see illustra­ lid.
tion). A - Child safety lock deactivated
• To open luggage compartment raise rear B - Child safety lock activated.
lid. When the child safety lock is activated. the
handle on the inside of the rear lid is
blocked. You can only open the rear lid from
the outside.

65
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

General notes Remote control function

• The remote control system can be af­
Power locking system
fected by other systems operating in the
• In the event of an accident with airbag same frequency range close to the vehicle,
deployment all locked doors will be auto­ such as mobile telephones, television
matically unlocked to give access to the ve­ broadcasting stations, etc.
hicle occupants from the outside.
• Do no use the remote control if you are
• If the power locking system should fail, inside the car, otherwise you may uninten­
you can still open the fuel tank flap in an tionally lock the vehicle, and then you would
emergency, see page 224. set off the anti-theft alarm when you try to
start the engine or open a door.
If the ignition is switched on, the remote
control system is deactivated.
With the vehicle locked and child safe­
ty lock activated, you can also open the rear • Reactivating remote control.
lid in an emergency without having to use a If you replace a lost key, or if any repair and
key. I or exchange work is performed on the re­
To do this, a passenger in the car must lift ceiver, an authorized Audi Dealer must reac­
the lever on the inside of the rear lid (arrow). tivate the system. Only then can the key­
Then the rear lid can be opened from the less remote system be used again.
outside.

66
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

• Certification Anti-theft alarm system The horn sounds briefly when the car is
locked to confirm that the alarm system is
The remote control device complies with The anti-theft alarm system triggers an
operative and that all doors, hood and rear
lid are properly closed. If the hom does not
Part 1 5 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub­ acoustic alarm and switches on the emer­
ject to the following conditions: gency flasher if it senses unauthorized inter­
sound, or the indicator lights do not flash,
1 this device may not cause harmful in­ ference with the vehicle.
-
check all doors, rear lid and hood and close
terference, and When the vehicle is locked the alarm sy­ them properly. The horn will also sound if
2 - this device must accept any interfer­ stem monitors and protects the following the door, lid and hood are closed when the
ence received, including interference parts of the vehicle: system is already switched on.
that may cause undesired operation. • engine compartment The rear lid can be opened separately even
The manufacturer is not responsible for • luggage compartment when the system is active. When the rear
ANY RADIO OR TV Interference caused by lid is closed the luggage compartment will
• doors again be included in the alarm circuit.
unauthorized modifications to this equip­
ment. Such modifications could void the • factory installed radio When the system is switched on the alarm
user's authority to operate the equipment. • passenger compartment will be triggered if one of the doors, the en­
gine hood or the rear lid are opened, or if the
• ignition.
ignition is switched on or the radio re­
The alarm system is switched on or off moved.
whenever you lock or unlock the vehicle.
When the alarm is triggered the hom
Simply tum the key to the lock or unlock
sounds and all four turn signals flash simul­
position or use the remote control.
taneously. The engine cannot be started un­
The system is activated about 30 seconds til the system is switched off with the key
after the vehicle is locked, and the indicator or the remote control.
lights on the front door window sills start
flashing.

67
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

If the alarm has sounded one time, and then

l
• Press the switch in the door pillar (see il­
the vehicle is forced open again (for exam­ lustration). The indicator light in the switch
ple, someone tries to forcibly open a door, will come on. The indicator light on the win­
and then tries to force open the rear lid), the dow sills will come on for approximately
signal will sound once again. 3 seconds. This verifies that the interior
You can also trigger the alarm by pressing movement sensors have been deactivated.
the PANIC switch on your remote control The sensors will be reactivated when you
to alert other people in case of emergency unlock and lock the vehicle again.
or when in another difficult situation. The • Lock the vehicle.
alarm can be switched off by pressing the
The indicator lights in the doorpillarwill blink
PANIC switch again.
quickly for approximately 3 seconds at first.
Warning lights Then, after approximately 30 seconds, the
After you lock the vehicle, the warning light light will flash slowly.
Switching off the interior
on the window sills will blink quickly first for
30 seconds and will then blink slowly. This movement sensors
is to let you know that the anti-theft alarm You should switch off the interior move­
system is activated, including the interior ment sensors if there is the possibility that
movement sensors. the alarm system could be set off, for exam­
If the warning lights come on continuously ple by a pet left in the vehicle.
for about 30 seconds instead of flashing
when the vehicle is locked, this indicates
that the interior movement sensor is defec­
tive.

68
· ------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Power windows
The safety switch {S) in the armrest on the
driver's door can turn off the rear power win­ m WARNING continued
dows. This feature has been provided for
• Remember also that the power
the safety of small children riding in the rear
windows will continue to operate
of the vehicle.
until the ignition key has been re­
A symbol lights up in the safety switch moved and one of the front doors
when the switches in the rear doors are de­ has been opened.
activated.
• Be careful when closing the win­
Normally, the power windows can be dows. Check to see that no one is
opened and closed only with the ignition on. in the way, or serious injury could
However, when the ignition is off the win­ result I
dows can still be operated by means of the • Switch off the power to the rear
control switches as long as the driver's and windows - if necessary - using the
The switches are located in the driver's front passenger's doors are closed. yvhen safety switch S.
door. Also, the front passenger's door and either door is opened, the power w1ndow
each rear door has its own power window • Always remove the ignition key
operation will be deactivated.
switch. whenever you leave your vehicle.
If the respective switch is pushed or pulled • If you lock your vehicle from the
the window will open or close. � WARNING outside, no one especially children
• Switches A and B operate the front door should remain in the vehicle. The
• Do not leave children unat­ windows will not open in case of
windows.
tended In the vehicle, especially an emergency.
• Switches C and D operate the rear win­ with access to vehicle keys. Unsu­ • Do not stick anything on the
dows. pervised use of the keys can result windows or the windshield that
• Safety switch S in starting of the engine and use of may Interfere with the driver's vi­
vehicle systems such as power sion.
windows, etc. which could result
in serious injury.

69
CONTROLS AND EQWPMENT -------

Opening and closing If you push or pull the front of switch while
the window is closing, the window will stop
Front door windows where it is.
• To open the driver's or the front passen­ The automatic open 1 close feature for the
ger's door window push down the front of rear door windows is only available when
switch A o r B briefly. The windows will open the ignition i� switched on.
automatically (one-touch down fea­
ture).
If you push or pull the front of switch A re­
spectively B while the window is opening,
the window will stop where it is.
To close, pull up the front of switch A re­
spectively B briefly. The windows will close
automatically (one-touch up feature). Rear door windows
If you push or pull the front of switch A re­
spectively 8 while the window is opening,
• To open the window push down the
front of switch briefly. The window will
the window will stop where it is. open automatically (one-touch down
The automatic open I close feature for the feature).
front door windows is only available when If you push or pull the front of switch while
the ignition is switched on. the window is opening, the window will
stop where it is.
• To close the window pull up front of
switch briefly. The window will close auto­
matically (one-touch up feature).

70
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Convenience close I open Opening windows Note

feature Insert key into the lock of driver's door, If you disconnect and then reconnect the
For the convenience of the driver all win­ turn the key and hold in the unlocking posi­ battery, the convenience open and close
dows can be closed I opened centrally with tion until all windows are opened. feature will not work.
the ignition key while locking I unlocking the This feature enables the driver, to let the The following steps describe how to reacti­
vehicle: heat escape from the interior of the car, af­ vate the convenience open I close feature
ter having parked in direct sunlight. after reconnecting the battery:
Closing windows
The convenience close I open feature is not
• Close the window completely by lifting
Insert key into the lock of driver's door,
the power window switch and holding.
turn and hold in the locking position until all available when locking the vehicle using the
windows are closed. The automatic close • Release the switch and then lift it again
remote control.
function will stop immediately if the key is for a second.
released. • The convenience feature is now acti­
vated.
� WARNING
• Be careful when closing the win­
dows.
• Check to see that no one is in
the way, or serious injury could re­
sult.

71
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Mirrors
Adjust the outside and inside mirrors before Automatic anti-glare adjustment• Outside mirrors
driving and after adjusting your seat to prop­ When the ignition is switched on the interior Adjust the outside mirrors so that the side
er driving position. It is important for safe mirror will darken automatically depending of your own vehicle can just be seen. This
driving that you have good vision to the rear. on the amount of light shini ng into the car setting ensures the best possible field of
from the rear (e. g. headlights). view, and in addition it serves as an instant
Inside dey-night mirror When you move the selector lever I gear­ check on the mirror setting.
Self-dimming day I night outside
shift lever into Reverse R or when you
Manual anti-glare adjustment switch the interior lights on, the inside mir­
mirrors
You can adjust the day-night mirror from ror will return to its original position (dim­
The dimming of the outside mirrors is con­
trolled by the inside day I night mirror.
clear daylight visibility to non-glare visibility ming effect off).
at night by moving the lever at the bottom The mirror will return to the original position
of the mirror. (i. e. not anti-dazzle) when the selector lever The dimming of the outside mirrors works
I gearshift lever is moved to position R. only properly and without any interference,
if the rear window shade* is rolled up and I
To ensure the best possible antiillare ef­
fect, the lever on the lower edge of the mir­
ror should be pointing forwards when the or the light shining on the inside mirror is not
basic setting is made. blocked by other objects.
Daylight driving - lever to front
Night driving - lever to rear.

72
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Press the knob in the appropriate direction

� WARNING (arrows) to move the mirror surface.
• The right hand outside mirror Note
has a convex (curved) surface. Re­ • If the electrical adjustment of the mirror
member that vehicles or other ob­
should not respond, adjust the mirror by
jects seen in a convex mirror will
hand by pushing lightly on the edge of the
appear smaller and farther away
mirror glass.
than when seen in a flat mirror. If
you use this mirror to estimate dis­ • At low outside temperatures the heated
tances of following vehicles when outside mirrors are activated automati­
changing lanes, you could esti­ cally when the ignition is switched on.
mate incorrectly and cause an ac­
cident.
• Whenever possible, use the in­ Adjusting the outside mirrors
side mirror to determine the actual With the ignition on, both outside mirrors
distance and size of vehicles or can be adjusted.
other objects seen in the convex
Turn the knob to switch over between the
mirror.
left and right outside mirrors.
L - left-hand mirror
R - right-hand mirror
0 - off
A - Folding back both outside mirrors*
It's a good idea to fold the outside mirrors ­
for example, when you must park the car in
tight quarters.

73
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Folding down of the outside Memory*

mirror passenger•s side1l The setting of the outside mirrors is auto­
When you move the selector lever I gear­ matically stored in the memory for the driv­
shift lever into R (Reverse), the outside mir­ er's seat adjustment together with the seat
ror on the passenger's side will tilt slightly position.
downwards, provided you have switched to Memory function for driver's seat and out­
the right-hand outside mirror. side mirrors see page 8 1 .
This makes it possible to see the edge of Adjust the mirrors o s described and then
the curb when parking your vehicle. The store this setting together with your seating
mirror will return to its original position as
soon as you move the selector lever I gear­
position memory.

shift lever out of R (Reverse), or if you

switch the remote control back to the driv­
er's outside mirror.

1 l Only on vehicles with memory for driver's seat.

74
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Head restraints
Position the head restraints according to the Height adjustment Crear seats)
occupant's height. Properly positioned head For height adjustment, grasp firmly with
restraints, together with the use of safety both hands and pull up or push down.
belts offer effective protection in most acci­
dent situations.

g WAR N I N G
Head restraints are designed to
help reduce injuries in an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle without
the head restraints in place and ' 848·181

properly adjusted.
Height adjustment (front seats)
The front seats are equipped with head re­
straints with a locking I unlocking feature.
For maximum protection, the upper edge of
the head restraints should be at least at
eye level, or higher. • To lower the head restraint, press the re­
lease button to the first stop (see illustra­
tion, arrow) and push the head restraint
down.
• To raise, grasp the head restraint with
both hands and pull up.

75
 CONTROLS AND EOUWMENT -----

Front seats
The correct positioning of the seats is im­
portant: m WAR N I N G
so that you can reach all the controls on • Always sit as far away from the
the vehicle quickly and safely; steering wheel and the instrument
so that you can drive or ride relaxed and panel as possible.
help reduce fatigue; • Never sit less than 10 inches
and for maximum protection of­ (25 em.) from the steering wheel
fered by the safety belts and air­ and the instrument panel.
bag system. • Do not adjust seats while the ve­
Therefore, always adjust the position of the hicle is moving. Your seat may
seat as described on the following pages. move unexpectedly, causing sud·
den loss of vehicle control and BSN-163
Remember to adjust the seats before fas­
tening the safety belts and before driving personal injury.
Driver's seat
off. Always be sure to follow these general • Passengers must always keep
guidelines: their feet on the floor whenever To avoid contact with the airbag while it is
the vehicle is moving. Never place unfolding, the driver must not sit any closer
feet on the dashboard or on top of to the steering wheel than necessary and al­
the seats. In an accident, serious ways properly wear available three point
personal injury can result from an belts.
improper seating position.

76
· -----
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

We recommend that you adjust the driver's Front passenger's seat

seat as follows: � WARNING
To avoid contact with the airbag while it is
adjust the seat in fore and aft direction so • Navar sit closer than 1 0 inches unfolding, the adult front seat passenger
that you can easily push the pedals all the (25 em) to the steering wheal. must not sit any closer to the instrument
way while keeping your knee slightly panel than necessary and always properly
• If you cannot sit more than
bent.
1 0 inches (25 em) from the steer­ wear availa ple three point belts.
adjust the seatback so that when you sit ing wheel, we recommend that We recommend that you adjust the passen­
with your back against the seatback, you you investigate whether adaptive ger's seat as follows:
can still grasp the top of the steering equipment may be available to backrest upright (never reclined)
wheel. help you reach the pedals and in­
crease your seating distance from place your feet on the floor_in front of the
adjust the steering wheel so that the dis­ passenger's seat
tance from the center of your breastbone the steering wheal.
to the center of the airbag cover on the adjust the passenger's seat as far as pos­
steering wheel must be at least sible to the rear of the fore and aft adjust­
1 0 inches (25 em) or more. ment range.
See illustration on previous page.

77
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

� WARNING � WARNING
• Always keep both feet on the • To reduce the risk of personal in­
floor in front of the seat. jury in an accident, front seat pas­
• Never place your feet on the in­ sengers must never ride in a mov­
strument panel or on the seat. If ing vehicle with the seatback re­
the airbag inflates and your feet clined. Safety belts offer protec­
are on the instrument panel or on tion only when the seatback is up­
the seat, you could receive serious right and belts are properly posi­
personal injuries to the legs, hips tioned on the body. The more the
and even the head if the airbag in­ seatback is reclined, the greater
flates. the risk of personal injury from an
out-of-position safety belt.
• Never store items under the Seat adjustment
For safety information on transporting chil­ seats. Loose objects can interfere The front seat adjustment control switches
dren on the front passenger seat be sure to with the seat latching mechanism are located on the outboard side of each
read all the information on " l nfant seats, and can also cause personal injury seat. The controls also work with the igni­
Convertible seats and Booster seats", see in an accident. tion off.
page 44.
A - Seat adjustment
B - Seatback adjustment
C - Lumbar support

78
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Before adjusting your seat there are some

important considerations to keep in mind.
• To prevent interference with the seat ad­
justment, never store anything under the
seats.
• The front seats should be adjusted be­
fore fastening the safety belts.
• The position of the driver's seat you find
most comfortable can be stored in the me­
IT]Ory. See page 81 for details.

� WARNING
Seat adjustment Seatback adjustment
Because the seats can be electri­ Press the switch as indicated by the arrows Press the switch as indicated by the arrows
cally adjusted with the ignition to move the seat. to adjust the backrest.
key removed, never leave children
unattended in the vehicle. Unsu­
1 - moves seat back/forward forward: backrest further upright
pervised use of the electric seat 2 - raises/lowers seat at the front to the rear: backrest further reclined
adjustments may cause serious in­ 3 - raises/lowers seat at the rear
iury.
2 and 3 together- raises/lowers whole seat

79
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Curvature adjustment
forward - thicker
to the rear - flatter
Height adjustment
up - higher
down - lower

Lumbar support
By pressing the switch in the appropriate di­
rection the padding of the lumbar support
can be adjusted in curvature and height.
This feature will give you more or less sup­
port for the natural curve of your lower back
to minimize fatigue, especially during long
trips.

80
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Memory for front seats*

Memory for driver's seat Notes
The "STOP" button must be depressed in • If you memorize a new setting, the pre­
order to store and recall the required set­ vious setting on that button will be erased.
tings. • We recommend that you begin with but­
Memorizing seat. mirrors and ton 1 , and assign each subsequent driver a
steering wheal• positions and ad­ particular button. This is especially impor­
justments tant for optimum utilization of the remote
control.
• Adjust the seat.
• If the vehicle battery is disconnected, all
• Adjust both outside mirrors (see memorized setting will be erased.
page 72).
• Adjust steering wheel (see page 99).
You can store and recall 3 difference seat • Press " Memory" button and hold. At the
positions for the driver and front passenger same time press one of the three n umbered
seats using the memory buttons located in recall buttons for at least 1 second.
the front doors. When you store the seat
position for the driver's seat, you can also • Release the buttons.
set and store the position of the outside mir­ · The positions are now assigned to that par­
rors and steering column position*. ticular button and stored in the memory.
The system works with the ignition
switched on or off.

81
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

The first factory provided transmitter unit Notes

should be programmed to memory button 1 • If you coordinate a remote control to a
and the second transmitter unit to button 2. 'new' memory button on the driver's seat,
If required, you can order an additional re­
the coordination with the 'old' button will be
mote control transmitter from an authorized erased.
Audi Dealer, which should then be pro­
grammed to memory button 3. • The coordination between the remote
control and a memory button will remain in
Assigning stored settings to the remote
effect even if the settings under the
control:
memory button on the driver's seat have
After you have stored all settings under a been changed.
memory button, you can assign this setting
• In addition, it is possible to erase a single
to the remote control.
key assignment to a specific memory but­
• Briefly press the memory button to be ton.
How to coordinate the remote con­ coordinated with the remote control.
trol to a memory button Press and hold the memory button while
Wait until the seat, the outside mirrors and pressing the unlock button on the master
You can use the remote control to recall an the steering wheel have reached their key with remote control for about 1 0 sec­
individual seating position stored in memo­ stored position. onds. Then release the memory button af­
ry. ter about 2 seconds.
• Press the same memory button a second
In order to recall stored seat and mirror posi­ time and hold while depressing the unlock
tions from the memory with the remote button on the remote control. Release the
control, a specific memory button must be memory button after 2 seconds.
assigned to the transmitter units.
The memory button on the seat is now coor­
dinated with the remote control.

82
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Retrieving seat position and stored - Retrieving using the

adjustments from memory memory buttons
The settings stored can be retrieved both
with the remote control and with the
memory buttons. � WARNING
- Retrieving using the For your safety, use the recall fea­
remote control ture only when the vehicle is not
When you unlock the vehicle with the re- . moving.
mote control the outside mirrors automati­
cally adjusts. Then, after you open the driv­
er's door, the driver's seat also • With the driver's door open, depress
automatically adjusts. and release the desired memory button.
The seat will automatically adjust itself if The seat and outside mirrors will automati­
you open the driver's door within 1 0 min­ cally adjust to the stored position. Memory for front passenger's
utes after unlocking the vehicle. seat•
If you wait longer than 1 0 m inutes to open
• If the door has been closed, or if the
door has been left opened for more than 1 0 The "STOP" button must be depressed in
the driver's door, after unlocking the car, minutes. you must then depress and hold order to store and recall the required set­
then you must use the memory button to re­ the memory button until the seat and out­ tings .
call the seat position. side mirrors reach their stored position.
Memorizing seat adjustments
• Adjust the seat.
• Press "Memory" button and hold. At the
sametime press one of the three numbered
recall buttons for at least 1 second.
• Release the buttons.
The positions are now assigned to that par­
ticular button and stored in the memory.

83
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Retrieving using the Emergency Off Note

memory buttons The memory function is switched off when
the STOP button is pressed. The word
In an emergency, you can interrupt
• With the passenger's door open, de­ any retrieval procedure by
press and release the desired memory but­ ''OFF" lights up if the headlights are
• pressing the '"STOP'" button (see il­
ton. The seat will automatically adjust to the switched on. However, the programmed
lustration on page 81 and 83). or
stored position. seat, outside mirrors and steering wheel
• tapping one of the memory buttons. positions remain stored in the memory.
• If the door has been closed, you must
then depress and hold the memory button Pushing the"ON/OFF"button to the OFF
until the seat has reached its stored posi­ position only switches off the Memory. The
tion. stored settings will not be erased.
It's a good idea to turn the Memory off if the
Note
vehicle is going to be used temporarily by a
You can not recall the stored seat adjust­ driver whose driving position will not be
ment for the front passenger's seat using memorized.
the remote control in the master key. The advantage is that the personal settings
that have already been memorized will re­
main intact and will not change each time
the vehicle is unlocked using the remote
control.

84
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Center armrest

� WARNING
When folded down, the armrest
can restrict the driver's move­
ment. When driving in conditions
that may call for quick maneuvers,
fold up the armrest. This will allow
you to react more quickly to avoid
an accident.

To open the storage compartment in the

armrest lift the release button (arrow B).
The front center armrest can be adjusted to Armrest for car telephone* - see page 1 90.
various positions as required.
To adjust the position of the armrest, press
the button at the front (arrow A) and pull the
armrest down. Then lift the armrest gradu­
ally until it engages in the desired position.

85
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Rear seats
General hints Folding backrest down

� WA R N I N G • Push forward release lever (A) in direc­

tion of arrow.
• Do not allow passengers to • Fold the backrest down.
occupy the rear load surface while
the vehicle is in motion. Vehicle
occupants must always be proper­
ly restrained.
• Do not let anyone ride in the ve­
hicle without the head restraints
provided. Head restraints help re­
duce injuries.
• Loose items inside the passen­ You can fold the split rear seatback forward,
ger compartment. can fly forward either individually or both seatbacks to­
in an accident or sudden maneuver gether, to increase the space in the luggage
and injure occupants. Always compartment.
store articles in the luggage
compartment and use the fasten­
ing eyes. especially when the rear
seat backs have been folded down.

86
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Returning backrest to
upright position
� WAR N I N G
Push rear seat backrest up until it engages. • The backrest must always be se­
The red marking next to the release lever (B) curely latched so that the safety
should no longer be visible. belts can work properly to help
When folding the backrest back into protect all back seat passengers.
place, make sure the safety belt • Objects stored in the luggage
doesn't get caught, because It can compartment will not fly forward
be damaged and weakened. during sudden braking.
• Never allow safety belts to be­
come damaged by being caught in
door or seat hardware.
• Torn or frayed safety belts can
tear and damaged belt hardware
can break in an accident. Inspect
belts periodically.
If belts show damage to webbing.
bindings, buckles, or retractors,
have them replaced.

87
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Luggage compartment
Increasing size of the luggage
compartment
M WARNING continued M WARNING continued
You can fold the backrest forward to in­ • Do not allow passengers to • To help prevent poisonous ex­
crease the size of the luggage compart­ occupy the rear load surface while haust gas from being drawn into
ment. the vehicle Is in motion. Vehicle the vehicle, always keep the rear
occupants must always be prop­ lid closed while driving. Never
erly restrained. transport objects larger than
Transporting heavy objects
• Loose items inside the passen­ those fitting completely into the
Transporting heavy objects can change the luggage area, because the rear lid
ger compartment, can fly forward
way your vehicle behaves. For best han­ cannot be fully closed.
in an accident or sudden maneuver
dling under these conditions, distribute
and injure occupants. Always • If you must drive with the rear
loads evenly.
store articles in the luggage lid open under exceptional circum­
Always place heavy cargo as far forward as compartment and use the fasten­ stances always take the following
possible in the luggage compartment. ing eyes, especially when the rear precautions to help reduce the risk
When transporting heavy objects, drive seat backs have been folded down. of deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
slowly and avoid sudden maneuvers. In particular, when traveling on from the exhaust system from be­
rough roads or rugged terrain, ma­ ing drawn into the passengers
ke certain that all luggage and compartment:
� WARNING other items are stowed in the lug­ open all of the windows
gage compartment and that they
• Never exceed the Gross Axle turn off the air recirculation
are secured in such a way that they
Weight Rating or the Gross Vehicle switch
cannot shift.
Weight Rat�ng specified on the
safety compliance sticker on the - select maximum fan speed.
left door jamb. Exceeding permis­
sible weight ratings can change
the way the vehicle handles and
could result in accidents, personal
injury, and vehicle damage.

88
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Air circulation
Air circulation helps to reduce window fog­
ging. Stale air escapes to the outside
through slots in the trim panel on the left
and right side of the luggage compartment.
Be sure to keep these slots free and open.

Fastening eyes Elastic cargo net

There are four fastening "eyes" in the lug­ The cargo net prevents light objects from
gage compartment (arrows). Use these sliding around.
eyes to secure objects. Fix the hooks onto the fastening eyes.

89
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

� WARNING
• The luggage compartment
cover between the rear seat and
the rear window must not be used
for storage, even for small and
light items.
• During sudden stops, stored ar­
ticles may fly forward causing in­
jury to vehicle occupants.
• Even small objects can obstruct
the rear vision necessary for safe
driving.
Luggage compartment cover Removing
• When you install the luggage
Push the right button downwards (arrow), compartment cover, make sure
Pulling out and I itt the luggage compartment cover out. the safety belts for the rear facing
Pull the cover toward the back of the ve­ child bench• do not get caught,
hicle. Set the ends of the rod into the re­ Installing
otherwise you could damage
tainer in the trim panels. Insert the cover in the retainers, push down­
them.
wards and let the catches engage.
Retracting
Pull the rod upwards out of its retainers and
slowly slide the cover forward.

90
------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Partition net
The partition net can be used either with the
backrests in the normal position, or when
they are folded down.

Pulling out net The partition net can only be ramovad

and installed with the backrests tilted for­
Open the partition net cover. Pull the net up
and engage it in the upper retainers (A) on
ward - see page 86.
the roof frame. Removing net
With the rear seat back folded down the Open the right-hand rear door and pull the
partition net can be engaged in the front re­ partition net about 2 in. (5 em) towards the
tainers (B). right-hand side of the vehicle and lift it out
Retracting nat of the attachment rails.
Disengage the net from the retainers and let Installing nat
it roll up slowly. Close the partition net cov­ Place the partition net in the slots in the at­
er. tachment rails and push it in towards the left
side of the vehicle as far as it will go.

91
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Rear facing child seat bench*

Two children starting at 3 years of age can Installing 1 setting up the child seat
sit on the rear facing child seat bench. The bench
child must not be taller than 50 in. (1.3 m) You must remove the luggage compart­
and must not weigh more than. 78 lbs ment cover, the net and the round cover
(36 kg). caps in the cargo area floor cover before
Children must always wear safety installing the child seat bench. The cover
beltsf caps, which are normally inserted in the
Activating the child safety lock - see mounting for the child seat bench on the
page 65. cargo floor cover, con be stowed on the bot­
tom side of the removable cargo area floor
cover.
� WARNING
• Do not place any other child 1- Remove the child seat bench from the
seats or child carriers on rear fac­ bag in which it is stored. Insert both
ing child seat bench. mounting pins for the child seat bench
• For safety reason, never remove in the mountings provided for them ill
the head restraints on the child the cargo area floor.
seat bench. 2 - Turn both levers toward the inside to
• The seatback for the rear seat secure the seat bench.
bench must always be in its up­ Remove the hinged cargo area floor cover
right position and locked securely and stow in the bag. The bag can then be
in place. You shouldn't be able to stowed between the backrest of the child
see the red marking on the release bench seat and the rear passenger seat.
latches - sea page 87.

92
 ------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Wearing the safety belts

Make sure the safety belt never
loops above or below the side arm
rests I
Wearing the safety belts - see page 14.
Adjusting the head restraints-see page 75.

3 - Extend the folding legs on the left and Remove the safety belt from the bracket on
right sides. the door trim panel and inset it into the belt
4 - Press the right-hand safety latch in the guide on the top of the back rest.
direction indicated by the arrow.
5 - Fold down the seat cushion and make
certain it latches securely into the cargo
floor.
6 - Fold down the arm rests.

93
CONTROLS AND EO�PMENT -----

I 948-277 I
Folding up the child seat bench Hook the tensioning belt in the tie-down, Once the seat cushion has been folded up
turn, and pull taut from the free end. and the folding legs have been swung back
Remove the safety belts from the belt into their stowed position, the entire seat
guides on the back rest and hand them from Pivoting the child seat bench off bench can be pivoted off to the side.
the brackets on the door trim panel. to the side
If necessary, remove tray* for beverage I
Press down on the safety belt latches and
Fold up the arm rests. install the hinged cargo floor cover.
7 - Push both locking levers forward. food from the left side trim panel.
9 - Release the bench seat by rotating both
8 - Fold the seat cushion up and pivot the levers in the direction indicated by the
folding legs back into the stowed posi­ arrows.
tion. 1 0 - Push up on the right-hand locking lever.
1 1 Remove the right-hand seat bench
-

mounting pin from the mounting pro­

vided for it in the cargo floor.

94
------ CONTROLS AND EOWPMENT

1 2 - Lift up on the seat bench, pivot it off to Cover the mountings in the cargo floor us­
the left side of the vehicle, and push it ing the cover caps stowed on the rear side
down into the mounting provided for of the folding cargo floor cover.
this purpose in the cargo floor. Then ro­
Notes
tate the two levers (9) to secure the
seat bench. • The tensioning belt located on the right
Hook the tensioning belt in the left-hand tie­ side of the backrest can be buttoned onto
down near the loading edge, rotate and pull the backrest when not in use.
the free end until the belt is taut - refer to • Once the child seat bench has been com­
the center illustration on the previous page. pletely removed from the vehicle, it can be
Roll-up the sun shade on the rear window. stowed in the bag provided for this purpose.
B4B-279 j

Removing the seat bench

The child seat bench can be removed once
the cushion is folded up and folding legs
have been swung back into the stowed
position.
Push down on the safety belt latches and re­
install the folding cargo floor cover.
1 3 - Release the seat bench by turning both
levers in the direction shown by the ar­
rows.
1 4 - Push up on both locking levers.
1 5 - Remove the child seat bench from the
mountings located in the cargo floor.

95
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Ski sack
Use the ski sack to transport and protect
skis and other long, light items in the pas­
senger compartment.
Loading the ski sack
Load the ski sack from the luggage
compartment.
• Open the luggage compartment lid and
clear a space in tho center.
• Press the release button for the ski sack
flap in the luggage compartment (see arrow
in illustration) and pull down the flap.
• Fold out center armrest in the rear seat Securing the ski sack
backrest.
The ski sack should be secured in place as
• Press the release button for the ski sack shown.
flap on the inside of the vehicle and open the There is a fastening belt fitted to the ski
flap. sack. The ski sack should be secured as
• Pull out and unfold the ski sack. shown in the illustration:
• Load skis or similar objects through the • Insert the tongue of the fastening belt (A)
luggage compartment into the interior of into the buckle for the center seat posi­
the vehicle. tion (B).
• Pull the end of strap C to tighten.

96
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Stowing the ski sack

� WARNING
• Close the flap in the luggage compart­
ment. • The ski sack is intended only for

• Fold the ski sack carefully and stow it

the transportation of akis and
away. other light objects. To reduce the
risk of serious personal injury
• Close the flap inside the passenger's never transport heavy or pointed
compartment. objects in the ski sack.
Note • When braking rapidly or during
an accident the load could be dis­
Do not fold and stow away the ski sack if it placed and cause injury to occu­
is damp (for example, snow melting from pants.
skis). Let it dry completely before you stow
it away. • Sharp edges on the load must be
covered for protection. Always
fasten the belt tightly around the
sack and its contents (see illustra­
tion and description).

97
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Adjustable steering column (tilt and telescopic)

First, adjust he driver's seat, then reposition
the steering wheel.
• Push down on the lever below the steer­
ing column as far as it will go. See illustra­
tion.
• Adjust the steering wheel so that the dis­
tance from the center of your breastbone to
the center of the airbag cover on the steer­
ing wheel must be at least 1 0 inches
(25 em) or more. (See right illustration.)
• Pull the lever back up as far as it will go
and push it against the steering column to
lock.
Manually adjusted steering M WARN I N G
wheel
• After adjusting the steering
The height and reach of the steering wheel
can be manually adjusted to suit the driver. wheel, push the steering wheel ad­
justment lever back up as far as it
The driver's seat should be adjusted first. will go. This ensures the position
Then reposition the steering wheel accord­ of the steering wheel cannot be al­
ingly. tered unintentionally when the ve­
hicle is moving.
• To help prevent loss of vehicle
control and an accident, adjust the
steering wheel only when the ve­
hicle is not moving.

98
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

U WARNING continued � WARNING continued

• The front seats must not be • Always hold the steering wheel
pushed too close to the steering on the outside of the steering
wheel or to the instrument panel. wheel rim with your hands at the
Never sit closer than 1 0 inches 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
(25 em) to the steering wheel. to help reduce the risk of personal
• If you cannot sit more than injury if the driver's airbag in­
1 0 inches (26 em) from the steer­ flates.
ing wheel, we recommend that • Never hold the steering wheel at
you investigate whether adaptive the 1 2 o'clock position or with
equipment may be available to your hands at other positions in·
help you reach the pedals and in­ side the steering wheel rim or on
crease your seating distance from the steering wheel hub. Electrically adjusted steering
the steering wheel. • Holding the steering wheel the wheel*
• Pointing the steering wheel to­ wrong way can cause serious inju­ The height and reach of the steering wheel
ward your face decreases the abil­ ries to the hands. arms and head if can be electrically adjusted to suit the driver.
ity of the supplemental driver's air­ the driver's airbag inflates.
bag to protect you in an accident. Adjusting height
Push the switch A up or down. The height
continues to change while the switch is
pressed.
Adjusting reach
Push the switch A back or forward. The
steering wheel continues to move while the
switch is pressed.

99
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

� WARNING '4 WARNING continued

• To help prevent loss of vehicle • Pointing the steering wheel to­
control and an accident, adjust the ward your face decreases the abil­
steering wheel only when the ve­ ity of the supplemental driver's air­
hicle is not moving. bag to protect you in an accident.
• The front seats must not be ad­ • Always hold the steering wheel
justed too close to the steering on the outside of the steering
wheal or to the instrument panel. wheel rim with your hands at the
Never sit closer than 10 inches g o'clock and 3 o'clock positions
(25 em) to the steering wheel to to help reduce the risk of personal
BBN-163 I give the airbag room to inflate and injury if the driver's airbag in­
help reduce the risk of injury when flates.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the dis­ the airbag deploys. • Never hold the steering wheel at
tance from the center of your breastbone to
• If you cannot sit more than the 1 2 o'clock position or with
the center of the airbag cover on the steer­
1 0 inches (25 em) from the steer­ your hands at other positions in­
ing wheel must be at least 1 0 inches
(25 em) or more. (See illustration above.) ing wheel, we recommend that side the steering wheel rim or on
you investigate whether adaptive the steering wheel hub.
equipment may be available to • Holding the steering wheel the
help you reach the pedals and in­ wrong way can causa serious inju­
crease your seating distance from ries to the hands, arms and head if
the steering wheel. the driver's airbag inflates.

1 00
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

After the driver has entered the car, the Memory for steering wheel position
steering wheel returns to the memorized The steering wheel position can be stored
position as soon as the key is turned in the together with the seat position. See
ignition. page 81 .
This recall function is only operative when
the "STOP" button for the seat memory is
depressed.
When the convenient entry is ewitched
off, the steering wheel moves into the
memorized position as soon as the seat
position memory button is pressed.

Convenient entry function

This facilitates entering and leaving the car
by moving the steering wheel.
The convenient entry function can be
switched on and off by pressing button B.
With the convenient entry switched on
(button B depressed), the steering wheel
moves into the parked position (forward and
up) when the ignition key is removed.

1 01
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Pedals
The movement of the pedals must Suitable Audi floor mats can be obtained
never be obstructed by a floor mat from an authorized Audi Dealer.
or any other object.
• In case one of the two brake circuits fails,
increased brake pedal travel is required to � WARNING
I -
bring the vehicle to a full stop. Do not install additional floor mats
• You should always be able to depress the

t\
on top of existing floor mats be­
accelerator and the clutch pedals all the way cause you will not be able to fasten
down to the floor. them down.

I
• All pedals must be able to return to their •J
.·
If you remove the floor mats for
original position unhindered. I
·
. · ·-·
.
- - _ _I cleaning. be sure to fasten them
·
·-· _
l �4B·311 ij again securely when reinstalling.
Only use floor mats which leave the pedal
__
-- ·· · .....___ - ..... .

area free and can be secured with floor mat Floor mats. floor mat fasteners
fasteners.
Floor mats are factory installed in your ve­
hicle.
� WARNING Floor mat fasteners are installed in the foot­
wells of the front and rear* seats.
Never place any objects in the area
of the pedals. In case of sudden
Floor mats used in your vehicle must be at­
braking or an accident. an object
tached to these fasteners (see illustration).
could interfere with pedal
This will prevent the floor mats from sliding
function. You would not be able to
into positions that could interfere with the
brake or accelerate.
safe operation of your vehicle.

1 02
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parking brake lever

• Depress brake pedal and hold while re­ II WARNING continued
leasing parking brake. To release the park­
ing brake, pull the lever slightly up, depress • When parking on hills, also turn
the release button (arrow), and then push the wheels so that the front
the lever all the way down. wheels will first run into the curb
When the parking brake is fully released, if the car starts to roll.
the brake warning light will go out. - parking headed downhill. al­
ways turn the front wheels to­
ward the curb.
� WARNING
- parking headed uphill. always
•Always release the parking turn the front wheels away from
brake fully. A partially engaged the curb.
The parking brake lever is located between brake will overheat the rear • Do not leave children unat­
the front seats. brakes. reduc:e their effective­ tended In the vehicle. A child
ness and cause excessive wear. could release the parking brake
• To set the parking brake, pull the lever up
_ This could lead to brake failure
•
and allow the c:ar to move causing
until strong resistance is felt. The park1ng and an ac:c:ident.
brake must be pulled up all the way so that an accident and personal injury.
• Always set the parking brake
the vehicle cannot be moved. When the
ignition is on, the brake waming light will when parking your vehicle.
light up. • Move the selector lever to .. p.,.

1 03
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

5-spaad automatic transmission (Tiptronic®)*

Shift programs The s�lection o� the most suitable shift pro­
The transmission is "self adapting" and will gram JS a contmuous automatic process.
automatically select the most appropri­ Regardless of this, the driver can also make
ate sh1ft program suited to the driving condi­ the transmission switch to a sporty pro­
tions and driving style. gram by pressing down the gas pedal
quickly.
The transmission will select one of the eco­
nomy programs when you drive at a steady
This causes the transmission to shift down
speed or at gradually changing speeds with­ into a lower gear and makes quick accelera­
out heavy acceleration. This gives best fuel tion possible (for example to pass another
efficiency, with early upshifting and delayed vehicle). You do not need to depress the gas
downshifting. pedal into the kick-down range. After the
transmission has upshifted again, the origi­
The transmission will automatically select n�! program _IS selected according to your
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni­ the sporty shift programs when you drive dnv1ng style.
cally controlled five-speed automatic trans­ at h1_ gh er speeds, or with heavy acceleration
and frequently changing speeds. Upshifts An additional shift program allows the auto­
missi�n, upshifting and downshifting is au­ matic t�ansmission to select the proper gear
tomatiC. You can also manually select a shift are then delayed to make full use of engine
P?Wer, an9 downshifting takes place at for uphill and downhill driving.
program mptronic®). This prevents the transmission from shift­
higher eng1ne speeds than in the economy
programs. ing up � n� dow� unnecessarily on hills. The
Ignition key safety interlock transmiSSion w1ll also shift down to a lower
After switching off the ignition, you can re­ gear when the driver presses the brake
move the ignition key only when the selec­ pedal while driving downhill. This makes
tor lever is in the P (Park) position. When use of the braking effect of the engine with­
the ignition key is removed, the selector le­ out the need to shift down manually.
ver will be locked in the P (Park) position. With this function the transmission will
however, only shift down as far as 2nd gear:

1 04
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

When you shift into a higher g�ar tO? early,

the transmission will not upshift until a pre­
determined engine rpm has been reached.
When you shift into the next lower gea �. the
engine will downshift only when there IS no
possibility of overfeeding.
When the kickdown comes on, the trans­
mission will shift down to a lower gear de­
pending on vehicle and engine speeds.
If you take your foot off the accelerator
pedal to make use of the braking effective­
ness of the transmission when driving
down a .teep incline, the liptronic® will
Tiptronic®
To upshift, push the selector lever forward downshift from the selected gear into the
to the "+" plus position. To downshift, push next lower gear until it reaches 1 st gear
By using the "liptronic®," you can manu­ the lever to the "-" minus position. based on road speed and engine rpm's. The
ally select gears. Here is how: When the vehicle is accelerated in gears 1 , automatic downshifting is interrupted as
in the "D" position, push the lever to the 2, 3 and 4, the transmission will automati­ soon as you apply throttle again.
right. You can do this while the vehicle is cally shift to the next higher gear just before
moving or when the vehicle is at a standst11_ 1. the maximum speed is reached.
The display on the instrument cluster w1ll _
When accelerating, if you apply a "light"
show "5", "4", "3", "2" and " 1 " as soon throttle, the liptronic® will shift automati­
as the selector lever is pushed to the right. cally from 1 stto 2nd gear to save fuel. How­
The gear you select will also be highlighted. ever, if you use a "heavy" throttle, the trans­
See illustration. mission will stay in 1 st gear until near
maximum rpm's are reached, or until the
driver shifts into 2nd gear.

1 05
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Of course, it is also possible to operate the Automatic Shift Lock (ASL) (8)
"liptronic" using the selector lever on the Your Audi is equipped with an Automatic
center console. Shift Lock (ASL}. The ASL is an electro­
When "liptronic" is activated, the buttons mechanical device that locks the selector
on the steering wheel are illuminated. lever in the P (Park) and N (Neutral) posi­
Tapping the upper part (+) of one of the two tions when the ignition is on.
selector buttons will cause the vehicle to You must depress the brake pedal before
shift into a high gear. Tapping the lower part the selector lever can be moved out of ei­
(-) will cause the vehicle to shift down to a ther position. This prevents the selector le­
lower gear. ver from being moved unintentionally into a
driving position resulting in unwanted ve­
hicle movement.
Steering wheel with Tiptronic®
The buttons on the steering wheel allow the
driver to shift gears manually.
The selector buttons on the steering wheel
are activated when the selector lever on the
center console is located in the manual posi­
tion (liptronic position).

1 06
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

In selector lever positions "P" (Park) a no Selector lever positions

"N" (Neutral), the instruction "WHEN
P - Park
STATIONARY APPLY FOOTBRAKE WHILE
SELECTING GEAR" appears in the instru­ Engage P (Park) only when the vehicle is
ment cluster as a reminder for the driver. stationary. When parking your vehicle, ap­
Also, the symbol in the shift console will ply the parking brake first, and then move
light up. the selector lever completely to position P.
A time delay element prevents the selector To do this depress the button in the
lever from locking when it is moved through handle of the selector lever and
the "N"' (Neutral) position (for example, push it through R to P. The transmis­
going from "R" to "D"). The locking ele­ sion is then mechanically locked.
ment only locks the selector lever if it is left To move the selector lever out of the P
in the "N" (Neutral) position for more than (Park) position you must first insert the
about one second without the brake pedal ignition key into the ignition lock and turn.
being depressed. Display
Before you move the selector lever
In the N (Neutral) position, the selector le­ When the ignition is switched on, the posi­ from the P (Park) position, you must
ver will not lock when the vehicle is driving tion of the selector lever is shown in the dis­ always apply the brake pedal before
faster than 3 mph (5 km/h). play in the instrument cluster. The illustra­ and while depressing the button in
tion shows selector position D engaged. the handle of the selector lever.
The engaged selector lever position will ap­ Shift out of the P (Park) position before re­
pear bright against a dark background while leasing the parking brake.
the other positions appear just the opposite.
When the vehicle is parked on a steep hill,
If all the positions appear dark against a shifting out of P (Park) may be a little hard­
bright background at the same time, or er. This is due to the vehicle's weight ex­
when no positions are indicated then there erted on the transmission.
is a malfunction in the transmission - see
under "Fail-safe mode" on page 1 1 1 .

1 07
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

R - Reverse N - Neutral D - Normal driving position

Reverse should be selected only when the Shift to this position for standing with Position D is for normal city and highway
vehicle has come to a full stop and the en­ brakes applied. driving. It ranges from zero to top speed and
gine is running at idle speed. Before you move the selector laver all five gears shift automatically, depending
Before you move the selector lever from N (Neutral) to R position you on engine load, driving speed and automati­
to the reverse position you have to have to depress the button in the cally selected shift programs.
depress the push button in the han­ handle of the selector lever. Before you move the selector lever
dle of the selector laver. When the vehicle is stationary or at to position 4 you have to depress the
If the ignition is switched on, the backup speeds below 3 mph I 5 km/h, you button in the handle of the selector
lights come on when the selector lever is can only move the lever out of N lever.
moved into the R (Reverse) position (Neutral) by applying the foot-brake Sometimes it may be better to temporarily
before and while moving the selec­ engage one of the following selector posi­
tor lever. tions.
Do not use N (NeutraU for coasting 4 - Position for hilly stretches
downhill. Coasting downhill with
the transmission in Neutral and This selector lever position is recom­
while the engine is not running will mended in situations, for example when
result in damage to the automatic driving on hilly stretches, where the trans­
transmission and can also damage mission shifts frequently between fourth
the catalytic converter. and fifth gears in position D. Also, in posi­
tion 4 the engine's braking effect is greater
than in D.
In position 4, the first, second, third and
fourth gears will engage automatically.

1 08
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

3 Position for mountainous

- Note Driving the automatic
regions When manually downshifting, the selector transmission
Position 3 should be used for mountain driv­ lever will move into the lower gear position.
ing with long uphill and downhill grades. However, the automatic transmission itself Starting the engine
Use it also when you want to use the brak­ will not downshift until there is no possibil­ The selector lever must be in N (Neutral)
ing effect of the engine, which is more ef­ ity of overrewing the engine. or P (Park). If one of the driving positions
fective than in 4. In 3, only the first, second is engaged a safety switch will prevent the
and third gears will engage automatically. engine from being started.
Kick-down
Before you move the selector lever
to position 2 you have to depress the The kick-down gives maximum accelera­
b.utton in the handle of the selector tion when the accelerator pedal is pressed
lever. down past the full throttle position. Depend­
ing on vehicle speed and engine speed, the
2 - Position for steep hills upshift is either delayed or the transmission
This position is to be used for extremely shifts down into a lower gear.
steep uphill and downhill gradients or slow
driving. It also provides the most engine
braking effect. In 2 the transmission will � WARNING
start in the first gear and only upshift to the
second gear. Avoid using the kick-down on slip­
pery roads. Rapid acceleration
may cause skidding and loss of
control.

1 09
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

Selecting a driving position Stopping

rA'J WARNING continued
� WARNING • When stopping briefly, at a traffic light for
o If the selector lever is uninten­ example, it is not necessary to move the se­
• Power is transmitted to the tionally moved into N (Neutral} lector lever to N (Neutral). Simply apply
wheels as soon as a driving posi­ while you are driving, take your the foot brake.
tion Is engaged. Therefore, when foot off the accelerator pedal and • The driving positions must never be used
the selector lever is in a driving wait to idle speed before selecting for holding the vehicle on a hill. Always use
position, the vehicle may creep a driving position. the foot brake when stopped on inclines.
even at idle speed. Do not release • Never shift into R (Reverse) or P
the parking brake or foot brake un­ (Park) when the vehicle is in mov­
til you are ready to move. ing. You will damage the transmis­ mi WARNING
• If you must check under the sion.
hood with the engine running, It is best never to get out of the
never have any driving position en­ driver's seat when the engine is
gaged. Make sure the selector le­ Starting off running. However, if you must get
out of the vehicle, do this: Move
ver is securely locked into the P Select a gear. Wait for the transmis·
the selector lever securely into the
(Park) position with the parking sion to engage the gaar (the vehicle
P (Park) position and apply the
brake firmly set. Otherwise, any may move slightly). Then press the gas parking brake firmly. If you are not
increase in engine speed may set pedal. securely in P (Park), your vehicle
the vehicle in motion, even with
the parking brake applied. Maneuvering could move, possibly causing a se­
When alternating between forward (D) and rious accident.
• Do not accelerate while select­
ing a driving position. At this time reverse (R) - for instance, while maneuver­
the engine must run at idle speed ing the vehicle into a tight parking space -
so that no undue stress will be shift only when the vehicle has come to a
placed on the automatic clutches full stop and the engine is running at idle
in the transmission. speed.

110
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Parking Emergency starting Auxiliary modes

On flat terrain, it is enough to simply set the Your Audi with automatic transmission You can recognize a failure in the electronic
selector lever to position P (Park). On an cannot be started by pushing or tow­ system if the selector lever position display
incline, however, first depress the brake ing. If the engine does not start because of letters appear bright ·against a dark back­
pedal. engage the parking brake and then a discharged battery, the vehicle can be ground. You can still drive because the
move the selector lever completely to posi­ started withjumper cables. Referto "Emer­ transmission will continueto work in an aux­
tion P. If you do this. the locking mechanism gency starting with jumper cables." Should iliary mode. Take your vehicle to your near­
will not be overloaded and it will be easier to the engine fail to start, consult your nearest est Audi Dealer as soon as possible.
release the parking brake. Audi Dealer.
Note
Towing • The electronic lock that protects
Always heed all WARNINGS To tow the vehicle. see instructions "Emer­ the reverse gear while driving is in­
on page 103. gency towing" on page 281 . operative when the transmission is
in an auxiliary mode. Shifting into R
(Reverse) while driving will cause
serious damage to the vehicle.
• The liptronic® is inoperative when the
transmission is in the fail-safe mode.

111
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

Acoustic park assist*

The acoustic parking warning system will The danger zone begins at a distance of Note
help make parking and maneuvering in tight about 1 ft. (0.30 m). Do not back up any fur­ • If a warning tone is audible for about 5
places easier for you. But since there are ther once you have reached the danger seco�ds when you turn on the ignition, a
technical limitations to what it can do, al­ zone. The danger zone is signaled by a con­ fault rs present in the system. Have the
ways exercise the utmost care and _
trnuous tone. problem corrected by your authorized Audi
attention when parking and when dealer.
maneuvering your vehicle in tight
places. � WARNING • The sensors must be kept clean and free

When you are backing up in parking maneu­ of ice for the park assist system to function
vers, a park assist warning system using ul­ • The park assist system is not a properly.
_ sensors helps you determine the
trasonrc substitute for the driver's own
caution and alertness. Ultimate re­
distance between your rear bumper, where sponsibility always lies with the
the sensors are located, and obstacles be­ driver during parking and similar
hind the vehicle. maneuvers.
The parking assist system is activated as • Sensors have dead spaces in
soon as you put the vehicle in Re­
which objects cannot be detected.
verse. A brief tone confirms that the sys­
tem is activated. Be especially alert for small chil­
dren and animals, since they are
Distance warning in reverse begins at a dis­ not always detected by the sen­
tance of about 5.2 ft. (1 .60 m) from the ob­ sors.
stacle. As the distance becomes smaller,
the time inteNal between the audible tones • Objects. such as trailer hitches,
grows shorter. thin painted rods, or fences, may
not always be detected by the sys­
tem, but they can damage your ve­
hicle.

112
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Ignition switch
In position 3, the power supply to the head­
m WA R N I N G lights, windshield wipers, blower motor and
D o not leave children unattended
rear window defogger is temporarily inter·
in the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
rupted to conserve battery power.
vehicle controls can cause serious Before the starter can be operated again the
personal injuries. key must be turned back to position 1 .
The non-repeat lock in the ignition switch
prevents the starter from being operated
Ignition key safety interlock when the engine is running as this could
You can remove the ignition key only when damage the starter.
the selector lever is in the P (Park) position. In positions 2 and 3 several warning 1 indica­
When the key is removed, the selector lever tor lights will come on. Refer to "Warning I
will be locked in "P." indicator lights" for details.
Your Audi has an ignition switch with an anti­
Ignition on I steering unlocked1 l .
theft steering column lock. Chime
If you leave the key in the ignition 1 steering
2-
Switch positions If it is difficult to turn the key from posi­
Ignition off I engine off- steering wheel tion 1 to 2, move the steering wheel lock, a chime will sound when the driver's
1 -

until the key turns freely. door is opened. This is your reminder to r&­
can be locked. move the key and lock the doors.
Note
3 - Starter engages. Key returns to posi­
tion 2 as soon as it is released. For Buzzer
Whenever you leave the vehicle unat­ "Starting procedures", see following
tended, pull out the key, turn the steering page. If the lights are not switched off after the
wheel to the left or right until it locks and key has been removed from the steering
make sure that the vehicle is closed and lock. a buzzer sounds as soon as the driver's
locked. door is opened.
ll If the vehicle battery has been disconnected
and then reconnected, then you must hold
the key in position 2 for approximately 5 sec­
onds, before the engine will start.

113
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Starting procedures
dib To avoid unnecessary engine Starting engine
� WARN I N G W wear and to reduce exhaust • Do not depress the gas pedal while
emissions, do not let your vehicle
• Always fasten safety belts be­
stand end warm up. Be ready to starting. This applies at any outside temper­
fore driving. drive off immediately after starting ature.
• Never start or let the engine run your vehicle. Maintain moderate • As soon as the engine starts, release the
in a confined or enclosed area. Ex­ speed until the engine is completely ignition key.
haust fumes from the engine con­ warm. Remember, the engine per­ • If the engine does not start the first time
tain carbon monoxide, a colorless forms bast at operating tempera­
and odorless gas. Carbon monox­
or stalls, turn the ignition off and restart.
ture.
ide can be fatal if inhaled. • Operate the starter for no more than
Manual transmission 1 0 seconds.
• Never leave the engine idling
unattended. An unattended ve­ Your Audi with manual transmission is • Allow about 30 seconds between each
hicle with a running engine poses equipped with an "interlock-feature". starting attempt.
a danger of personal injury or Start the engine with the gearshift • When starting a very hot engine, it may
theft. lever in Neutral and the clutch pedal be necessary to slightly depress the gas
fully depressed. Remember, you pedal after starting the engine.
must depress and hold the clutch
pedal all the way down, otherwise
the engine will not start.

Automatic transmission
Engine will start with selector lever in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) only.

114
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Stopping engine
Note Do not stop the engine immediately Note
• Your Audi with automatic trans­ after hard or extended driving. Keep The ignition should not be switched
mission cannot be started with engine running for about two min­ off as long the vehicle is still rolling
pushing or towing. utes to prevent excessive heat with a gear engaged. otherwise fuel
build-up. could get into the catalytic convert­
• If the battery is discharged. try
er and cause damage.
jump starting the engine using the
battery from another vehicle - see � WARNING
page 278.
• Before you check anything in
the engine compartment, stop the
engine and let it cool down. Hot
components can burn skin on con­
tact.
• Never touch the radiator fan.
The auxiliary electric fan can
switch on suddenly and iniure you.
• Always heed all WARNINGS on
page 232.

11 5
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT --
---

Instrument cluster

Pos. see page Pos. see page Pos. see page

1 - Engine oil temperature gauge . . 1 1 7 . 6 Speedometer
· 119 9 - Driver information system
2 - Tachometer . . . . . . 117 with odometer, Auto-Check System display . . . 138 .

Outside air temperature display . 137

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

with digital clock and date display 1 1 7 trip odometer display . . . . 1 20

3 - Warning I indicator lights . . . . . 1 22 7 - Voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 20 Trip computer display . . . . . . . 1 46
.

8 - Set I check knob for

.
. .
Selector lever position display . . 1 07
4 Engine coolant temperature gauge 1 1 8
- Radio frequency display . . . . 138
Setting the clock . . . . .
. . . .

. 118 Service interval display . . . . . 121

5 - Fuel gauge 1 19 Auto-check system . . . 140
. . . . . . . . .
.

Clock and Odometer lighting . 1 20

. . .
1 0 Reset knob for
-

Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Trip odometer . .

. . . . . . • . . _ . 1 20 . . . .

Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

The illustration on previous page shows the 2 - Tachometer with clock

arrangement of the instrument cluster in a
U.S. vehicle. Tachometer
The red area at the end of the scale indi­
1
cates maximum permissible engine rpm
- Engine oil temperature (revolutions per minute) for all gears after
gauge � Of (C)
the break-in period. Before reaching this
Engine oil temperature ranges from 1 50 O F area, the next higher gear or selector lever
(60 °C) to 350 ° F (180 °C). With the needle position "D" should be selected or the foot
around 1 50 ° F (60 °C), do not accelerate un­ eased off the accelerator pedal.
der full load. r.Gb Upshifting early saves fuel and
If the needle moves into the upper zone in 1!/!:i reduces engine noise.
exceptional cases, reduce your speed. The Shift to the next lower gear when engine
needle should then return to the normal rpm drops below 1 ,500 rpm. Digital clock with date display
zone.
The clock and date are located in the
If the needle stays in upper zone, stop the tachometer dial. Adjusting the clock I date:
vehicle, switch off the engine and check the
oil l evel If the oil level is correct and the oil
see next page.
When the ignition is off the clock I date dis­
.

pressure warning light does not flash when

the engine is started, you can drive to the play can be illuminated by pressing the set­
next authorized Audi Dealer but do·not run button. See illustration above.
engine at high speeds.

117
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Setting the time I date Changing time zones 4 - Engine coolant -¥-
• Pull the knob to set the hour. The hour If you enter a new time zone, simply change temperature gauge
display will flash. Set the desired hour dis­ the hour display to the correct time - see
"Setting the time I date".
The needle in the coolant temperature
play by turning the knob clockwise or coun­ gauge will indicate the temperature of the
terclockwise. Turning the date display on and off coolant when the ignition is switched on.
• To set the minutes, pull the knob out
• Pull out the knob as often as needed to Engine cold
as often as needed to make the minutes dis­ make the date display flash.
play flash. You can then set the minutes dis­ Avoid high engine speeds and heavy
play by turning the knob clockwise or coun­ o Turn the knob counterclockwise to deac­
throttle when the needle is still at the left of
terclockwise. tivate the display, or clockwise to activate it. the dial.
• To set the date, pull the knob out as
The setting will be accepted as soon as the Normal temperature
often as needed to make the day, month or display stop flashing after you operate the
setting knob. During normal running, the needle will re­
year display flash. You can then set the day, main somewhere in the middle of the dial.
month or year display by turning the knob 3 - Warning and indicator lights If the engine is working hard at high outside
clockwise or counterclockwise. See page 1 22. temperatures, the needle may also go fur­
Your clock will be set once the display stops ther to the right, but this Is no cause for
flashing after you operate the setting knob. concern as long as the coolant tem­
perature warning light does not
flash.

118
------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

5 6
Warning light
If the coolant warning light m the Auto­
- Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge works when the ignition is
iU - Speedometer I odometer
Speedometer
Check System (see page 141) flashes when switched on.
driving, the engine may be overheated be­ Refer to "Break-In Period" before driving
The fuel tank capacity is approximately 1 8.5
gallons (70 liters).
cause of low coolant level.
off see page 193.
The speedometer indicates the speed.
there is a reserve of about 2.4 U.S. gallon�
Note When the needle reaches the red area
On U.S. models, the outer row of numbers
Do not install accessories (addi­
(9 liters) of fuel left in the tank. lime to re­
�larg": numbers) indicates the vehicle speed
tional lights or Insect screens. for 1n m1les per hour (mph). The inner row
example) on top of the front bumper. fuel.
(small numbers) indicates the vehicle
They may restrict engine cooling The fuel pump symbol in the instrument speed in kilometres per hour (km I h).
and cause engine damage. cluster lights up as an additional reminder to
refuel. The arrangement of the instruments in the
c!uster may vary depending on engine ver­
Never run the tank completely dry. See also SIOn.
Always heed all WARNINGS page 222.
on page 142 and 232.

119
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT --
--

When the ignition is off, the display can be 8 - Set I Check knob
illuminated by pressing the test knob for the Setting the clock 118
Auto-Check System. See page 1 1 6, posi­
. . . • . . . .

tion 8. The display switches off automati­ Auto-check system 1 40

cally after about 1 5 seconds. Odometer lighting . 1 20

abo �t 30 seconds after you open the driv­

Also the display will remain illuminated for Service indicator . . 121
er's door.
9 Driver information system
-

Defect message
Auto-Check System display . . . . . . 138 . .

If there is a defect in the instrument cluster, Outside air temperature display . . . . 137
"dEF" will be displayed continuously in the
trip odometer display area. Have this prob­ Trip computer display . . . . . . . . 1 46
lem corrected as soon as possible by an au­ Selector lever position display . . . . . . 1 07 .

Odometer thorized Audi Dealer. Radio frequency display . . . . . . 138

The odometer indicates the distance driven.
Service interval display . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 1
USA models: Miles 7 Voltmeter
Kilometres
-

Canada models:
The voltmeter indicates the voltage for the 10 -Reset knob
On the trip odometer, the last digit indicates vehicle's total electrical system, which
1 /,0 of a mile or 1 00 meters. should normally be between 1 2 and Reset knob for trip odometer . . . . . 1 20 . .

Reset knob for trip odometer 14 volts. If the display drops below 1 2 volts Service indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 21
when the engine is running, have the power
To record a distance, reset the trip odome­ supply (battery and alternator) checked by
ter by pressing the knob until the display re­ an authorized Audi Dealer. See also
turns to zero - see illustration. pages 1 27 and 1 43.
The voltage may fall below 8 volts while the
engine is being started.

1 20
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Service Interval Display

If there is a priority 1 malfunction (red sym­ Notes
bol), you will not be able to display the dis­ • Do not reset the display between service
tance remaining. intervals, otherwise this will result in an in­
If service is needed soon, "SERVICE IN correct display.
1 ,200 MLS" (2,000 KM) will appear, or • The service display information will re­
if service is now due, "SERVICE! " will ap­ main intact even if the battery is discon­
pear. The display will switch back to the nor­ nected.
mal display after about 5 seconds.
Resetting the interval! display
The Service Department at your authorized
Audi Dealer will reset the display after per­
forming the required service.
When your vehicle requires a Service, this
will be shown in the instrument cluster dis­ If the service is not performed by your au­
play (see illustration). thorized Audi Dealer, the display must be re­
Display remaining distance set as follows:
With the ignition on, briefly push button (1 ) • Turn off the ignition.
to display the distance remaining (miles I ki­ • Then, turn on the ignition again while
lometres) until the next Service is due. You holding the button (2) down. "SER­
can perform a function test with the engine VICE!"will appear in the display.
in idle or when the vehicle has reached a
• Press the button (1) until the "SER­
speed of 3 mph (5 km/h).
VICE! " text is cleared. This display should
now show the next service event.

121
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Warning / Indicator lights

Your vehicle is equipped with several impor­
tant warning and indicator lights to help you � WARNING - Always heed all WARNINGS
monitor the continued reliable operation of l!!l on page 232, chapter ""En­
• Failure to heed warning lights gine compartment ...
your vehicle. Furthermore, certain func­
tions and vehicle components are consis­ and other important vehicle infor­
tently monitored by the Auto-Check System mation may result in serious per­
(see page 138). Please be sure to get to sonal injury or vehicle damage.
know these lights so if one should come on • Whenever stalled or stopped for
you know what to do. repair, move the vehicle a safe dis­
tance off the road, stop the en­
gine, and turn on the emergency
flasher - see page 152.
• The engine compartment of any
motor vehicle is a potentially haz­
ardous area. Before you check any­
thing in the engine compartment,
stop the engine and let it cool
down. Always exercise extreme
caution when working under the
engine hood. - sea page 232.

1 22
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Side marker lights I ;o�

head lights
The light comes on when the side marker
lights or head lights are switched on with
the ignition on.
Self-leveling
suspension
The warning light will come on when you
switch on the ignition, and will then go out
after a few seconds just as a test to make
sure the light is working properly.
If the warning light blinks after the function
test, this means that the vehicle's ride
height has dropped down. It's normal for
this happen, for example, after the vehicle
has been parked for some time.
Electronic If the engine management system experi­ The warning light will go off after the self­
EPC
ence trouble while you are on the road, the leveling suspension has re-adjusted the ve­
power control• indicator light will come on to alert you. The hicle ride height. After this has taken place,
The indicator light will come on when the electronic engine power control system will the vehicle will now be at its original ground
ignition is switched on. It should go out after automatically switch to the failure-mode clearance regardless of cargo load.
the engine starts. program. You will experience some reduc­
tion in engine power. Drive the vehicle to an Do not drive off until the warning light stops
authorized Audi Dealer as soon as possible. blinking, otherwise you could damage low­
mounted parts on the rear suspension if you
drive over uneven road surfaces.

1 23
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

If the warning light is flashing, it can also

mean that the vehicle is riding ''too high"
Electronic Stability Electronic immobilizer �
Program {ESP) When you turn on the ignition, the vehicle
(above the highest level). Once again, do key data are automatically scanned. The in­
not drive off until the warning light stops The indicator light lights up when the igni­
flashing. tion is turned on, and it must go out after dicator light will come on briefly, indicating
about 2 seconds. that the data verification procedure has
If the .warning light stays on continuously, been acknowledged.
there 1s a problem with the ride height ad­ When the ESP system is in control mode,
JUStment system. The light will also come this indicator light will flash while the ve­ If a non-coded vehicle key was used (for ex­
on continuously if the vehicle is on an ex­ hicle is being operated. ample a duplicate key), the control light
treme incline. goes to a continuous flashing mode. If this
When you start the engine, the ESP happens, the vehicle cannot be started. See
Trouble in the ESP may also cause the warn­ may shut off for safety reasons. The indica­ also page 57
ing light to remain on continuously. tor light also turns on to indicate this status.
A system failure can cause the vehicle to If this should happen, you can reactivate the
have too little or too much ground clear­ ESP by turning the ignition off and then on
ance. Drive very carefully and slowly to your �gain. This indicator light will go out, indicat­
nearest authorized Audi dealer and have the Ing that the system is once again operating
fault corrected. properly.
See page 1 53 for additional information. If the system is off or is malfunctioning, the
indicator light will remain on.
Since the ESP system works together with
the ABS system, the ESP indicator light will
also come on if the ABS stops operating.

1 24
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

AIR
Turn signals and Airbag System BAG Anti-lock Brake System
emergency flasher The indicator light for the airbag and belt
Refer to "Turn signal I headlight d1mmer
USA models: ABS
tensioner system must come on when
switch lever and emergency flasher" on the ignition is switched on, and go out after Canada models: 8
pages 1 52 and 1 56 for details. a few seconds. If the light does not go out,
�D
or if it comes on while you are driving, this
High beam indicates a fault in the airbag I belt tensioner This warning light monitors the ABS and
system. EDL (Electronic Differential Lock,
The indicator light lights up when the high systems.
beams are switched on or when the head­ If the indicator light does not come on when
light flasher is used. the ignition is switched on, this also indi­ The light will come on for a few seconds
See "Turn signal I headlight dimmer switch cates a system malfunction. If any of these when the ignition is switched on. The light
conditions occur, have the air bag system in­ will go out after an automatic check se­
lever" on page 1 56 for details. quence.
spected immediately by your authorized
Malfunction Indicator � Audi Dealer. For additional information on the ABS sy­
Lamp (MIL) CHECK For more details, see page 25. stem, see page 202.
The Malfunction Indicator Lamp is part of
the On Board Diagnostic system (OBD). � WAR N I N G
The lamp comes on when the ignition is
switched on and will go out after the engine If the ABS warning light does not
is started and the idle has stabilized. This is go out, or if it comes on while driv­
to assure you that the Malfunction Indicator ing, the ABS system is not working
Lamp is working properly. properly. The vehicle can then be
For more details, see page 1 28. stopped only with the standard
brakes (without ABS,. You won't
have the protection ABS provides.
Contact your Audi Dealer as soon
as possible.

1 25
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

If there is an ABS problem: If the ABS fails, the ESP warning light will A If the brake warning light does
o The ABS warning light to come come on. See page and pages 202 - 205. ¥ not light up when the engine is
on. The vehicle can still be braked, cranking or the parking brake is ap­
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
however, the ABS will not work. See plied, there may be a malfunction in
your authorized Audl Dealer as soon
The electronic differential lock works in con­ the electrical system. In this case,
as possible.
junction with the ABS system. A fault in the contact your Audi Dealer.
ABS causes therefore a malfunction of the When the light comes on, an audible warn­
• The ABS warning light and the electronic differential lock.
brake warning light come on to­ ing signal is also given.
gether. The ABS will not work and
For more details on how the EDL works, go
you will notice a change in braking
to page 204.
characteristics and performance. � WARNING
Brake
• If both warning lights (ABS and
� WARNING USA models: BRAKE BRAKE warning light) come on at
the same time, the rear wheels
If both warning lights (ABS and
Canada models: (Q)) could lock up first under hard
BRAKE warning light) come on at The light comes on while the engine is braking. Rear wheel brake lock-up
the same time, the rear wheels cranking. It goes out after the engine has can cause loss of vehicle control
could lock up first under hard been started and the parking brake is fully and an accident. Have your vehicle
braking. Rear wheel brake lock-up released. This is your assurance that the repaired immediately by your au­
can cause loss of vehicle control brake warning light is functioning properly. thorized Audi Dealer or a qualified
and an accident. Have your vehicle workshop. Drive slowly and avoid
repaired immediately by your au­ sudden, hard brake application.
thorized Audi Dealer or a qualified
workshop. Drive slowly and avoid
sudden, hard brake application.

1 26
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Generator Safety belts

f4 WAR N I N G continued
This light comes on when the ignition is Your vehicle has a warning light to remind
• If the brake warning light does turned on and goes out after the engine is you to wear your safety belt and to make
not go out with the engine running started. If the light does not go out after sure that others do too.
and the parking brake released, or starting and rewing up the engine momen­ After switching on the ignition, the warning
lights up while you ere driving, the tarily or lights up while driving, there may be light in the instrument cluster will come on
fluid level in the brake fluid reser­ a malfunction in the electrical system, or the for about 6 seconds along with a warning
voir is too low. V-belt driving the generator may be broken. tone. As soon as you fasten your safety belt,
• If you believe that it Is safe to do A If the warning light comes on the warning tone will stop.
so, proceed immediately at low V while driving, stop the vehicle The warning light, however, will be on for
speed to the nearest authorized and turn oft the engine. Inspect the the entire 6 seconds.
Audi Dealer or qualified workshop belts.
Fasten your safety belt now and ma­
and have the brake system in­ If the V-belt is not torn, you can still continue ke sure that your passengers also
spected. driving to the nearestAudi Dealer. However, properly put on their safety belts.
• Please be very careful and be since the battery is no longer being charged,
switch off all unnecessary electrical equip­ Please be sure to read the chapter
sure to remember that after sev­
ment. "Safety belts" page 14.
eral brake applications, you will
need greater pressure on the brake If the V-belt is tom, the power steering and
pedal to stop your vehicle. Conse­ the radiator fan will also not work.
quently, you must allow for in­
Obtain expert assistance.
creased braking distances. Trying
to brake as quickly as usual could
lead to an accident.
g Always heed all WARNINGS
r!!l on page 232, chapter "En­
For details see "Brakes.. on page gine compartment'" .
201.

127
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

On Board Diagnostic system

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) - see If the lamp comes on, the Electronic speed
page 1 25 - is part of the On Board Diagnos­ l imiter can also be out of operation. See
tic system (OBD). next page.
The lamp comes on when the ignition is The On Board Diagnostics in your vehicle
switched on and will go out after the engine monitors the various components of your
is started and the idle has stabilized. This is emission control system. Each controlled
to assure you that the Malfunction Indicator component in your engine system has been
Lamp is working properly. coded. In case of a malfunction the respec­
If the lamp does not go out after the engine tive component in question will be identi­
is started, or if it comes on while you're fied and the fault stored in the form of a
driving, there is a malfunction in the engine code in the control module's memory.
system. If the lamp starts blinking, the cata­
lytic converter could be damaged.
Continue driving with reduced power On Board Diagnostic
and have the cause corrected right away by System (OBD)
an authorized Audi Dealer or a qualified The stored data can only be displayed with
workshop. special testing equipment (generic scan
tool for OBDl to assure an accurate diagno­
sis.
To connect the special testing equipment,
push the plug into the Data Link Connector
(DLC) located to the right of the release le­
ver for the engine hood - see illustration.
Your authorized Audi Dealer or a qualified
workshop can interpret the code and make
the necessary correction.

1 28
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Electronic speed limiter

Your Audi may be factory equipped with
� WARNING
tires which are rated for a maximum speed Always observe the posted speed
of 130 mph (21 0 km/h). This is less than the limits and adjust your speed to suit
maximum speed of your vehicle. To reduce prevailing road, traffic and
the risk of sudden tire failure and loss of weather conditions. Never drive
control should the vehicle be operated at ex­ your vehicle faster than the maxi­
cessive speeds, your Audi also has an elec­ mum speed rating of the tires
tronic speed limiterwhi ch prevents your ve­ installed.
hicle from going faster than the tire speed
rating. See page 257.
If the vehicle approaches the tire speed rat­
ing, the engine control unit will shut off the
fuel injectors and you will notice an instant
Joss of engine power and drop in road
speed. The engine performance will return
to normal as soon as the speed has dropped
below approximately 1 25 mph (200 km/h).
If the vehicle road speed signal to
the engine control unit should fail,
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp will
come on.
If this occurs, see your authorized Audi
Dealer and have the cause located and cor­
rected.

1 29
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT --
--

Driver information system

Display Navigation data* - see illustration. Keep pressing the "reset" button (see ar­
Operation of the Audi Navigation System is row in illustration) to switch between the
The driver information system consists of described in a separate manual. following functions:
- Outside temperature 1 trip computer/
the following components:
Service interval display . . . . 121 Selector lever position
. . . . . _ . _
(Automatic transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . 1 07 Auto Check Control
Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 - Display Navigation*
Rear lid I door open indicator
_ .
When the selector lever of the automatic
. . . . 1 37
_ _
transmission is in "P" or "N" position the - Display off
Outside air temperature . . . 1 37 display will remind you to apply the foot­
_ _ . . . _ _

brake while the vehicle is stationary. Any malfunctions occurring will still be
Radio frequency display . . . . 1 38• . • _ _ _
shown, even when the display is switched
Auto-Check System . 138
_ _ _ _ . . . . _ _ _ _ _ _ off.
Speed warning . . 144 The Navigation System cannot be operated
Trip computer . . 146 unless the display is turned on.

1 30
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Menu display
Some functions on your vehicle can be set,
activated and controlled by means of me­
nus when the ignition is on. You can also
use these menus to select the information
that the DIS will display for your (for exam­
ple: the trip computer).
The entire DIS concept provides a conve­
nient way for you to stay informed of the
current operating status ofyour vehicle and
to know when to perform preventative
·
,

maintenance.
The following pages describe how to obtain
information, change menu-driven settings
and call up additional data. The controls for making menu selections S�lecting a menu
The "Example of operation" on page 1 35 il­ and entries are located in the center console
as illustrated. Press the Menu button to go to the menu
lustrates how to use the menus in a typical function. (For sfety reasons, this only pos­
setting operation. This model procedure sible when the vehicle is standing still.
can also be adapted for other types of set­ From the starting menu, additional subme­
tings. nus will appear depending on your selec­
tions and entries. These submenus will al­
low you to call up information, or make
additional settings.

131
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Press the rotary push button (see illustra­

I
tion, arrow)to enter your selection or to set
the selected values in the system.

II
J. ---
B4B-688

Starting menu Selecting menus and entering

The starting menu tells you which types of selections
displays can be shown in the DIS display. Use the rotary push button to choose
The possible display types are: and enter selections.
• Men u off • Rotate button = Select/Set
• Check Rotate the button (see iII ustration curved ar­
• Set
row) to move the selection arrow in the
menus or to change settings.
• Help
• Press button = Enter/Confirm

132
------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Display types Check

The following functions are assigned to the - Service - see page 1 2 1 .
display types in the starting menu: Set
Menu off - Computer- see page 146.
- Trip computer Clock- see page 1 1 7 and 1 35.
- Auto Check System I radio data Radio info. see page 1 38.
- Speed warn. - see page 1 44.
-

- Outside temperature
- Speed warning Help
- Door and rear lid waming The help function will assist you in selecting
- Message display I display of selector le- the correct entry.
ver's positions (Automatic transmission) Getting help
- Navigation display* You can access the help menu from the
The Navigation System* can be operated starting menu by moving the selection ar­
using the switches in the center console - row to Help and then pushing the button
see separate operator manual for the Navi­ (enter).
gation System* Key:
..,. - Selector arrow
,/ - Selected
0 - Not selected
'f' - Next page
.&. -. Previous page
To leave the help menu, move the select ar­
row to Back and press the button to enter.

1 33
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

Entering settings Make your selection and again press the Making· s-.l�ctlons
If you want to enter'a setting , for example,
· rotary push button. The set function will In some setting operations, a selection_ is
now be displayed. Once again, select and made rather than entering values. To do
rotate the button until the selection arrow enter values by rotating or pressing the
point to Set. Then enter . your selection in this, you need to either select an empty
box (D) or a check mark (of}. See Il­
rotary push button.
the system bY briefly pressing the rotary
push butlon. ·
lustration.
The settings submenu will now appear in To enter a selection, rotate the button untH
the display. the selection arrow appears in front of the
check mark or empty box, and then press
the button. The symbol will now change
from a check mark to an empty box or vice
versa.

134
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Go back to a higher menu level Example of operation • Rotate the button to place the arrow on
After obtaining information or making a set­ Clock.
Suppose you wish to set the date:
ting, if you wish to return to the next higher • Now press the rotary button again __. the
menu level, rotate the button to move the • Press the MENU button in the center Clock setting menu will now appear in the
selection arrow to Back and then press the console - the starting menu will appear. display. See next illustration.
button. • Turn the rotary button to move the selec­
tion arrow to Set. See illustration.
• Press the rotary button to display the Set
·

submenu.

1 35
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

• Turn the rotary button to place the selec­ Now set the date as follows: to leave the setting menu, place the arrow
tion arrow in front of Date. - Rotate the button clockwise or counter­ Back and press the rotary button ..... the set�
If an empty box appears in front of Date, clockwise until the correct number for ting menu will move back to the next higher
press the rotary button. Now a check mark the day appears. Enter this number by level.
will appear (see illustration) the most re­
--> pressing the button - the setting mode Note
cently set date will appear in the setting will then skip to the month -+ the number
menu. of the month will begin to flash. If you wish, you can use the Clock menu
to set the time in a similar manner.
• Turn the selection button to put the arrow Now select the month as described
next to the date display and press the but­ above and enter by pressing the button
ton -+ the day will begin to flash. ..... the number of the year will begin to
flash.
Now the final step is to select the year
and to confirm your selection.

136
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT
Rear lid I door open
indicator Outside air temperature

� WARNING
The snowflake symbol is to warn
you that there may be ice on the
road and that you should pay spe­
cial attention.
Ice can form or remain on bridges
and roads even at temperatures
above freezing.

When the vehicle is stationary, or when you

are driving at very low driving speeds, the
With the ignition switched on a symbol in The outside temperature is displayed when temperature displayed may be slightly
the digital display will come on when either the ignition is switched on and the selector higher than the actual outside temperature
a door or the rear lid are opened. lever of the automatic transmission is in a as a result of heat from the engine.
For example, the above illustration shows driving position. The display will automatically switch from
that the front passenger's door, the rear left At temperatures between 41 °F (+5 °C) Celsius to Fahrenheit (and vice versa) when­
door and the rear lid are not closed. The and 23 ° F (-5 °C), a snowflake symbol ap­ ever you change the temperature display on
symbol blinks with the rear lid is open. pears in temperature display. the climate control panel. See page 1 63.
As soon as all the doors and rear lid are prop­
erly closed, the symbol will go out.

137
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Radio frequency display Auto-Check system

If the radio is switched on and no second In addition to the warning lights the Auto­
priority faults are present, the OK symbol Check System consistently monitors cer­
will go out and the display will show the fre­ tain individual functions and components of
quency selected and various other informa­ the vehicle as soon as the ignition is turned
tion. This feature depends on the type of ra­ on and when the vehicle is moving.
dio fitted. Malfunctions or urgent repairs are audibly
These displays are in addition to the radio signaled as well as displayed by red (prior­
display - see separate operating instruc­ ity 1 ) or yellow (priority 2) light symbols in
tions for radio. the instrument cluster.
You are thus reminded that a problem exists
which should be corrected for your conve­
nience and safety, and to prevent the risk of
considerable damage to your vehicle due to
certain malfunctions. Red Symbols (priority 1 )
The Auto-Check System incorporates a Engine coolant level is too low/
speed warning feature and is also used Engine temperature is too high
to display certain radio information_ (moving symbol).
The following malfunctions or warnings can
be displayed: Engine oil pressure is too low
(moving symbol).

1 38
------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

When the red blinking symbols appear, Battery voltage is too low/too high 0
three warning tones will sound at the same
time. These symbols represent Danger.
• Do not continue to operate the Check engine oil level
vehicle. The problem muat be lo­

�ENSOR
cated and corrected immediately.
Pull off the road to a safe area, well away Engine oil sensor defective
from traffic, stop the engine and operate the
emergency flasher. Use other warning de­
vices to alert motorists. Contact your autho­ Speed warning (USA Models) 9
rized Audi Dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of multiple malfunctions, the
symbols will blink successively in two-sec­ Speed warning (Canada Models) 8
ond intervals. The symbols will continue to Yellow Symbols (priority 2)
(@)
blink until the malfunction is corrected. Brake light is defective Dynamic headlight dimmer
Note
control not functioning
If a malfunction is detected while you are
using the Navigation System, the Naviga­
Headlight and/or tail light is defective � When the yellow symbols appear, only one
0
warning tone will sound at the same time.
tion System display will be switched off for
a few seconds and the Priority 1 Warning Brake pads worn These symbols represent a Warning.
Have the malfunction displayed corrected
symbol will appear. After that, the symbol as soon as possible. In the event of multiple
will change into the Priority 2 display, and Windshield wiper fluid reservoir malfunctions, the symbols will appear suc­
the Navigation System will be visible once level is too low (moving symbol) cessively in two-second intervals.
again.
As long there is a Priority 1 malfunction
present, Priority 2 malfunctions will not be Fuel level is low
displayed.

1 39
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

Calling up driver information

When a first priority symbol is flashed up,
the accompanying driver information can be
called up in the display for assistance.
For example: "SWITCH OFF ENGINE ;
CHECK OIL LEVEL".
Press the test button to call up this display.
The information disappears about 5 sec­
onds after the button is released again.

Test button Operation

The test button can be used to perform the After switching on the ignition in selector le­
following functions: ver position P or N, the driver instruction
"WHEN STATIONARY APPLY FOOT­
Checking the display
BRAKE WHILE SELECTING GEAR'' will ap­
With the car stationary and with the ignition pear.
on, you can check the symbols one after the When a gear ("R", "0", etc.) is selected,
other by briefly pushing on the knob. The en­ the driver instruction disappears and a func­
gine can either be running or not. Perform­
tional check is carried out automatically as
ing this brief check assures you that the dis­
a result of operating the brake pedal.
play is functioning properly. When driving,
you cannot check the function. If the functions monitored by the auto­
check system are working properly, the let­
ters "OK" will light up for a few seconds.

1 40
------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

If there are one or more faults, the driver in­ Displays Engine coolant
formation disappears about 1 5 seconds af­ In case of a malfunction or component fail­ temperature / level
ter the engine has been started and the ap­ ure, the acoustic warning will sound and the
propriate fault symbol appears in the If the light flashes, either the coolant ten:­
display. following symbols can appear. perature is too high, or the coolant level 1s
too low.
If neither "OK" nor any other fault symbol
appear in the display, the auto-check sy­
Brake light
USA models: BRAKE
• If the light starts to flash, move
_
stem must itself be checked. the vehicle a safe d1stance off
LIGHT the road, stop the engine, depress

Canada models: (@) the emergency flasher switch, turn

off the engine and let it cool down.
The following electrical components should Check coolant level. Top up as necessary
be checked, repaired or replaced, as neces­ (see " Cooling system", page 238). ·

sary:
• Brake light bulbs
g Always heed all WARNINGS
• Fuses
� on page 232.
• All wiring connections

1 41
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

� WARNING � WARNING continued • If a visual check shows the coolant level

and the V-belt normal, and the warning light
• The engine compartment of any • Reduce the risk of scalding from still does not go out, do not continue
motor vehicle is a potentially haz­ hot coolant by following these driving. See your authorized Audi Dealer.
ardous area. Before you check any­ steps: • If the coolant level and the V-belt are nor­
thing in the engine compartment, If the coolant reservoir cap must mal, the malfunction may be in the auxiliary
stop the engine and let it cool
be removed. wait until the en­ radiator fan. You can continue driving to the
down. Always exercise extreme gine has cooled down. nearest authorized Audi Dealer. The wind
caution when working under the from the moving vehicle and the main radia­
engine hood. Heed all of the - Protect face, hands. and arms tor fan driven by the V-belt will be enough to
WARNINGS on page 232. from escaping fluid and steam keep the angine cool. However, avoid idling
by covering the cap with a large. for a long time or driving very slowly.
• To reduce the risk of being
thick rag.
burned, never open the hood if you If the V-belt is torn, the main radiator fan, the
see or hear steam or coolant es­ Turn the cap slowly and very power steering and the generator will also
caping from the engine compart­ carefully in a counter-clockwise not work.
ment. Wait until no steam or cool­ direction while applying light.
Obtain expert assistance.
ant can be seen or heard before downward pressure on the top
carefully opening the hood. of the cap. Refer to "Coolant temperature gauge" on
page 1 1 8 for details.
• Never touch the radiator fan. - To help avoid being burned. do
The auxiliary fan is temperature not spill antifreeze or coolant on
controlled and can switch on sud­ the exhaust system or hot en­
denly. gine parts. Under some condi·
tions. the ethylene glycol in en·
gine coolant can catch fire.

1 42
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Engine oil pressure Brake pads worn 0 Battery voltage too high t::::1
If this warning light comes on, 1t Indicates See your Audi Dealer promptly to have front or too low
that the engine oil pressure is too low. and rear brake pads checked and replaced See your Audi Dealer promptly to locate and
• Stop the engine immediately, as necessary. correct the problem. The battery may be run
check the engine oil level and down, the generator may be overcharging,
or the V-belt tension may need adjustment.
add oil if necessary.
If engine oil level is normal but the
Headlights I tail lights � The voltage in the electrical system is dis­
light comes on again, do not con­
Check, repair or replace: played on the voltmeter. See page 1 20 for
tinua to operate the vehicle. This • Light bulbs additional details.
could damage the engine. • Fuses

• Electrical connections.
Turn the engine off and contact the nearest
Audi Dealer for assistance.
The oil pressure warning light is not Washer fluid
an indicator for low engine oil level. Replenish the windshield washer
To check the oil level, always use fluid in the container (see page 250).
dipstick (sea page 235).
Make it a habit to have the engine oil
level checked with every fuel filling.
Fuel
Pull into the next filling station and
fill up.
A Always heed all WARNINGS
� on page 232.

1 43
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -----

Speed warning
Check engine oil level �N The following describes how to store or de­
lete speed warnings 1 and 2.
Check the engine oil level as soon as pos­
sible by using the dip stick. Add engine oil
accordingly. See page 236. Speed warning 1
The ''MPH" ("km/h") disappears when you
Engine oil sensor �ENOOR reduce the speed below the stored speed.
Also, the ''MPH" goes out when the driving
defective speed increases approximately 25 mph
Contact an authorized Audi dealer and have (40 km/h) over the set speed for at least
the engine oil sensor inspected. 1 0 seconds. The stored speed is not de­
leted.
Selecting speed limit
Speed warning 8 or 8 You can store a road speed which is not to
be exceeded. As soon as you exceed that Press the test button for the Auto-Check
The stored speed h·as been exceeded. Slow speed by approximately 6 miles (1 0 kilome­ control briefly when the desired speed is in­
down or set new speed. dicated on the speedometer. The speed
ters), a warning tone sounds and "MPH" warning symbol lights up when the button
("km/h") appears in the display. is released to confirm that the selected
Dynamic headlight dimmer �(D Nota speed has been stored.
control• not functioning =1. •

Always monitor the vehicle speed by The set speed limit remains stored until
Have your authorized Audi dealer repair the means of the speedometer. The speed another speed is selected by pressing the
headlight dimmer control. warning device may only be used as a re­ button again or until the memory is cleared.
Refer to "Xenon lights" on page 1 57 for de­ minder not to exceed the posted speed
tails. limit.

1 44
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

The warning is shown in the display as de­

scribed. The warning symbol only goes out
once the road speed has fallen below the
stored value again.
We recommend to store this speed limit
v:'arning if you wish to be reminded of a par­
ticular speed limit in addition to speed limit
warning 1 . (For instance when driving in
countries with general speed limits or if a
particular speed should not be exceeded
when winter tires are fitted, etc.)
Selecting speed limit

Cancelling speed limit

• Press the test button briefly with the • A few seconds after the button is re­
ignition switched off. The mileage re­ leased, the display lighting goes out again.
Press the test button for at least 1 second corder display will then light up.
when the yehicle is moving at a speed Cancelling speed limit
• Press the test button again and hold for
above 3 miles (5 km/h). The display will P_ress the test button briefly with the igni­
show the warning symbol crossed through at least 2 seconds. The speed limit currently .
set appears in the display. tion sw1tched off; the display will light
to confirm that the speed limit has been up. Press the test button again for at least
cleared. • To change the speed limit, press the top
2 seconds: the display will show the .speed
or bottom of the function selector switch for limit currently set. Now press and hold the
Speed warning 2
the trip computer (see arrow illustration).
82 The speed limit displayed will then increase
" Reset" button for the trip computer until
the crossed-out warning symbol appears.
When the ignition is switched off, the driver or decrease by 6 miles (1 0 km/h) at a time.
can store a permanent speed limit
warning in the unit.

145
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Trip computer

The "Reset" touch control on the

bottom of the switch serves several
functions.
By depressing "Reset" for 2 seconds, the
"driving time", "average fuel consump­
tion", and "average driving speed" can be
reset.
The "miles or kilometres to empty" display
cannot be reset.
By pushing "Reset" briefly, the computer's
alert signal for driving time can be inter­
rupted.
This feature generates much helpful infor­ The digital display in the instrument cluster
mation by simple touch control. For the driv­ can be switched on and off by pressing the
er's convenience, the computer's memory " Reset" button briefly. The trip computer has five display modes:
display window is integrated in the instru­ When the ignition is switched on, the • Instantaneous fuel consumption
ment cluster. display shows the function that was last se­
• Miles or kilometres to empty
The computer function control lected.
switches are located in the windshield All the stored values are cancelled if the bat­ • Driving time (maximum range is
wiper switch lever. tery is disconnected. 23 hours: 59 minutes)
The switches are functional only when the • Average fuel consumption
ignition is turned on. Depressing the upper • Average driving speed
or lower edge of the rocker switch (see ar­ The instantaneous fuel consumption is
row in illustration) will display functions ei­
ther in forward or reverse order.
shown in the illustration by way of an exam­
ple.

1 46
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

USA models: This feature informs the driver how many If the ignition is off more than ten minutes,
computer calculations are displayed in the miles or kilometres of normal and smooth the driving time alert counter will automati­
USA measuring system driving can be covered with whatever cally start again from zero. If the ignition is
Canada models: amount of fuel remains in the tank. Fuel off less than ten minutes, the display will
computer calculations are displayed in the economy is the result of good driving habits. blink again every two hours.
metric system Driving time I (MPG) - Average fuel
h 0
1/1 00 km - Instantaneous
100 km
Driving time elapsed will remain in storage, consumption
(MPG) fuel consumption even pfter the ignition is turned off. Further The display will show the computed aver­
driving time will be added automatically af­ age since the last "Reset". When the igni­
tion is turned off, the computed average re­
Fuel consumed instantaneously IS mea­ ter engine restart. Maximum storage and
sured every 1 00 feet or 30 meters and dis­ display range is 23 hours: 59 minutes. To
played in units of miles per gallon (MPG) or mains in storage. When driving is resumed,
liters per 1 00 kilometres (1/1 OOkm). When keep track of driving time between points, the computation continues automatically.
this function is selected right after engine depress "Reset" for zero. To delete stored data, push "Reset".
start-up, the display will show the average Driving time alert 0 km/h - Average driving
fuel consumption figure for the first 1 00 While driving, the computer will automati­
feet or 30 meters. When the vehicle is sta­ (MPH) speed
cally switch to the "driving time" display ev­
tionary, the last unit measured will be dis­ ery two hours. The indicator "2:00" (or The display will show the computed aver­
played. "4:00", "6:00", "8:00" etc.) will blink in the age of driving speed variations since the last
km - Kilometres or miles to display window to alert the driver to take a " Reset". When the ignition is turned off,
break. The blinker can be turned off briefly the computed average remains in storage.
{Mi) empty When driving is resumed, the computation
by pushing "Reset'' or either side of the
The displayed information (indicated in switch. continues automatically. To delete stored
stages of 5 miles or 1 0 kilometres) is based data, push "Reset"
on the average fuel consumption computed
during the last 20 miles or 30 kilometers.

1 47
CONTROLS AND EO�PMENT -----

Switches
This switch also operates the front and rear Daytime running lights
fog lights: it can pulled out when the side (Canada models only)
lights or headlights are switched on. When the ignition is switched on, the fog
To conserve battery power, the headlights lights, side marker lights and tail lights will
will go out automatically when the ignition automatically come on.
is turned off or while the starter is engaged.
High beam, low beam and headlight flasher,
see page 1 56. � WARNING
Accidents can happen when you
Automatic headlight adjustment cannot see the road ahead and
After you start the engine, as well as while when you cannot be seen by other
the vehicle is moving, the headlights auto­ motorists.

Light switch "-YJ.- matically adjust themselves to the load and - Never use daytime running
. ''

0 - all
angle of the vehicle (for example, during ac­ lights to see where you're go­
lights off 1 ) celeration or braking). This prevents unnec­ ing. They are not bright enough
;oo: - all lights on, except headlights essary glare for on-coming traffic. and won't let you see for enough
ahead for safety, especially at
�D - headlights (only with ignition on) and
If the system is not operating properly, the
warning symbol in the Auto Check Control dusk or when it's dark.
...
all other lights on. - see page 1 44 - will come on. - Always turn on the headlights
so that you can see ahead and so
that others can see your car
from the back.

1} Canada models:
Daytime running lights

148
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Front fog lights �D The front and rear fog light symbols next to
the switch will light up.
Do not try to turn the light switch toward the
front fog light symbol. The vehicle is equipped with one rear fog
With ignition on, the fog lights can be light, located on the left side in the rear lid
switched on in combination with low of the vehicle. The front fog lights will come
beams. on automatically when the rear fog light is
switched on.
Turn the light switch to the headlight posi­
tion and pull the switch out to the fint The rear fog light can distract drivers behind
stop. you, so it must only be switched on in condi­
tions of very poor visibility. Please observe
The front fog light symbol next to the switch local regulations when using the rear fog
will light up. light.
Please observe local regulations when us­
(;,.
ing the fog lights. General note
Instrument illumination
If the lights are left on after the key has been
With the Ignition on, the basic level of
Rear fog light 0$ taken out of the ignition lock, a buzzer
sounds when the driver's door is opened. brightness of the displays in the instrument
cluster and the displays in the center con­
Do not try to turn the light switch toward tli e This is your reminder to switch off the ligHts
rear fog light symbol. before leaving the vehicle. sole can be set by turning the thumbwheel.
With ignition on. the rear fog light can be The selected level of brightness automati­
switched on in combination with low cally adjusts to suit the prevailing light con­
beams. ditions.
Turn the light switch to the headlight posi­ When the lights are switched on, you can
tion and pull the switch out to the second adjust the brightness of the instruments all
stop. displays and the ill umination of the ce�ter
console by turning the thumbwheel.

1 49
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT --
--

1 - Use this thumbwheel switch to activate

and regulate the heating elements in the
driver's seat.
4 - Use this thumbwheel switch to activate
and regulate the heating elements in the
front passenger's seat.
From position 0, roll thumbwheel upward to
activate the heating elements.
Select the desired temperature setting be­
tween positions 1-6. When the heating ele­
ments are activated, the numbers on the
thumbwheel will light up.
1 and 4 - Electrically heated ... 8
The steering wheel heating* is The heating elements* for the left and right
utJ
switched on automatically when the seat seating positions of the rear seat bench are
seats• heating is switched on. The temperature. switched on and off and regulated by the
The heating elements in both seats can be however, remains at a constant preset level thumbwheel in the center console:
turned on and regulated separately with the and cannot be regulated with the thumb­
wheel ( 1 ) . a - left
two thumbwheel switches.
b - right
With the ignition on, the seat cushion and
backrest of the front seats can be heated Note
The rear seat heating* only operates when
electrically. a sensor registers the weight of the occu­
To prevent possible damage to the heating pant on the seat.
elements, do not kneel on the seats or in Select the desired temperature setting be­
any other way apply a heavy load to relative­ tween positions 1-6. When the heating ele­
ly small areas of the seat. ments are activated, the numbers on the
thumbwheel will light up.

1 50
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

3 Rear window defogger QiP r.Gb In order to save electricity,

m switch off the defogger when
-

The rear window defogger works only with

the ignition on. the rear window is clear. The light in
the switch will go out.
Depress the switch to turn on the rear win­ When you save electricity, you save
dow defogger. The indicator light in the fuel. See "Operate your vehicle eco­
switch will light up.
paga 195.
nomically and minimize pollution",
When outside air temperatures are above
32°F {0°C) the rear window defogger will The rear window defogger is not designed
turn off automatically after approximately for melt snow. Therefore, always remove
1 0 minutes. heavy snow and ice accumulations before
driving off.

2 - Defrosting windows
See climate controls, page 1 63.

151
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

2 Emergency flasher �
-

The emergency flasher works independent­

ftl WARN I N G
ly of the ignition switch position. To avoid being struck by another
If your vehicle is disabled or parked under vehicle, move your vehicle a safe
emergency conditions, depress the switch distance off the road when stalled
to make all four turn signals flash simulta­ or stopped for repairs. Do not park
neously. The warning light in the switch or operate the vehicle in areas
flashes too. where the hot exhaust system may
come in contact with dry grass,
brush, fuel spill or other material
that can cause fire.

1
When the airbag deploys in an accident, the
- Electronic Stability Program emergency flasher also will come on.
(ESP)
The ESP is switched on automatically when
the engine is started. If required, it can also
be switched on and off manually by briefly
pressing the switch .
. When the system is switched off, the warn­
ing light comes on. See page 1 24.
See page 205 for further details.

1 52
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Ride height adjustment (4 Level Air Suspension)

• Normal level - Standard ground clear­ You can deactivate this mode either by
ance. The two lower green LED's will now manuallly selecting Normal or Low level, or
be lit in the level display (2). by switching off the ignition.
• High level - Increased ground clear­ To activate this mode again, first switch on
ance for rough roads and trails. The three the ignition and then select High or Highest
lower LED's will now be lit in the level dis­ level.
play (2). • In the manual mode, the automatic
• Highest level - Ride height level for ex­ switching to High level and automatic low­
tremely rough roads and terrain. All four ering to low level at high vehicle speeds are
green LED's will now be lit in the level dis­ deactivated.
play (2).
....
_ ..., _____
__ �-- - � �. ..J
842·8!18
Notes
• When you park your vehicle. make

certain that there is enough clear­

The ride height level can be adjusted auto­ ance above the roof. Sometimes
• If you manually select "High" or "High­ changes in temperature or load will
matically or manually - depending on
est" while the automatic mode is on, but cause the vehicle to raise itself auto­
the vehicle's speed: the vehicle has slowed down to the point matically. The roof could get dam­
• Low laval - Reduced ground clearance, where it lowers to "Normal" or " Low" aged if there isn't enough clearnace.
like a sport suspension. The lowest green level, the system will automatically raise the
LED will come in the level display (2). vehicle back to the "High" position.
In automatic mode, the vehicle will auto­ When does this happen?
matically lower to the low level after it - If the vehicle speed falls below 38 mph
reaches about 75 mph (120 km/h). The sys­ (60 km/h), this will happen after about
tem builds in a brief delay before this hap­ 30 seconds.
pens. If the speed drops below about 45
mph (70 km/h) for an extended period, the - If the vehicle speed falls below 1 9 mph
system resumes the normal level. (30 km/h), this will happen right away.

153
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Increasing the vehicle ride height Notes

manually
• The control operations are dependent on
To make certain that the system functions the vehicle's current speed. For example, it
properly, do not raise the vehicle ride height is not possible to manually switch to the
unless the engine is running. ·high level or highest level when the vehicle
Press button (3) to adjusting the vehicle to is going above a certain speed.
the next higher level, ending at the high Likewise, if ·you. have already selected the
laval. high or highest level, and the vehicle speeds
Once you are in the high level, you can go to up above a certain speed, the system auto­
the highest laval by pressing the button matically switches down to the next lower
again. level.
Levels that have been selected but not yet For example, at about 20 mph (35 km/h) the
reached by the vehicle are indicated by flas­ vehicle will lower from the highest level to
Manual mode hing LED's in the level indicator (2). the high level. Beginning at about 50 mph
To switch from the automatic mode to the The current actual level is indicated by conti­ (80 km/h), the system switches from the
manual mode, press button ( 1 ) or (3) for at nuously lit LED's. high level to normal level.
least 2 seconds. Press again to return to the
automatic mode. Manually lowering the ride height
The yellow LED in the display (2) will be lit Press button ( 1 ) to go to the next lower
in the manual mode. laval. You can repeat this until you've se­
lected the low level.
The next level that was selected but has not
been reached by the vehicle is indicated by
a continuously lit LED in the level indica­
tor (2).
The current actual level is indicated by flas­
hing LED's.

1 54
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Notes continued Deactivating

• At excessive loads (for example, over­ To deactivate the jack mode, press buttons
heating caused by frequent changes in the (1) and (3) at the same time for at least 5
ride height when the vehicle is stationary), seconds. The warning light in the instru­
the system is temporarily deactivated for ment cluster, the LED for manual mode, and
safety reasons. The system will return to the LED's on the control buttons will all turn
full operation once it has cooled down. off.
• The system automatically switches to The original system state and full functional�
the normal level if the ESP automatically ity of the ride height system are now re­
shuts off (see page 205). If this happens, stored.
switch the ignition off, and then on again. In addition, the jack mode will automatically
Now you can select the desired level once be deactivated when vehicle speed ex­
again. ceec;ls 3 mph (5 km/h).
Jack mode
Activating � WARNING
Before lifting the vehicle with a jack or lift,
press buttons (1) and (3) at the same • Make certain that no one is lying
time for at least 5 seconds with the ignition under the vehicle or has his I her
switched on. head or hands in the wheel house
When the system is in the jack mode, the while the ride height is changing
LED's on control buttons (1) and (3), the yel­ or when a iack is being used.
low LED for the manual mode on the level • Changes in outside tempera­
indicator (2) and the warning light for level ture, in vehicle loads or in other
control in the instrument cluster (see pa­ conditions will cause the vehicle
ge 123) will all come on. to adjust it's level automatically.
Once this happens, tum off the ignition.
The vehicle can now be lifted.

1 55
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Turn signals, headlight dimmer switch lever

The turn signals are cancelled automatically
when you have completed a turn (for exam­
ple, when turning a corner), and the steering
wheel returns to the straight ahead posi­
tion.
If a turn signal fails, the indicator light
flashes about twice as fast. A light bulb may
have to be replaced.
Lane changer
Move the lever up or down just to the point
of resistance - the indicator light must also
flash at the same time. The lever will return
Turn signals
to the OFF position when released.
Switching the high
The turn signals only work when the ignition beam on / off
is switched on.
The turn signal indicator light flashes when The headlights work only when the ignition
you operate the lever (ignition on). is switched on.
Lever up - right turn signals Switching on:
Lever down - left turn signals. With the headlights on, push the lever for­
ward.
The blue indicator light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
Switching off:
Pull the lever towards you.

1 56
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Headlight flasher Xenon lights*

You can signal with your headlights by pull­ After starting the engine the Xenon head­
ing the lever toward the steering wheel. lights are automatically adjusted to the load
When flashing headlights, the blue indicator and angle of the vehicle (for example, during
light will come on. acceleration, braking). This prevents on­
coming traffic from experiencing unneces­
sary glare from your headlights.
If the system is not operating properly, a
warning symbol will be displayed in the
Auto Check Control - see page 1 44.

1 57
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Cruise control
Switching the system on
� WARNING
Slide switch A to ON.
• To help keep the vehicle under
Setting speed
control, do not use the cruise con­
trol when driving on winding or When the vehicle reaches the speed to be
slippery roads, or in heavy or vary­ maintained, push button B (SET). Now you
ing traffic. can take your foot off the gas pedal.
• Only usa cruise control when You can increase the speed by using the ac­
traffic and weather conditions al­ celerator pedal. When the pedal is released,
low you to drive at a steady speed. the system continues to control the vehicle
• To prevent unintended opera­
at the speed previously set.
tion of cruise control, turn it off However, this will not occur if the vehicle
For your driving comfort the cruise control when it is not being used. speed exceeds the speed that was set by
system can be used to keep the vehicle • It is dangerous to use the Re­
more the 6 miles per hour (10 km/hl for lon­
speed constant, as long as the engine pow­ sume feature when the previously
ger than 5 minutes. The speed will then
er and braking are not affected, beginning at set speed is too fast for existing
have to be set again.
about 25 mph (40 km/h). traffic conditions.

The system is operated with switch A and

button B located on the tum signal lever.

1 58
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Changing the speed Switching off the system Setting the speed
Decelerate I Set temporarily You can set the speed if no speed was set
The system is temporarily switched off by when the system was temporarily
Press button B to reduce the speed. switched off, or if the speed was erased:
By briefly pressing button B, you reduce the stepping on the brake pedal, or by sliding
switch A towards OFF. • Slide switch to the RES and hold it until
speed in stages. If you hold the button the desired speed is reached. Release the
down, the speed decreases automatically. The speed that is stored at this time is main­
The speed the car is then going when you tained. switch and speed is stored.
release the button will be the new speed The speed you Dre going Dt the time you or
that is stored. temporarily switched off the system is • Depress the gas pedal until you reach the
If the button is released below approxi­ stored and can be retrieved. desired speed, and press button B briefly.
mately 25 mph (40 km/h), the memory is To retrieve and resume the speed that was The speed is stored.
erased. The speed must then be reset using previously stored, slide the switch A to
button B after the vehicle accelerates RES after taking your foot off the brake ped­
above 25 mph (40 km/hl. Switching the system off
al.
Accelerate I Set
completely

You can increase speed by sliding the ,4 WARNING � WARNING

switch A to RES without having to press
the gas pedal. It is dangerous to use the Resume To prevent unintended operation
feature when the previously set of cruise control, turn it off when
By sliding the switch briefly toward RES, speed is too fast for existing traf­ it is not being used.
you can increase the speed in stages. If you fic conditions.
slide the switch and hold it in place, the
speed increases steadily. The speed that • sliding switch A to the right stop (OFF)
the vehicle is going when you release the
switch is the new speed that is stored. • by switching off the ignition when the ve­
hicle is stopped.

1 59
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Wiper and washer system

The wiper and washer system only works • Intermittent wiping:
when the ignition is on. Lever in position 2
The heated washer jets do not have a You can adjust to wiping intervals to four dif­
separate switch. Depending on the outside ferent settings using the small lever A.
temperature, the heated washer jets will
operate when the ignition is on. Turn the small lever A
to the right- shorter intervals
To prevent damage to the w1pmg
system. always loosen blades frozen Turn the small lever A
to glass before operating wipers. to the !eft - longer intervals
In each setting, the intervals are also con­
Notes trolled by the speed of the vehicle.
• Filling washer container, see page 250. • Low wiper speed

• Replacing wiper blades, see page 251 . Lever in position 3

Windshield
• High wiper speed
• Wiper off:
Lever in position 4
� WAR N I N G Lever in position 0
Automatic wiper I washer
• One-tap wiping
Always heed WARNINGS on Pull lever toward steering wheel and hold ­
page 1 6 1 . Lever in position 1 wipers and washer work (position 5).
When the lights are on, the headlight wash­
ers are also activated when the lever is held
in this position for more than about one sec­
ond.
Release lever -
The washer stops and the wipers keep
going for about four seconds.

1 60
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

� WARNING
• Worn or dirty wiper blades will
reduce visibility. making driving
hazardous. Clean blades regularly
to remove road film and carwash
wax buildup. Use an alcohol base
cleaning solution. a lint free cloth
and wipe along the blade.
• Clean all inside and outside win­
dow glass regularly. Use an alco­
hol base cleaning solution and
wipe dry with a lint free or a cham­
Rear window ois cloth. Headlight washer
• Do not use the wiper 1 washer in When the headlights are switched on, the
1 - Intermittent wiping
freezing weather without first headlight lenses are washed each time the
The wiper works about every six seconds. warming the windshield with the windshield washer is operated.
Pull lever back again briefly to switch rear defrosters, otherwise the washer
The headlight washer jets come out autO­
wiper off. solution may freeze on the wind­
matically (under water pressure) when the
2 Automatic wiper I washer
shield and obscure your vision.
-
washers are operated.
• Avoid running the wiper blades
Press lever away from steering wheel and over a dry windshield to prevent
Clean off dirt or insects from the lenses at
hold - the wip_er and the washer work as scratching the glass. A scratched
regular intervals, for example, when refueli­
long as lever is held in this position. windshield will reduce visibility
ng.
Release lever- and increase glare at night. To ensure that the system works properly in
The washer stops and the wiper continues winter, keep the washer jets free of snow
for about four seconds. and remove any ice with de-icer spray.

Filling washer container, see page 250.

1 61
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Climate controls
The air conditioner is fully auto­ Recommended standard setting for
� WARNING matic, and is designed to maintain a com­ all-year operation:
• For clear visibility and safe driv­
fortable and uniform climate inside the ve­ After switching on the ignition
ing, it is extremely important that
hicle .
• Select a temperature of
you follow the operating instruc­ The temperature of the air supplied to the in­ 75 oF (23°C) and
tions on the proper use and func­ terior, the fan speed, air distribution and vol­
ume of air delivery are regulated automati­ • Press AUTO button.
tion of the ventilation/heating, de­
fogging{defrosting and air condi­ cally. With this setting, you attain maximum com­
tioning system in this manual. If in This automatic climate control program can fort in the least amount of time.
doubt, consult your authorized also be adjusted manually by the driver and You only need to change this setting to
Audi Dealer. the front passenger. meet your personal needs.
• Good visibility comas with The illustration on the next page shows the Air outlets - see page 1 65.
clean windows free of fog, con­ controls for the driver and front passenger
densation and frost. in the center console. The left display indi­
• Maximum heating output and cates the temperature selected for the driv­
fast defrosting will occur only af­ er's side and the right display the tempera­
ter the engine has reached operat­ ture selected for the front passenger's side.
ing temperature. Wait until you The temperature is selected by pressing the
have good visibility before moving "+" or "-" buttons beneath the respective
your vehicle. displays.

1 62
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Operating controls
The functions are switched on and off by
pressing the buttons briefly. The indicator in
the button comes on when the function is
operating.
AUTO - Automatic
(standard setting)
The air temperature, air flow and air distribu­
tion are regulated automatically to achieve
and maintain the desired passenger
compartment temperature as quickly as
possible. The system compensates for
changes in outside temperature and for the
intensity of the sunlight entering the vehicle
Switching between Fahrenheit and
Centigrade @ - Defrost
automatically. In this mode, the windshield and side win­
dows will be defrosted I defogged as quick­
The temperature display can be
switched from oF to oc (and vice
- + Temperature setting ly as possible.
versa) as follows:
The desired interior temperature can be pre­ Press Gill button and hold down. At the The temperature is controlled automatical­
set within a range from 64°F (18°C) to 84°F same time press temperature selector but­ ly. Air flow will be on the maximum setting
(29°C). In the two extreme settings "LO" ton "+" on driver side briefly. and will mainly flow from outlets 1 and 2.
and "HI" the system operates continuously See "Air outlets" on page1 65.
with maximum cooling or heating output, so
the temperature is no longer regulated auto­
matically.

1 63
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

C... - Air recirculation ECON - Economy

The air conditioner compressor can be
4iiJ - Rear window defogger
In the air recirculation mode, the supply of See page 1 5 1 .
outside air is blocked and the air in the pas­ turned off to save fuel. However, the com­
senger compartment is recirculated. This fort level that the system can achieve in this
helps to prevent pollutant-containing out­ mode limited. Air distribution selector
side air from entering the passenger If the interior of the vehicle gets too hot, or buttons
compartment. It is best not to use this set­ if the windows begin to fog or ice up, press
ting for extended periods of time. the ECON button again to tum the compres­ The automatically programmed air distribu­
tion can be altered manually with the but­
If the windows begin to fog or ice tons{}, � . and{).. The buttons can be op­
sor on again and switch back to AUTO.
up, select the ® program setting as erated singly or in combination.
soon as possible. OFF - Switching air conditioner oft To return to the automatically programmed
The air conditioner can be switched off by air distribution, switch off the selected
� WARNING pressing the button briefly. This cuts off the manual functions separately or by pressing
supply of air from the outside. the "AUTO" or ® buttons.
• You will not receive any fresh
outside air when air recirculation To reactivate the air conditioner,
press the AUTO button or one of the blower, iJ Air directed to windows
is on. Do not use this setting over temperature or air distribution selector but­ Unlike setting ® , this setting directs all
-

long periods of time because stale

air contributes to fatigue and re­ tons,
It is
or press OFF again.
not normally necessary to switch off the
the air to outlets 1 and 2.

1-1 - Air
duced driver alertness. air conditioner. from dashboard outlets
• If the windows fog up, press the and rear of center console
:s::

air recirculation button again im­ All the air comes from outlets 3 and 4.
mediately to switch off the air re­ - + Fan speed
circulation function or select de­ The automatically selected fan speed (vol­ 0 Air to footwall& -

frost. ume of air delivery) can be reduced or in­ All the air comes from outlets 5 and from
creased manually by operating these but­ the outlets under the front seats.
tons. The selected fan speed is shown by a
segment display above the buttons.

1 64
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Outlets 2, 3 and 4 can be opened or

closed separately with the respective
thumbwheel next to the outlets.
The direction of air delivery from these
outlets can be adjusted horizontally and
vertically. The upper outlets (2) are not ad­
justable.
Note
When the air conditioner is cooling the ve­
hicle interior, the cool air mainly emerges
from outlets 3 and 4. To ensure adequate
cooling, these outlets should therefore nev­
er be closed completely.

I 848-902

Air outlets
1 Outlets over full width of windshield
Side window defroster I defogger
Depending on the operating mode se­ -

lected, the air flow to the outlets is con­ 2 -

trolled either automatically or manually. nozzles

The illustration shows the air outlets in and 3 - Side dashboard and rear console vents
around the dashboard. 4 - Center dashboard vents
The outlets deliver either heated or un­ 5 - Footwall outlets
heated fresh air, or cooled air.

1 65
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Solar roof* Key coding

On models with a solar sliding roof, if the ve­ To achieve maximum comfort levels, the
hicle is parked in sufficiently strong sunlight current manual settings for the air condi­
and the ignition has been turned off, the tioning system are automatically saved.
blower automatically switches to the solar­ For example, if the air conditioning settings
powered mode. The blower motor runs on were changed when someone else used
solar energy, keeping the vehicle's interior your car, the air condition system will auto­
supplied with fresh air. matically be reset to the settings that match
For optimum air delivery the center (4) and your key when you turn on the ignition
the side dashboard vents (3) should be again.
opened. This assumes that the previous driver used
The solar-powered fan only works when the a keyother than yours. If the previous driver
The above illustration shows the outlets at sliding roof is closed or raised open at the used your key, his or her new settings
the rear of the center console. rear. would be assigned to your key.
Air is directed to these outlets automati­ If the ventilation system happens to be set If a number of persons use the vehicle, then
cally. to the recirculate mode, the climate control if possible, each should use a different key.
system automatically switches to the fresh In this way, your personal air conditioning
The heater outlets for the rear footwall are air mode. setting will be restored automatically.
located under the front seats. They are con­
trolled together with outlet 5.

1 66
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

General notes • If the inside temperature is very high af­ • The air conditioner may switch itself off
• Vehicle heating is depend upon tne tem­
ter the vehicle has been parked in the sun, temporarily to ensure sufficient engine
perature of the engine coolant - therefore, open windows and allow the hot air to es­ cooling when the engine is running at full
your vehicle interior will warm uponly when cape before switching on the air condi­ load.
the engine has reached its operating tem­ tioner. The air conditioner will also be switched off
perature. • The dust and pollen filter will prevent temporarily in the kick-down function. See
When the ambient temperature is too low, dust and pollen etc. in the outside air from page 1 09.
the fan only switches to high speed modes entering the car. Switch to air recirculation • Check the air conditioning fuse on the
when the coolant has reached a sufficiently to prevent unpleasant fumes from entering fuse pi mel -see page 274. Have it replaced,
high temperature, or when the ® button the vehicle. if necessary.
has been depressed. If water drips under the • If you suspect that the air conditioner is
• Keeping the air intake slots in front of the vehicle... damaged, for instance after an accident,
windshield free from ice, snow and debris At high outside temperatures and humidity, switch to the ECON and have the system
helps to make sure that the climate control condensation may drip from the evaporator. examined immediately for leaks or other
system will work properly. This is normal and does not indicate a leak. damage.
• When the air conditioner compressor is
on it reduces both the temperature and the If the airflow is not cool ...
humidity of the air inside the vehicle. This • At low ambient temperatures the air con­
prevents the windows from fogging up. ditioner compressor switches off automati­
• The air conditioner works best with the cally. The compressor cannot be switched
windows and power roof* closed. on again in this case, even by pressing the
AUTO button.

1 67
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

Power roof*
Maintenance The roof will slide open or tilt up at the rear
as required. When the ignition is on it can be � WARNING
• For maximum efficiency of the air condi­ opened and closed by turning the rota�
tioner the dust and pollen filter elements Be careful when closing the power
must 'be replaced at the intervals indicated control next to the interior light. The roof 1s
tilted open or closed by pressing or pulling roof 1 tilt roof. Not paying atten­
in the Maintenance Schedule. the control - see illustration. tion could cause you or others to
• The condenser must be checked regu­
When turning the ignition off, however, the
be caught and injured as the roof
larly to make sure it is clean. If it becomes sunroof can still be operated as long as the
closes. To help avoid injuries
obstructed by dirt or insects, spray 1t clear driver's and front passenger's door are
caused by closing the roof, always
with water. closed. When either door is opened, sliding
take your key whenever you leave
• Repairs to the Audi air condition­ roof operation will be deactivated.
your vehicle.
ing system require specialized Always close the roof completely if you are
knowledge and special tools. going to park your vehicle and leave.
If the system is not functioning
properly, contact your Audi Dealer.

1 68
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

;
To close: Notes
I Turn the switch to position 0. When the glass roof opens, the sun visor
---______.)
\ •
\. , . _
used to keep out strong sunlight is also
opened automatically. If desired, the visor
� WARNING can be slid shut manually when the power
roof is closed.
Be careful when closing the power It is important to remember to close the
roof! Check to see that no one is in power roof when parking the car or if it sud­
the way, or serious injury could re­

=::�1
sult. denly starts raining - especially when the
sun shade is extended.

-------� To lift:
• The power roof is protected by a circuit
breaker to prevent the electrical system
Briefly press the control to tilt the roof up as from overloading. If the power roof will not
Opening and closing close normally, it can be closed by pulling
far as it will go.
To open: The roof can be set to any position in be­
the controL
Turn the switch in direction 1 . tween by holding the switch until the roof
The switch can be set to any intermediate reaches the desired position. Convenience closing
position. To lower: You can also close. the power roof from the
When you turn the switch, you will be able outside when locking your vehicle:
to feel a point at which resistance builds up. To move it all the way down again, pull the Hold the key in the close position in the driv­
In order to achieve a maximum comfort lev­ control briefly. er's door.
el when the roof is operi, it's recommended
that you only open the power roof to this
point

1 69
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Power roof with solar panel*

The solar panel is operated in the same way
.·

as the power roof. The roof's solar cells sup­

ply energy for the air conditioner blower.
See page 1 66.
The interior trim is fixed to the solar panel
cannot be opened and closed separately.

Emergency closing • Then insert the screwdriver into the gap

between the light housing and the frame in
If you cannot close the roof with the electric the rear on the side and carefully pry out the
switch, you can still close the roof manually housing.
using a crank (see right illustration). The
crank is located behind the fuse cover (see To close the roof, press the manual
page 274). crank ( 1 ) into the hex socket (2) until it en­
gages. Keep pressing down and turn the
In order to access the power roof motor, re­ crank.
move the interior light (lens and housing) as
follows: Reinstall the light housing and lens in the
reverse order.
• Place the flat side of the screwdriver
found in the vehicle tool kit on the rear side Have the problem corrected by your autho­
of the lens as shown in the illustration and rized Audi dealer.
carefully pry the lens downward.

1 70
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Interior lights, reading lights

Interior light delay

J: :!
----�Ot.:-=
The light stays on for about 30 seconds after
it is activated. If one of the doors is left open
the light goes out automatically after about

UJ,- .\
1 0 minutes. ___ __ \

iI
The light goes off as soon as you lock the car
or switch on the ignition. ·��-_:]
�
·-------- - · · · - -
:
--·--- - - ·
1 - On continuously

Note
A dimmer automatically adjusts the bright­
ness of the lights. 846·759 '

The dome light and the front reading B - Front reading lights � C - Rear interior light
lights are located above the windshield. To turn the reading lights on and off press See "Dome light" for switch positions.
A -Dome light the switch (see symbol).
Switch positions:
0 - 0ff
D - Rear reading light �
Center position - Door contact To turn the reading lights on and off press
switch the switch (see symbol).
The light is switched on when the doors are
unlocked or when one of the doors is
opened. The light comes also on when the
key is removed from the steering lock.

171
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Luggage compartment light

-
---- -------------

Ambient lighting Luggage compartment light Rear lid light

When you switch on the ignition, the lights The light is located at the top of the luggage The light in the rear lid comes on automati­
in the door handles come on automatically. compartment. cally when you open the lid. If you leave the
The lights above the windshield come on lid open for longer than 1 0 minutes, the I ight
when the headlights are switched on. The Switch positions: will automatically switch off.
center console is illuminated from above. 0 - Off
You cannot manually turn these off. Center position Light comes on when
-

the rear lid is opened.

I Luggage compartment light on continu­
-

ously.

Delay function
See description on previous page.

1 72
-------�- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Audi Homelink® Universal Transmitter*

The Homelink® operates off the vehicles Note
battery and charging system and has non­ Do not use this Audi Homelink®
volatile memory. If the battery dies or is dis­ Universal Transmitter with any ga­
connected, Homelink® will retain all pro­ rage door opener that lacks the
gramming. safety stop and reverse feature as
required by federal safety stan­
� WARNING dards. This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before
When programming the Audi April 1 , 1982.
Homelink® Universal Transmitter, A garage door opener which cannot
-�....... ..
you may be operating a garage detect an object, signaling the door
door or estate gate. Make sure that to stop and reverse does not meet
people and objects are out of the current federal safety standards.
The Audi Homelink® Universal Transmitter way to prevent potential harm or Using a garage door opener without
is located on the driver's side sun visor. damage. these features increases risk of seri­
This innovative feature will learn the radio ous injury or death.
frequency codes of most current transmit­
ters used to activate garage doors, entry For more information, call toll-free:
door locks, estate gates, security systems, 1 (800) 355-3515.
and home or office lighting.
The Homelink® Universal Transmitter is ca­
pable of operating up to three separately
controlled devices.

1 73
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Initial Programming of the

Audi HomeUnk® Universal
Transmitter
I 1 - Turn the ignition switch on .
I 2 - Prepare for programming the
I Homelink ® Universal Transmitter by
; erasing the three factory default chan­
f

- -�,j1,)1B4B-�283 .
'
.
nels:
, Simultaneously press and hold chan­
nels 1 and 3 - releasing only when the . .... . ..

··-----. . ..
. �-// indicator light (A) begins to flash after
20 seconds.
1- Channel 1 3 - Hold the end of the hand-held transmit­ 5 - The Home link® indicator light will flash
2- Channel 2 ter of the device you wish to train first slowly, and then rapidly. When the
approximately 2 inches away from the indicator light flashes rapidly, both the
3- Channel 3 surface of the Homelink® channels - button and channel may be released .
A- Indicator Light . keeping the indicator light in view. If you wish, repeat procedures 3 through 5
B- Optimal placement of hand-held 4 - Using both hands, simultaneously push to program the remaining channels.
transmitter during training. the hand-held transmitter button and If a garage door opener has been pro­
®
one of the Homelink channels. Do grammed but does not activate with
not release until step 5 has been com­ ®
Homelink , proceed to the following sec­
pleted. tion: "Training a Garage Door Equipped with
Rolling Code"

1 74
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Training a Garage Door The garage door opener should now recog­ Erasing the Audi HomeLink®
Equipped with Rolling Code nize the Audi Homelink® Universal Trans­ Universal Transmitter's Pro­
mitter. You may use either the hand-held gramming
To train your rolling code garage door transmitter or the Audi Home link® Univer­
opener to operate from your Homelink® sal Transmitter to activate the garage door. 1 - Turn the ignition switch on.
Universal Transmitter, follow these steps 2 - Simultaneously press and hold chan­
after completing the "Program­ Operating the Audi HomeLink® nels 1 and 3 until the indicator light be­
ming" portion of this text (the aid of a sec­ Universal Transmitter gins to flash after 20 seconds.
ond person may make the training quicker
and easier): 1 Tum the ignition switch on.
-
3 - Release both buttons.
1 - Locate and press and relaaaa the 2 - Select and firmly press and release the This process will erase the trained codes of
training (or "learning") button on the appropriate channel (1, 2, or 3) to acti­ the three channels or erase the factory set
garage door opener motor head unit. vate the trained device (e.g. garage default codes.
(Exact location and color of the button door, estate gate, home security sy­ The Audi Homelink® Universal Transmitter
may vary by garage door opener brand.) stem, entry door lock, or home or office is now in the train (or programming) mode
If there is difficulty locating the training lighting). and can be programmed at any time follow­
button, reference the garage door ing steps 3 through 5 in the "Programming"
opener owner's manual or call toll free: portion of this text.
1 -800-355-3515.
2 - Return to the vehicle and press and re­
lease the programmed Homelink®
channel. Press and release the
Homelink® channel a second time to
complete the programming process.
(Some garage door openers may re­
qui·re you to do this procedure a third
time.)

1 75
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Reprogramming a Single Audi Accessories Notes

HomeLink® Universal Transmit­ Accessories for the Audi Homelink® Uni­ This device complies with FCC rules
ter Channel versal Transmitter are available through vari­ part 15. Operation is subject to following
If a Homelink® channel has been pro­ ous sources. conditions:
grammed to activate a device, and it has If you would like additional information on 1 This device may not cause any harmful
Homelink® . where to purchase the
-

been decided to program another device us­ interference and

ing the same Homelink® channel, follow Homelink® compatible products, or would 2 - This device must accept any interfer­
these steps: like to purchase the Homelink® Home ence that may be received including in­
Press and hold the desired Homelink® Lighting Package, please call toll-free: terference that may cause undesired
button for approximately 20 seconds. 1 -800-355-3515. operation.
Do not release until step 3 has been
completed.
2 - When the indicator light begins to flash � WARNING
slowly, position the hand-held transmit­ The transmitter has been tested
ter approximately 2 inches away from and complies with FCC and DOC/
the Homelink® surface. Press and MDC rules. Changes or modifica­
hold the hand-held transmitter button. tions not expressly approved by
3 - The indicator light will flash, first slowly, the party responsible for com­
and then rapidly. When the indicator pliance could void the user's au­
light begins to flash rapidly, release
both the button and channel.
thority to operate the device.
The previous device has now been erased DOC: ISTC 1 763 102 264
and the new device has been programmed
into Homelink® . This procedure will not af­ Prince MODEUFCC ID: CB2 V94800
fect any other programmed Homelink®
channels.

1 76
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Sun visors Sun shade*

There is also a small folding sun visor lo­

cated between the sun visors for the driver
and front passenger. You can use this sun vi­
sor to cover the space about the rear-view
mirror.

I e4s-2e1 1 ·---� --�

You can lift the visors out of the center For protection against direct sunlight, al­
mounting {arrow 1 in illustration) and move ways use the sun shade whenever you
them toward the door windows to protect must park your vehicle exposed to the sun.
against side glare.
Rear doors•
A vanity mirror is located on the back of the
sun visors. The sun shade can be used to cut glare
through the rear passengers' windows.
The light for the mirror {which is located in
the roof) switches on automatically when Pull out the shade and engage it in the hooks
the mirror cover is slid open (arrow 2) and on the upper part of the door frame.
switches itself off when the cover is closed.
The light also switches itself off when the
sun visor is pushed back up.

1 77
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT ------

Glove compartment

1ft WARNING
To reduce the risk of personal in­
jury in an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the glove compart­
ment closed while driving.

B4B-388

Rear window Your Audi has a lockable glove compart­

ment. Only the master keys or emergency
Pull out the sun shade and engage it in the key will lock or unlock the glove compart­
retainers (arrows) located on the upper part ment. To open the lockable glove compart­
of the rear window frame. ment, pull the handle in direction of arrow.
The light will come on when the parking I
headlights are switched on and the glove
compartment is open.
To close, press glove compartment upward
until lock engages.

1 78
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Coat hooks

� WARNING
• The coat hooks muet only be
used for light weight clothing. Do
not leave any heavy or sharp edged
objects in the pockets which may
interfere with the side airbag de­
ployment and can cause personal
injury in an accident.
Always heed all WARNINGS in
chapter .,AIRBAG SYSTEM".
• Do not hang heavy objects on

A fold-out coat hook is located above each

the coat hooks, as they could
rear door.
cause personal injury in a sudden
stop.
To release the coat hook, press the top part • Hang clothes in such a way that
of the hook (arrow). they do not impair the driver's vi­
sion.

1 79
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Ashtray

� WAR N I N G
Using ashtrays as waste paper re­
ceptacles is a fire hazard.
\ITillii--llll\liiW! �·· I

��� /
�- � ��··,., !
�-

Front ashtray Rear ashtrays

To open ashtray To open ashtray
Press against face plate briefly. Press the edge of the ashtray lid.
To empty ashtray To empty ashtray
Open the ashtray. Press the switch in direc­ With the lid open, press the front side of the
tion indicated by the arrow to remove the ashtray down (arrow) and lift the ashtray
ashtray. out.
To reinstall ashtray To reinstall ashtray
Insert the ashtray and press into housing. Insert the ashtray and press downwards
into its housing as far as it will go.

1 80
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Cigarette lighter I Socket

Push the knob in. When the cigarette Electrical socket in the luggage
lighter is ready for use, the knob will pop � WARNING compartment
out again. The cigarette lighters and sockets
The socket for the cigarette lighter can be
The electrical socket in the luggage
used for 1 2 volt appliances with maximum
remain functional even after the compartment is located on the left side in
consumption of up to 1 00 watts, such as a
ignition key is removed. the trim panel.
hand spot light, small vacuum cleaner, etc.
Therefore. to avoid injury. never To fold the cover down, lightly press the
leave children inside the vehicle cover.
without supervision.
Remember, you can discharge the battery if
the engine is not running and power is used
to run an appliance connected to the socket.
For more information, see "Additional
accessories, Modifications and Parts re­
placement," page 262.
Only use plugs that fit properly, to avoid
damaging the socket.
181
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Storage compartments
Cup holder
l
� WARNING
• Navar carry any beverage con­
tainers with hot liquids, such as
hot coffee or hot tea, in the vehicle
while it is moving. In case of an ac­
cident, sudden braking or other ve­
hicle movement, hot liquid could
spill, causing scalding burns.
Spilled hot liquid can also cause an
accident and personal injury.
o Use only soft cups in the cup Center console Rear seat
holder. Hard cups and glasses can
cause injury in an accident. There is a cup holder on the right side of There are two cup holders in the front
the center console. side of the rear seat.
Press the catch (arrow) to open the lid. To open, press the catch (arrows).
There is also a compartment and a cup
holder1 I next to the hand brake in the cen-
ter console.

1 I Not available on vehicles with Audi Naviga­

tion System.

1 82
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

B4B-730

Child seat bench* Owner's literature storage Compartments in the door trims
On both the left and right sides of the child There's a special slot provided where you There are storage compartments in the
seat bench, there are trays (partially remov­ can store your Owner's Manual - see il­ door trims.
able). on which you can place beverages or lustration. The front of the compartment can be tilted
food. open for extra storage space (see illustra­
tion).

1 83
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Luggage compartment CD changer•

The side compartments can be used for The CD changer for the Sound System is lo­
storing equipment such as a tow rope, cated in a compartment of the left side.
jumper cables, etc. See the separate booklet for instructions on
To open, press the handle down and re­ changing the COs.
move the cover.

1 84
------ CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Steering wheel with Audio controls*

To help make certain that you are not diS­ E - Station buttons (Preset) I
tracted from paying proper attention to the back
traffic conditions when you are using the ra­ •

dio, switches have been provided on the You can recall up to twelve stations one af-
steering wheel for basic audio functions for ter another in the reverse direction.
factory installed radios. The radio, cassette If no stations are assigned to the presets or
player, or CD player, can, of course, also be if they are not being received, you may only
operated without restriction on the unit it­ hear static.
self. F - Station buttons (Preset) I for�
A detailed description of the radio is pro­ ward
vided in a separate Sound System manual. You can recall up to twelve stations one af­
ter another in the forward direction.
The following functions can be operated by If no stations are assigned to the presets or
pressing the buttons on the steering wheel: C - Increase volume if they are not being received, you may only
A - Seek I Advance - Radio hear static.
Radio: seek forward - Cassette player
- Cassette player: fast forward - CD
- CD: CD track forward Depending on which unit is currently oper­
ating.
B - Seek I Rewind
- Radio: seek in reverse direction D - Reduce volume
- Cassette player: fast rewind Radio
- CD: CO-track back - Cassette player
- CD
Depending on which unit is currently oper­
ating.

1 85
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT --------­

Steering wheel with radio and

telephone equipment in the steering wheel*

If your radio or mobile telephone are factory­ B - Seek I Rewind

installed, switches for the radio and tele­ - Radio: seek in reverse direction
phone functions are provided in the steering
wheel to help you give your fullest attention - Cassette: fast rewind
to your driving responsibilities while operat­ - CD: CD track back
ing the radio or telephone system. Of
course, all the operating features of your ra­ - Autodial numbers (telephone memory):
scroll down (names in alphabetical order
A --+ Z}. Holding this button down will
dio, cassette/CO player, or telephone can
still be accessed on this equipment itself.
cause the display to scroll quickly
Detailed description of the radio and Audi through the autodial numbers.
telephone are provided in separate operat­
ing manuals. C - Radio I telephone button
Pressing this button allows you to switch
The following functions can be operated by between the radio function (R) and the tele­
pressing the button: phone function m.
A - Seek I Advance Depending on which mode is selected, the
- Radio: seek in forward direction Driver Information System (DIS) will either
display the radio data or the telephone data.
- Cassette: fast forward The telephone data will suppress the radio
- CD: CD track forward data in the DIS display whenever the tele­
phone is in use.
Autodial numbers (telephone memory):
scroll down (names in alphabetical order
Z --+ A). Holding this button down will
cause the display to scroll quickly
through the autodial numbers.

1 86
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

D - Increase volume How the telephone works The following status messages may appear
- Radio Operation of the Audi telephone is de­ in the DIS display:
- Cassette scribed in the operating manual, however - INCOMING CALL -
please note the following information: an outside call is being received.
- CD Defaults must be set once on the tele­ - PHONE IN USE -
- Hands-free operation (telephone) phone. The "Name Preference" must the telephone is currently connected to
depending on which unit is currently operat­ be to ON - refer to the Audi Cellular Phone the cellular phone sytem.
ing. Operating manual. - MEMORY EMPTY -
If the telephone is replaced, the telephone memory is empty.
E - Reduce volume book entries must be copied once from the
Radio telephone into the system. - SYSTEM BUSY -
the cellular phone system is busy.
- Cassette This operation can be performed in the "Ra­
dio" operating mode. It takes a few min­ - PHONE OFF -
- CD the telephone is turned off.
utes. If the "Telephone" mode is active,
- Hands-free operation (telephone) press the C button. NO SERVICE -
depending on which unit is currently operat­ Once you have done this, any change in the no connection to the cellular phone net­
ing. telephone book made as a result of data en­ work.
F - Telephone tered at the telephone will automatically be
updated in the system.
Press this button to:
To begin copying telephone book data into
- answer telephone calls using the spea­ the system, press buttons B and E simulta­
ker phone system, neously for at least 5 seconds.
- "send" a call, or During the transfer of data, the data set that
- finish a call that is already in progress. is currently being transferred will appear in
the DIS display.

1 87
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

• Now, simultaneously press the C and F

buttons for at least 5 seconds. The current
language setting will appear in the DIS dis­
play (for example: ENGLISH).
• Use the A and B buttons to select the lan­
guage you wish to use.
• Confirm the selection by pressing the F
button.

Changing the language setting

The default setting for displaying messages
is ENGLISH. If you want to use a different
language, proceed as follows:
• Langugage changes can only be made in
the "Radio" mode. If you are in the "Tele­
phone" mode, press the C button.

1 88
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Mobile telephones and CB radios

Mobile telephones or CB radios � WARNING Note
should not be used in the vehicle un­ Always heed the instructions of mo­
less a separate outside antenna is Using a mobile telephone or CB bile telephones and CB radios.
installed. radio inside the vehicle without
If you use a mobile telephone or CB radio in­ having a separate outside antenna
side the vehicle without an outside antenna, could be dangerous to your health � WARNING
the high frequency energy (resonance ef­ due to the high frequency energy
fect) emitted inside the vehicle can cause emitted! Always keep your attention on the
malfunctions in the vehicle's electronic sys- road and traffic!
tem.
Moreover the unit achieves maximum In addition, an outside antenna can increase
pick-up only if an outside antenna is the reception range of your equipment.
installed.

1 89
CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

earphone*

..
· . . .·
:·· ·.· ·.

·.: ·· ... . - ..: ·

The Audi is prepared for the installation of a Opening phone cover The armrest should be swivelled towards
mobile earphone 1) in the center armrest. the rear when using the phone from
Open the cover in the armrest by pressing the rear seats.
Please refer the earphone instruction manu­ the release button (B). The phone is located
al on operating the mobile phone. under the cover. To adjust, pull the armrest towards the rear
until it has reached the required position ­
Adjusting armrest Taking phone out of armrest see illustration.
The armrest can be set to a number of dif­ Press button (C) to take the phone out of its To move the armrest back into its original
ferent positions for greater comfort and to holder. position, press the button in the front of the
facilitate using the phone from the front or armrest (arrow A - left illustration) and push
rear seats. the armrest forwards as far as it will go.
To adjust, press button (A) i n the front of the
armrest and pull the armrest all the way
down. Then lift the armrest gradually until it
engages in the required position.
1 I The telephone in your vehicle may be differ­
ent from the type shown in the above illustra­
tions.

1 90
------- CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT

Roof rack
If a roof rack or similar luggage carrying Note
equipment is to be installed, please note the • Any damage to the vehicle caused
following; by using roof racks or other types of
• The vehicle is equipped with integrated cross bars that have not been ap­
roof railings, which can be covered into a proved by Audi for your vehicle or
roof rack by installing cross bars. Only install incorrect roof rack installation is
cross bars specifically designed for this ve­ not covered by the Warranty.
hicle.
• These bars are the basis for a complete
roof rack system. Additional attachments � WARNING
are necessary to safely transport luggage, • Use of an unapproved roof rack
bicycles, surf boards, s.k is or boats. or incorrect mounting of an ap­
• All necessary hardware for these sys­ proved roof rack can cause the Installing a roof rack
tems is available from your authorized Audi roof rack or the items carried on it
Dealer. to fall off the roof onto the road. The cross bars must be installed ex­
• Objects falling from the roof of actly according to the instructions
a vehicle can cause an accident provided.
and personal injury. • The front and rear cross bars must be
• Only mount the system between mounted between the punched markings
the markings shown in the illustra­ on the inside of the roof railings (see illustra­
tion. tion).
• The roof rack system must be • Always distribute the loads evenly.
installed exactly according to the
instructions provided.

1 91
 CONTROLS AND EQUIPMENT -------

Loading a roof rack When to remove the roof rack

� WAR N I N G
Always distribute the loads evenly. If you have installed a roof rack on your ve­
The total maximum permissible load • Improper use of a roof rack can hicle, it is best to ask the car wash operator
carrying capacity of 200 lbs ( 1 00 kg) cause accidents and personal inju­ if it should be removed before going
for the roof rack installation (includ­ ries. through an automatic car wash.
ing weight the roof rack system) • The use of a roof rack can nega­ When not in use, remove the roof rack to re­
must not be exceeded - see tively affect the way a vehicle han­ duce wind noise, improve handling, fuel
page 290 for details. dles. consumption and guard against theft.
• Cargo that is large. heavy,
bulky, long or flat will have a
greater negative influence on the
vehicle's aerodynamics. center of
gravity and overall handling.
• Never exceed the maximum per­
missible load carrying capacity of
the roof of your vehicle.
• Always drive slowly, avoid sud­
den braking and maneuvers when
transporting cargo on the roof of
your vehicle.

1 92
 VEHICLE OPERATION
The first 1 ,000 miles ( 1 500 km) ­
and afterwards
Break-in period During and after break-in
� WAR N I N G period
During the first few hours of driving, the en­
gine's internal friction is higher than later • New tires tend to be slippery • Do not rev the engine up to high speeds
when all the moving parts have been broken and must also be "broken-ln." Be when it is cold. This applies whether the
in. How well this break-in process is done sure to remember this during the transmission is in N (Neutral) or in gear.
depends to a considerable extent on the first 300 miles (500 kilometres). dib Do not drive with unnecessarily
way the vehicle is driven during the first Brake gently. Avoid following C!1'5 high engine speeds - upshifting
1 ,000 miles (1 500 kilometres"). closely behind other vehicles or early saves fuel, reduces noise and
For the first 600 miles other situations that might require protects the environmeht - see also
(1 000 kilometres):
sudden, hard braking. page 195.
• New brake pads don't have the
As a rule of thumb: best stopping power and must be After the break-in period
• Do not use full throttle. ..broken-in" during the initial 100 Do not exceed maximum engine
3
• Do not drive faster than /4 of top
to 150 miles (150 to 200 kilo­ speed under any circumstances. Up­
speed shown on the speedometer. can metres) of normal city driving. You shift into the next higher gear before reach­
• Avoid high engine speeds.
compensate for this by press­ ing the red area at the end of the tachome­
ing the brake pedal more firmly. ter scale - see page 1 1 7.
• If possible, avoid towing a trailer. This also applies later when new Excessive engine speeds are automatically
pads are installed. reduced.

From 600 to 1,000 miles

(1 000 to 1 500 kilometres):
Speeds can gradually be increased to maxi­
mum permissible road or engine speed.

1 93
VEHICLE OPERATION -------

Operate your vehicle safely

The condition of the vehicle is es­ Therefore, for your own safety: • The seating position is very im­
sential for driving safety. • Wear your safety belts and wear portant for the airbag performance
Therefore, always be sure to observe the them properly, even if you're just - see page 29.
following points before you drive off: driving in the city or to the corner • Always adjust the head restraints
• Check lights and turn signals. store - see page 14. to the correct height.
• Check fuel level. • Make sure that all passengers are For maximum protection, the upper edge of
• Adjust the mirrors.
wearing their safety belts properly, the head restraints should be at least at
even those sitting in the rear - eye level, or higher.
• Make sure that all lights and all see page 14. • Always make sure that the move­
windows are clean. Passengers not wearing safety belts endan­ ment of the pedals is not restricted
• Make sure the air Intake slot be­ ger not only themselves in case of an acci­ In any way - see page 102.
tween the engine hood and the dent, but also the driver and other passen­ • Store luggage and light items
windshield is free of leaves, snow gers. properly
and ice. • Make sure that children always sit
in the luggage compartment ­
• Check warning and indicator on the rear seat properly restrained see page 88.
lights when starting the engine. by a restraint system appropriate
For driving safety, always follow the speci­ for their size and age.
of the roof -see page 1 9 1 .
fied maintenance intervals in your Mainte­ • Never transport a child in a rear­ • If you drink, do not drive.
nance booklet - especially for changing facing child or infant seat on the The use of alcohol, drugs and certain medi­
the brake fluid, see page 242. front passenger seat. cations will seriously impair perception,
Your personal driving style and your • Adjust your seat so that you can tially reactions and driving ability, and substan­
attitude affect driving safety to a easily reach all controls as far away personal increase the risk of an accident and
very great extent. from the airbag as possible but no injury.
closer than 1 0 in. (25 em) -
see page 76.

1 94
------ VEHICLE OPERATION
Operate your vehicle economically and
minimize pollution
• Do not drive if you are tired. Various factors influence fuel consumption: <£' Avoid driving at high speed.
Make frequent rest stops, at least after ev­ engine wear, brakes and tires, environmen­
ery two hours of driving. tal impact. Fuel consumption, exhaust emissions and
This chapter addresses some of these engine noise increase disproportionately at
• Always adapt vehicle speed to
points. high speeds. If you drive at approximately
traffic, weather and road condi­ Your personal sty!e of driving three quarters of top speed, fuel consump­
tions. wi II determine the economy of your vehicle, tion will be reduced by one half. Never drive
Remember that especially on smooth, slip­ as well as exhaust and noise levels. faster than the posted speed limit and
pery roads, vehicle handling and braking de­ weather conditions permitting.
pend a great deal on tire adhesion. On wet
roads, the front wheels can hydroplane es­ «i? Do not let your vehicle stand and r.:Cib Drive as smoothly as possible
pecially at higher speeds. If this happens, , warm up. W5 and keep a lookout ahead.
you will then, no longer be able to steer or When the engine is idling, it takes a very Unnecessary accelerating and braking in­
brake properly. long time to warm up. Moreover, during crease fuel consumption and disturb the en­
• Always observe the posted speed warm-up, both engine wear and exhaust vironment.
limits and use common sense. Your gas emissions are very high. Therefore, be
good judgment can mean the differ­ ready to drive off immediately after starting r.:Cib Switch off your engine if you are
ence between arriving safely at your the engine and avoid high engine speeds. W5 caught in a traffic jam. This
destination and having an accident. «i? Avoid full throttle. saves fuel and reduces emissions.
Additional information regarding safety can
be found in the individual chapters of this Accelerating gently reduces fuel consump­
manual. tion, engine wear, and does not disturb the
environment.

1 95
VEHICLE OPERATION ------

The external conditions The technical requirements t:Gh Check your tire pressure once a
in which you drive also affect your fuel con­ for optimum fuel consumption and eco­ W month.
sumption. nomy were ''built" intoyourvehicle. Special Low tire pressure increases fuel consump­
The following conditions increase fuel con­ attention was paid to the environment. To tion and tire wear, and impairs vehicle han­
sumption: retain and make use of these characteris­ dling.
tics, please note the following points:
• Heavy traffic, especially in large cities
with many traffic lights. riJ Use only unleaded gasoline. � WARNING
• Stop-and-go driving, especially short dis­
tances so that the engine never warms up Leaded gasoline causes damage to the cat­ Underinflation and overloading of
as it should. alytic converter and other components of tires can lead to tire failure. Sud­
• Driving in heavy, slow moving traffic in
the emission system. den failure on the road could cause
low gear so that the engine speed is rela­ t:Gh Have your vehicle serviced by an a serious or fatal accident. See
tively high when compared to the distance � Audi Dealar at the specified in­
tervals - see page 228 and your
page 253 for inflation informa­
driven.
Maintenance booklet.
tion.
� Plan your trips ahaad of time. Or­
Having your vehicle regularly serviced by an
� ganizs your trips to include sev­
sral errands and to avoid heavy traf­ Audi Dealer helps ensure that it runs prop­ � Do not carry unnecessary items
fic. erly and economically, that it does not dis­ in the luggage compartment.
turb the environment, and that it has a long Particularly in city traffic where you must
Of course, there are some conditions that service life.
will affect fuel consumption that you can't often accelerate, weight influences fuel
control. consumption.
For example, fuel consumption increases in
the winter or under difficult conditions (bad
roads, towing a trailer, etc.).

1 96
------ VEHICLE OPERATION

,:lib Remove
supplementary roof • Check your oil each time you fill The catalytic converter is an efficient
� rack components when not In your tank "clean-up" device built into the exhaust
use. The amount of oil used is related to engine system of the vehicle. The catalyttc convert­
At high road speeds, the increased air �e­ load and speed. er burns many of the pollutants in the ex­
sistance caused by the cross bars also In­ haust gas before they are released into the
It is normal for the oil consumption of a new atmosphere.
creases fuel consumption. engine to reach its lowest value after a cer­
tain mileage has been driven. The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is
,:lib Switch oH any electrical equip­ You must drive your vehicle about 3,000
critically important fo.r the life of
� ment when no longer needed.
miles (5 000 kilometres) before you can
the catalytic converter and proper
The more electricity you consume, the properly assess oil consumption.
functioning of the engine - see
higher the fuel consumption. page 225.
This also applies to fuel consumption and The catalytic converter will be per­
,:lib Check your vehicle's fuel co?­ engine output. manently damaged by:
'l!�Sr sumption regularly. Keep a writ­
ten record or use the trip odometer. • The published ENVIRONMENTAL • Exceeding the correct engine oil

Check your fuel consumption ea?h time you

PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA) and level - see page 236;
refuel. By doing this, you can d1scov�r a�y
Transport Canada consumption esti­ • Driving until the fuel tank be­
inconsistencies which could result 1n In­
mates may not correspond to your comes completely empty. The en­
creased fuel consumption and have these
actual consumption on the road. gine could misfire. Unburned fuel
checked before other problems appear.
which will vary depending upon ve­ could also get into the exhaust sys­
hicle load and speed. road and tem and this could cause the catalyt­
weather conditions. trip length. etc. ic converter to overheat;

197
VEHICLE OPERATION ------

• Turning off the ignition while the Cl Do not alter or remove any com­
vehicle is moving -sea page 1 1 5 -or ponent of the Emission Control Sys­ � WARNING
• Other unusual operating condi­
ta.m unless approved by the • Parking
tions. manufacturer. Do not park or operate the vehicle
• Do not alter or remove any device,
Do not continue to operate your ve­
hicle under these conditions, as such as heat shields, switches, igni­ temareas
in
may
where the hot exhaust sys­
coma in contact with dry
otherwise fuel can reach the catalyt­ tion wires, valves, which are de­ grass, brush, fuel spill or other ma­
signed to protect your vehicle's terial which can
ic converter. This could result in
overheating of the converter, requir­ Emission Control System and other • Undercoating causa a fire.
ing its replacement. important vehicle components. Do not apply additional undercoat­
To assure eHiciant operation of the Nota ing or rustproofing on or near the
Emission Control System: Do not leave engine idling unat­ exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes,
• Have your vehicle maintained tended after starting. If warning catalytic converter or heat shields.
properly and in accordance with the lights should come on to indicate During driving, the substance
service recommendations in your improper operation, they would go used for undercoating could over­
Maintenance booklet. unheeded. Extended idling also pro­ heat and causa a fire.
Lack of proper maintenance as well duces heat, which could result in
as improper usa of the vehicle will overheating or other damage to the
impair the function of the emission vehicle or other property.
control system and could lead to
damage.

1 98
------- VEHICLE OPERATION

Driving on rough roads or rugged terrain

For off road use, your Audi allroad is • Make sure that you adjust the ride height • Check your brakes after traveling off-road
equipped with a 4-level air suspension ride­ just before you travel on any rough sections especially after driving through water.
height adjustment system, in addition to all of terrain. • If need be, clean the underbody, suspen­
wheel drive. • Always adjust the vehicle's speed sion parts, etc. (for example, in an under­
Your vehicle's ground clearance (ride height)
can be adjusted to changing terrain condi­
to the trail and terrain conditions. body wash).
tions with the push of a button. • Stow any luggage or other items in the
luggage compartment and make certain
At the highest level setting (maximum clear­ that they are properly secured so that they Some driving tips
ing level), ground clearance is 8.2 inches do not shift. Unpaved roads and off-road
(20.8 em).
• Never travel on any roads, trails or terrain • Drive slowly on unfamiliar roads and ter­
on which motor vehicle travel is prohibited. rain, and stay alert for unexpected hazards
Some general tips r.:Cib Always protect the environ­ (for example, potholes, rocks and stumps).
Navar drive on terrain that is too de­ W ment. Respect our natural su� • To avoid hanging up the vehicle and dam­
manding for the design of your ve­ roundings. aging the undercarriage on extremely un­
hicle or for your driving abilities. • After traveling off-road, remember to re­ even terrain, drive over large humps with
Navar t�;�ke any unnecessary move any branches or other foreign objects the hump in the center of the vehicle.
chances! caught in the grille, underbody or wheels. In Instead, always drive over the hump with
particular, look for foreign objects (stones) the vehicle wheels on one side of the ve­
• Before you take your vehicle off-road, hicle positioned over the crown of the
make certain that you know how to operate caught in the tire treads.
Check the vehicle for possible damage. hump.
the ride height adjustment system - see pa­
ge 1 53. • Clean dirty windows, headlight and tail­
light lenses and license plates.

1 99
VEHICLE OPERATION

Driving on slopes Driving through water Sand, quicksand and similar unsta­
• If you find that you cannot climb a grade, • Always make certain that the ride level ble soils
nevertry to turn. Back down the hill in re­ system is in the highest level before cross­ Cross sandy or other unstable terrain briskly
verse gear. If you don't. the vehicle may ing streams and similar water obstacles. and, if possible, do not stop.
tip or roll over! • You should always determine how deep
• To reduce the danger of rolling the ve­ the water is before you drive through it.
hicle, drive the vehicle as close as possible • When crossing through water, travel only
to the "fall line" (direction of maximum at a walking speed. If possible, do not
slope) - not at an angle to the fall line. stop and do not shut off the engine.
If it feels like the vehicle is about to • Avoid driving through salt water
roll over when you are traveling at (beaches, for example).
an angle to the fall line, turn into the After you have traveled through wa­
fall line immediately. ter, mud or slush, your brakes may
• Never park your vehicle on extreme
uphill or downhill slopes.
be slow to respond due to wet brake
rotors and pads. To get back the full
braking effectiveness, apply the
Deep snow brakes cautiously to dry them out­
The brakes must be dry before you
• You should promptly install wheels can get full brake performance.
equipped with winter or all-season tires
when you expect winter road conditions -
see page 260.
• Install snow chains before attempting to
drive through deep, unplowed snow - see
page 261 .

200
 VEHICLE OPERATION

Braking
General notes The effectiveness of the brakes can be re­ Brake booster
• The brakes on today's automobiles are duced when the vehicle is driven on a salt­
still subject to wear, depending largely on covered road and the brakes are not used. � WARNING
operating conditions and driving habits. On Clean off accumulated salt coating from
brake discs and pads with a few cautious • The brake booster works with
vehicles which are driven mostly in stop­ brake applications. vacuum pressure which is created
and-go city traffic or which are driven hard, only when the engine is running.
the brake pads should be checked by your Never let the vehicle roll to a stop
authorized Audi Dealer more often than � WARNING with the angina shut off.
specified in the Maintenance booklet.
• If the brake booster is not work­
• On steep slopes, you should use the • If you damage the front spoiler,
braking effect of the engine. This way, you or if you install a different spoiler, ing, for example when towing your
prevent unnecessary wear to the brake sys­ be sure the air flow to the front vehicle, or because the brake boo­
tem. If you must use your brakes, do not brakes is not obstructed, other­ ster has somehow been damaged,
hold the brakes down continuously. Pump wise the brake system could over­ the brake pedal must be pressed
the brakes at intervals. heat reducing the effectiveness of harder to make up for the lack of
the entire brake aystem. booster assistance.
• Under certain conditions, for example,
when driving through water or very heavy • Failure of one brake circuit will
rain, or even after washing your vehicle, the impair the braking capability re­
braking effect can be reduced due to the sulting in an increased stopping
wet brake pads or pads which are iced-up in distance.
the winter. A few cautious brake applica­ Avoid driving the vehicle and have
tions should dry off the brake pads or re­ it towed to the nearest authorized
move ice coatings. Audi Dealer or qualified work­
shop.

201
VEHICLE OPERATION ------

Functioning of Anti-Lock Brake How the ABS system works Enhanced ABS function {Offroad­
System (ABS) An automatic check is made when a speed Mode)
The ABS contributes effectively to vehicle of about 4 mph (6 km/h) is reached. To improve braking on loose terrain (for ex­
control since it prevents the wheels from When this happens a pumping noise can be ample: gravel, scree, mud, slush, snow),
locking when the brakes are applied. This heard. turn off the ESP (see page 205), which will
means that the vehicle remains steerable If an individual wheel begins to rotate too switch the ABS to a special mode designed
and is less likely to skid. slowly in relation to vehicle speed and tends for off-road requirements.
Nota to lock, the ABS automatically reduces In this mode, the ABS control system is
brake pressure to prevent that wheel from changed to allow a "wedge" of loose rock
You don't have to "pump" the brake. locking. or soil to form in the front of the wheels.
Just hold the brake pedal down. This automatic adjustment process This improves braking performance.
However, do not expect that the ABS short­ will cause a slight vibration of the The ESP indicator light in the instrument
ens braking distance under all circum­ brake pedal and soma noises to alert cluster will come on when you have
stances. When driving on gravel or on newly you that vehicle speed must be switched to this special ABS mode (see
fallen snow on top of icy surfaces, braking adapted to existing road and traffic page 124).
distance may be even longer, therefore, un­ conditions.
der these circumstances, it is especially im­ This special ABS modewill remain active up
portant that you drive slowly and with great to about 40 mph (60 km/h). ABS operation
care. is not affected at speeds over 40 mph
(60 km/h).
To turn his special ABS mode off, press the
ESP button (To activate ESP, see page 1 52).
The ABS off-road mode will also be deacti­
vated when vou turn off the engine.

202
 VEHICLE OPERATION

Conditions affecting � WARNING continued

� WARNING braking efficiency
Although the ABS is very effec­ Moisture or road salt • Driving for an extended period
tive, always remember that brak­ of time on salt-covered roads with­
ing capability is limited by tire � WARNING out using your brakes can also af­
traction. fect braking efficiency. Clean off
Always adjust your driving speed • Under certain climatic and oper­ accumulated salt coating from
according to the road and traffic ating conditions such as passing brake discs and pads with a few
conditions. Do not let the extra through water, driving in heavy cautious brake applications.
safety afforded by the ABS tempt rain or after washing the vehicle,
you into taking extra risks. The the effectiveness of the brakes
ABS cannot overcome the laws of can be reduced. In winter, ice can Overheating the brakes
physics. accumulate on the brake pads, lin­
ings, discs and drums. Cautiously � WARNING
If ABS is not functioning properly, a warning apply brakes for a test. Brakes will • Do not "ride the brakes" by rest­
light will come on. See page 125 for addi­ dry and ice coatings will be ing your foot on the pedal when
tional details. cleaned off after a few cautious you do not intend to brake. This
brake applications. may cause the brakes to overheat,
premature wear and Increased
stopping distance.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

203
VEHICLE OPERATION -------

Electronic differential lock (EDL)

'4 WARNING continued The EDL operates in conjunction with the • When accelerating on slippery surfaces,
ABS. The EDL acts automatically, i.e. with­ such as on ice or snow, always be careful
• Before descending a steep out the driver's intervention. when depressing the accelerator pedal.
grade, reduce speed and shift With the aid of the ABS sensors, this sy­ Even with the EDL working, the drive
transmission into a lower gear or stem monitors the speed of the driven wheels can spin and reduce your ability to
lower driving position. Do not ride wheels up to about 50 mph, 80 km/h. control your car.
the brakes or hold the pedal down Within the speed range at which this sy­ • To prevent the disc brake of the braked
too long or too often. This could stem operates, if the wheels spin (e.g. on wheel from overheating, if subjected to ex­
cause the brakes to get hot and di­ slippery surfaces) they are braked in a con­ cessive loads the EDL cuts out temporarily.
minish braking efficiency. trolled manner, and more of the engine's The vehicle remains operational and be­
• If you damage the front spoiler, power is directed to whichever wheels haves in the same way as a vehicle without
or if you install a different spoiler, achieve greater traction. EDL
be sure the air flow to the front Please note: If a fault occurs in the ABS the EDL is also
brakes is not obstructed. Other­ • When driving off, always be sure to keep not functioning. This is indicated by the ABS
wise the brake system could over­ road conditions in mind as you accelerate.
warning light - see page 125.
heat reducing the effectiveness of If a drive wheel spins because it's on a slip­
the entire brake system. perier surface, gradually increase the pres­
• Failure of one brake circuit will sure on the accelerator pedal until the car
ftl WARNING
impair the braking capability re­ starts to move. The increased safety afforded by
sulting in an increased stopping EDL does not mean that you can
distance. take safety risks. Always adapt
Avoid driving the vehicle and have your driving style to the road con­
it towed to the nearest Audi Dealer ditions and traffic situation.
or qualified workshop.

204
 VEHICLE OPERATION

Electronic Stability Program (ESP)

The Electronic Stability Program helps to - when driving in deep snow or on a loose
control the vehicle in critical maneuvers like surface
curves.
- when trying to "rock" out the vehicle
When the vehicle starts up and accelerates, when it has become stuck.
the wheels are prevented from spinning by
adjusting the engine power to conform to all After this, you should switch the system
road conditions. This improves vehicle sta­ back on.
bility. The ABS and EDS are still functioning even
The system operates across the entire if the ESP is switched off.
speed range in combination with the ABS
system. If the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) malfunctions, the ESP will also shut
down.
When you turn on the engine, the ESP will The system can be activated or deactivated
automatically be activated and will perform by pressing the button.
a self-test. The warning light comes on when the sys­
tem is switched off. See page 124.
If you deactivate the ESP, a special ABS
mode designed mainly for all-road condi­
tions will be activated - see page 202.
It may be advantageous to turn off the sys­
tem in certain special cases when wheel
slippage is desired such as:
- when driving on difficult terrain

205
VEHICLE OPERATION ------

Operation The vehicle is then stabilized by the forces

m WARN I N G
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) and the a?tin� on the wheel during braking. If the ve­
Electronic Differential Lock (EDU are inte­ hicle IS oversteering (rear tends to skid out
of the turn), the brakes are mainly applied on !he Electronic Stability Program
grated in the Electronic Stability Program. In •• nevertheless subject to the laws
_
addrtron to the data provided by these func­ the wheel that is on the outside ofthe curve.
_
tions, the ESP control unit requires addition­ In the case of a vehicle that is understeering of physics. It is particularly impor­
al measurement data provided by high-per­ (tendency to slide out of the curve). the tant to pay attention to this fact on
forman ?e sensors. The rotational speed of brakes are applied at the rear wheel that is wet and slippery roads.
the veh1cle about its vertical axis, vehicle lat­ on the inside of the curve. An audible signal It is therefore important that you
eral acceleration, brake pressure and the �rll accompany the brake application func­ always adapt your driving to the
steering angle are measured. tion. condition of the road and traffic
All �SP sensors a�e monitored continuously
conditions. Do not allow the in­
The direction in which the driverwishes to
wh1le the vehicle IS being driven. However,
creased safety provided by the
travel is determined with the aid of the
when the vehicle is driven at low speed on
Electronic Stability Program sys­
stee�ing angle and the vehicle speed and is tem to lull you into accepting addi­
contmually compared with the actual be­ extremely rugged terrain, it is not always tional safety risks.
havior of the vehicle. possrble to monrtor the ESP sensors contin­
uously. Thus, in rare and exceptional cases
If the data do not match -for example when the ESP itself can deactivate (ESP and AB S
a vehrcle is beginning to spin out of control indicator lights will be lit continuously).
-the ESP applies the brakes to the appropri­
ate wheels for the given situation and, if In this case. the ride level adjustment sys­
necessary, changes the vehicle traction tem lowers the vehicle to the normal level
forces so as to reduce the slipping of individ­ If this happens, you may need to select th �
ual wheels (ASR anti-slip regulation). ride level again (see page 1 53).
Operation of the ESP and ABS is restored
whenever you restart the engine.

206
 VEHICLE OPERATION

Driving with your quattro®

The All Wheel Drive system has no operat­
ftl WARNING continued Using winter tires
ing controls that require attention. When driving in the winter, your vehicle
The engine power is distributed automati­ On wet road surfaces, be careful with All Wheel Drive has an advantage,
cally to all four wheels for optimum effi­ not to drive too fast because the even with regular tires.
ciency in all situations and road conditions. front wheels could begin to slide You should promptly install wheels
The All Wheel Drive concept is perfectly on top of the water (hydroplaning). equipped with winter or all-season tires to
matched to the engine power of your If this should occur, you will have better handling and braking characteristics.
Audi allroad. This combination gives the ve­ no warning from a sudden in­ See also "Winter tires ", page 260.
hicle exceptional handling and performance crease in engine speed as with a
capabilities, both on normal roads and in ex­ front-wheel drive vehicle. Always
treme conditions of ice and snow. drive at speeds which are suitable
However, it is vital to observe the following to the road conditions.
safety notes:
Replacing wheels I tires
� WARNING All four wheels must always have the same
rolling radius. Different tires on the front and
Always adjust your driving to road rear wheels may impair vehicle control and
and traffic conditions. Do not let will damage the All Wheel Drive because of
the extra safety afforded by All the constantly different wheel speeds. The
Wheel Drive tempt you into taking proper function of the system is not af­
extra risks. fected by unevenly worn tires.
Although the All Wheel Drive is For more information, see page 255.
very effective, always remember
that braking capacity is limited by
tire traction. You should therefore
not drive at excessive speeds on
icy or slippery road surfaces.

207
VEHICLE OPERATION --
---

Trailer towing
Your Audi was designed primarily for pas­ Technical requirements When you are not towing a trailer, remove
senger transportation. The additional load the trailer hitch ball mount. This prevents
will affect durability, economy and perfor­ Trailer hitch the hitch from causing damage should your
mance. Use a weight-carrying hitch conforming to vehicle be struck from behind.
Trailer towing not only places more stress the gross trailer weight. The hitch must be
on the vehicle, it also calls for more con­ suitable for your vehicle and trailer and
centration from the driver. securely bolted to appropriate place on the � WARNING
vehicle's chassis. Use only a trailer hitch
For this reasons, always follow the opera­ with removable ball mount. Always check When you are no longer towing a
ting and driving instructions given and use with the trailer hitch manufacturer to make trailer, remove the entire trailer
common sense. sure that you are using the correct hitch. hitch. When doing so, seal all bolt
Do not use a bumper hitch. holes to prevent water and deadly
The hitch must be installed in such a way exhaust fumes from entering the
that it does not interfere with the impact-ab­ vehicle.
sorbing bumper system. No modifications
should be made to the vehicle exhaust and
brake systems. From time to time, check Engine cooling system
that all hitch mounting bolts remain secure­ Towing a trailer make the engine work hard­
ly fastened. er. It is important that the engine cooling
system be up to the job. Make sure that the
cooling system has enough fluid.

208
 VEHICLE OPERATION

Trailer brakes Mirrors Lights

If your trailer is equipped with a bra king sys­ If you are unable to see the traffic behind The headlight settings should be checked
tem, check to be sure that it conforms to all you using the regular outside mirrors, then with the trailer attached before driving off.
regulations. you must install extended mirrors. It's im­ Adjust as necessary so that you can see the
The trailer brake system must not be direct­ portant that you always have clear vision to road ahead but not blind on-coming traffic.
ly connected to the vehicle's brake system. the rear. Check proper working of vehicle and trailer
lights.
Safety chains Operating instructions
Always use safety chains between your ve­ Maximum trailer weight Safety chains
hicle and trailer. A trailer for your vehicle is limited to a typical Be sure trailer safety chains are properly
class 1 or class 2 trailer. connected from the trailer to the hitch on
the vehicle. Leave enough slack in the
Trailer lights Never allow a passenger to ride in a chains to permit turning corners. When you
Trailer lights must meet all regulations. Do trailer. install safety chains, make sure they will not
not connect the trailer light system directly drag on the road when you are driving.
to the light system of your vehicle. Be sure � WARNING The chains should cross under the trailer
to check with your Audi Dealer for correct tongue to prevent it from dropping in case
wiring, switches and relays. Anyone not properly restrained in of separation from the hitch.
a moving vehicle is at much great­
er risk in an accident.
Never let anyone ride without the
restraints provided by Audi.

209
VEHICLE OPERATION -------

Be especially careful when passing other • The coolant temperatura gauge

must be observed carefully. H the
Driving Instructions
To obtain the best possible handling of ve­ vehicles.
Reduce vehicle speed immediately if the needle nears the upper end of the
hicle and trailer, please note the following:
trailer shows the slightest sign of swaying. scale, reduce speed immediately
• A "balanced" rig is easier to operate and and/or switch off the air condi­
Do not try to stop the swaying by accelerat­
control. This means that the tow vehicle ing. tioner.
should be loaded to the extent possible and If the coolant temperature warning
permissible while keeping the trailer as light Observe speed limits. In some areas
speeds for vehicles towing trailers are low­ light in the instrument cluster starts
as possible under the circumstances. flashing in red, pull off the road,
Whenever possible, transfer some cargo to er than for regular vehicles.
stop and let the engine idle for about
the luggage compartment of the tow ve­ • Always apply brakes early.
2 minutes to prevent a heat build-up.
hicle while observing tongue load require­ When driving downhill, shift into lower gear
ments and vehicle loading considerations. to use the engine braking effect to slow
• The higher the speed, the more difficult down the vehicle. Use of the brakes alone
it becomes for the driver to control the rig. can cause them to overheat and fail.
Do not drive at the maximum per­
missible speed. Reduce your speed even
more under unfavorable load, weather or
wind conditions - particularly when going
downhill.

210
------- VEHICLE OPERATION

Trailer towing tips When passing, remember that you cannot If you move the selector lever of the auto­
accelerate as fast as you normally would be­ matic transmission to "P" before applying
Your vehicle handles differently when tow­
cause of the added load . Make sure you the parking brake and before blocking the
ing a trailer because of the additional weight
have enough room to pass. After passing, wheels, you may require more force later to
and weight distribution. Safety, perfor­
allow plenty of room for your trailer before move the lever out of the "P" position.
mance and economy will greatly depend on
changing lanes again. When restarting after parking on a slope, re­
how carefully you load your trailer and oper­
ate your rig. Avoid jerky starts, sharp turns or rapid lane verse the procedure:
changes. • Start the engine.
Before you actually tow your trailer, practice
turning, stopping and backing up in an area After parking, always block the wheels of
• Shift transmission into gear.
away from traffic until you learn the feel of both vehicle and trailer. Do not park with a
trailer on a slope. If it cannot be avoided, do o Release the parking brake and slowly
your vehicle and trailer unit.
so only after doing the following: move away from the wheel blocks.
Backing up is difficult and requires practice.
Steering while backing up is generally oppo­ • Apply foot brake. • Stop and have someone retrieve the
site of that when backing your vehicle with­ wheel blocks.
• Have someone place chocks under both
out a trailer. vehicle and trailer wheels.
Maintain a greater distance between your Notes
• With chocks in place, slowly release
vehicle and the one in front of you. You will brakes until wheel blocks absorb the load. • Do not tow a trailer during the
need more room to stop. break-in period of your vehicle.
• Turn wheels to curb.
To compensate for the trailer, you will need • If you tow a trailer, your Audi may require
a larger than normal turning radius. o Apply parking brake. more frequent maintenance due to the ex­
• Place automatic transmission in " P". tra load - see also page 228.

21 1
VEHICLE CARE -------

Cleaning and protection

Any automobile is subjected to abuse from r.Gb Select only environmentally Care of exterior
industrial fumes, corrosive road salt, aban­ � friendly cleaning products. Any
doned lollipops, muddy dog feet, etc. A well remaining cleaning products do not Important
cared-for Audi can look like new many years belong in the household waste. Never use polishes or hard waxes on
after purchase. Regular and correct care will
matte-painted parts or plastic parts,
contribute to maintaining the beauty and
since this can permanently damage
value of your Audi. � WARNING the visual appearance of the sur­
Furthermore. good care may be a faces of these parts.
• Cleaning agents may be poison­
condition for upholding a warranty In particular, make certain that the roof,
ous. Keep them out of the reach of
claim should corrosion damage or bumper, trim moldings, rocker panel mol­
children.
paint defects occur. ding and wheel house liners do not come
in contact with cleaners I polishes or hard
• Observe all caution labels.
Your Audi Dealer has a variety of vehicle­
care products and can advise you which • Always read directions on the
waxes.
ones to use for cleaning the exterior and in­ container before using any prod­
terior of your vehicle. uct. Follow these directions care­
fully.
Whether you use products recommended
by Audi or other commercially available • Most chemical cleaners are con­
cleaning agents, please make very sure you centrates which require dilution.
apply them correctly. • Only use spot removing fluids in
well ventilated areas.
• Do not use gasoline. kerosene.
Diesel fuel. nail polish remover or
other volatile fluids. They may be
toxic, flammable or hazardous in
other ways.

212
 VEHICLE CARE

Washing Automatic car wash Washing the vehicle by hand

The best protection against environmental The vehicle paint is so durable that the ve­ � In the intsi'Sst of the environ­
influences is frequent washing and waxing. hicle can normally be washed without prob­ � msnt, the vehicle should only be
lems in an automatic car wash. However, washed in special wash bays.
How often this is required depends on how
the effect on the paint depends to a large First soften the dirt with plenty of water and
much the vehicle is used, where it is parked
extent on the design of the facility, the filter­ rinse off as well as possible.
(garage, in the open under trees, etc.), the
ing of the wash water, the type of wash and
seasonal and weather conditions as well as Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge,
care material, etc. If the paint has a dull ap­
environmental influences. The longer bird glove or brush starting on the roof and work­
pearance after going through the car wash
droppings, insects, tree resin, road and in­ ing down using only slight pressure. Special
or is scratched, bring this to the attention of
dustrial grime, tar, soot, road salt and other car wash soap should only be used for very
the operator immediately. If necessary use
materials remain on the vehicle paint, the persistent dirt.
a different car wash.
more lasting their destructive effect will be.
Rinse the sponge or glove thoroughly and
High temperatures, as from strong sunlight, Notes often.
intensify the corrosive effect. • Before going through a car wash, be sure Clean wheels.and sill panels last, using a dif­
Under certain circumstances, weekly to take the usual precautions such as clos­ ferent sponge if possible.
washing may be necessary. Under other ing the windows and sunroof*.
After washing the vehicle, rinse thoroughly
conditions. a monthly washing and waxing • You don't have to remove the factory­ with water and wipe it off.
may be adequate. installed radio antenna. However, if your ve­
After the winter, the underside of the ve­ hicle is equipped with the Navigation Sys­
hicle should be thoroughly washed. tem*, then you must remove the antenna.
• If you have installed additional accesso­
ries on the vehicle - such as spoilers, roof
rack, etc. - it is best to ask the car wash op­
erator if these should be removed.

213
VEHICLE CARE ------

Notes Washing your vehicle with a power Headlights

• Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun­
washer
Do not clean your headlights with a dry
light. If you use a power washer, please note the towel or sponge. They must be cleaned
following: with a moistened towel.
• If the vehicle is rinsed with a hose, do not
direct the water into the lock cylinders - • Always follow the operating instructions Never use a sponge designed for removing
otherwise they may freeze up in the winter. for the power washer - especially for pres­ dried-on insects, a kitchen scrubber or any
sure and spraying distance. other similar product since the lens surface
• Make sure that the jet on the spray hose can be damaged by scratching and scour­
� WARNING produces a "fan shape" spray. Do not use ing.
a jet which sprays the water out in a direct When using high-pressure washing equip­
• Do not wash, wax or dry the ve­
stream or one that has a rotating jet. ment or steam-cleaning units, never spray
hicle with the engine running.
• Water temperature should not exceed
the vehicle with the nozzle close the vehicle
• Do not clean the underside of surface and never aim the spray at the same
chassis, fenders, wheel covers, 140 °F (60 °C).
point for a relatively long period of time.
etc. without protecting your
hands and arms. You may cut your­
self on sharp-edged metal parts.
� WARNING Polishing
• Moisture and ice on brakes may Never wash tires with a jet that Please refer to the important information on
affect braking efficiency. Test the sprays the water out in a direct page 2 1 2.
brakes carefully after each vehicle stream. This could invisibly dam­ Polish your vehicle only if the paint has lost
wash. age and weaken the tires, even if its shine and the gloss cannot be brought
they are sprayed from a relatively back with wax. If the polish used doesn't
long distance for a vary short contain preservative compounds, the paint
amount of time. Damaged and must be waxed afterwards.
weakened tires can fail and cause Do not treat matte-pain�ed and plas­
accidents and personal injury. tic parts with polish or wax.

214
 VEHICLE CARE

Waxing Trim strips Windows

Please refer to the important information on Dirty patches and marks on the trim strips Clean all windows regularly to remove road
page 212. should be removed with a pH-balanced film and car-wash wax buildup. Use a luke­
• A good wax coating protects the vehicle
cleaning agent (do not use a chrome warm soap and water solution or an alcohol­
cleaner). Audi Dealers carry cleaning prod­ based commercial window cleaning agent.
paint to a large extent against the environ­
ucts which have been tested for use on your If a chamois is used for polishing the glass,
mental influences listed under "Washing"
vehicle and are not harmful to the environ­ it should be used exclusively for that pur­
and even against light scratches.
ment. pose.
• When water doesn't form small drops
To avoid corrosion on the exterior trim Also, be sure to clean all windows regularly
and roll off clean paint, apply a coat of good
strips, only a pH-balanced solution should on the inside.
hard wax. Even if a wax solution is used reg­
be used for the windshield washer. Use a plastic scraper to remove snow and
ularly for washing your vehicle, it is advis­
able to protect the paint with a coat of hard Touch-up paint ice from windows and mirrors. To help pre­
wax at least twice a year. vent dirt from scratching the window, al­
Your Audi Dealer has touch-up paint for mi­ ways scrape in a forward direction - push­
• To protect bright metal trim, use car wax. nor scratches and stone chips. Scratches ing the scraper away from you - never back
• Protect plastic body parts painted the should be touched up soon after they occur and forth.
same as the vehicle body with car wax. to prevent corrosion.
Note
• Do not use car wax on . . . If a spot starts to rust, however, a simple
touch-up job won't be enough. The affected To prevent damage the wires of the rear
- matte or anodized metal trim defogger, do not place any adhesive stick­
surface must be smoothed with sand paper
rubber or rubber-like trim. and covered with an anti-rust primer before ers in the inside of the rear window over the
the painted finish can be restored. wires.
The n umber for the original vehicle paint can
be found on the vehicle identification label
- see page 291 .

2 15
VEHICLE CARE --
---

Weatherstrips Bright metal trim Road salt should be removed weekly with
an acid free cleaning solution. Every three
Keep silicone sprays off the wind­ Bright or black anodized metal trim will
months (after regular cleaning) coat the
shield to avoid wiper smear in rain. come clean with regular washing. Remove
wheels with petroleum jelly or carwax. Rub
To seal properly, weatherstrips around spots or dirt from chrome and stainless
it in firmly with a soft cloth. Never use abra­
hood, rear lid, doors, etc., must be pliable. steel with a chrome cleaner. Apply a
sive or metal polishing cleaning agents.
Spray with silicone or coat with talcum pow­ chrome polish for continued luster and
der or glycerine to retain flexibility of the protection.
rubber and to protect against freezing in the Steel wheels � WARNING
w1nter.
Always include the hub caps and wheel Moisture, ice, and road salt on
Dull finishes and plastics rims when washing your vehicle to remove brakes may affect braking effi­
Plastic pa�s. such as light bulb lenses, dec­ road dirt, salt sprays and brake dust. If nec­ ciency. Test the brakes carefully
. essary, use a commercial wheel cleaner to
orative stnpes, panels, bumpers, etc., will after each washing. Always heed
come clean with regular washing. Should remove accumulated brake dust. Paint WARNING on page 203.
additional cleaning or spot removal be nec­ scratches should be touched up as soon as
essary, use a soft brush or cloth soaked with possible to prevent corrosion.
a mild detergent solution. Then rinse thor­
oughly and immediately with clear water. Light alloy wheels
Do not use anything which could
To preserve the decorative appearance of
mar the plastic or dull finished sur­
the light alloy wheels, some special care is
faces, such as wax, polish, abrasive
necessary. In addition to road dirt and salt
detergents or chemical cleaning sol­
sprays, brake dust is also corrosive. If left on
vents.
too long, brake dust can cause pitting. Wash
the wheels with a sponge or hose brush ev­
ery other week.

2 16
 VEHICLE CARE

Care of interior Plastic and vinyl Cleaning and care of leather

Use a clean, damp cloth or sponge to re­ upholstery
Glass move dust. For other soil, use a lukewarm Audi does everything possible to preserve
Use the same cleaning agents as for exteri­ all-purpose cleaning solution or a mild the special qualities of natural leather uphol­
or glass surfaces and polish dry. saddle soap for vinyl trim. Remove water stery. When treating the hides, care is taken
spots and soap traces with a clean, damp to avoid all processes which could impair
cloth or sponge. Use a clean, soft cloth to the natural advantages of the material
Fabric rub dry. which make for extra comfort.
Use a vacuum cleaner or a soft bristle brush Grease, tar or oil stains can be removed Because of the exclusive nature of the
to remove dust and loose dirt from carpet­ with a clean cloth or sponge soaked with all­ hides selected and the natural properties of
ing, upholstery, headliner and other trim. purpose cleaner or with a solvent type vinyl the leather, this kind of upholstery requires
Dirt stains can usually be removed with a cleaning agent. a certain amount of care in everyday use
lukewarm soapy water or all-purpose clean­ since the leather is sensitive to materials
Occasionally apply a colorless vinyl or leath­
er solution, or a dry foam cleaner.
er preservative to retain the material's luster such as oil, grease and dirt or wet clothing.
For greasy, oily and other stubborn stains, and pliability. If it is given regular attention, the leather up­
use a spot remover. Do not pour the liquid holstery will retain its high quality for many
on the fabric. Dampen a clean cloth and rub years.
carefully, starting at the edge and working Aluminum trim
inward. Use only neutral-pH products to remove
spots and deposits from aluminum sur­
faces. Chrome care products and alkaline
cleaners will attack aluminum surfaces and
can damage them over time.

217
VEHICLE CARE -------

Dust and small particles of dirt lodging in the More stubborn dirt can b e removed using a
pores, grain and seams can have an abra­ mild soap solution (pure liquid soap: two � WARNING
sive effect and damage the surface and the tablespoons dissolved i n 1 quart of water).
• Anything that might damage
seams. If the vehicle is left standing for a It is very important not to let the wa­
long time in the sun, cover the upholstery or ter soak through the leather or pene­ your safety balta could mean that
use the sun blinds to protect the leather trate into the seams. Then wipe off with you and your passengers would
from direct sunlight and prevent fading or a soft, dry cloth.
not be adequately protected in an
discoloration. accident.
In addition to this regular cleaning, it is
• Do not use chemical cleaning
Depending on the amount of use, clean it worthwhile treating the leather with a suit­
occasionally according to the following able leather-care product. This should be agents, bleach or dyes. They have
instructions. Never use solvents, wax done about twice a year for upholstery in corrosive properties which weak­
polish, shoe cream, spot removers normal use. Apply these products very spar­
en the webbing.
or similar materials. ingly and follow the manufacturer's direc­ • When cleaning your safety
For normal cleaning of leather-covered tions. belts, inspect them for damage. If
you discover damage. see your
steering wheels, leather seat upholstery,
etc., slightly moisten a cotton or woollen Audi Dealer.
cloth with water and wipe over the areas af­
Safety belts • Safety belt performance de­
fected. Keep belts clean! Dirty belts may pends on correct installation.
not retract properly. Never remove belts from the ve­
For cleaning, use a mild soap and water hicle to clean them.
solution. Let belts dry thoroughly and away
from direct sunlight.
Do not allow inertia reel safety belts to re­
tract before they are completely dry.

218
------- VEHICLE CARE

Engine compartment Good anti-corrosion treatment is very im­

,Al WARNING continued portant, particularly in the winter. If the ve­
� WARNING e Do not clean the underside of
hicle is frequently driven on salted roads,
the entire engine compartment and plenum
•
the chassis, fenders. wheel cov­
Before working in the engine panel should be thoroughly cleaned at the
ers. or other hard to reach parts
compartment. be sure to read the end of winter and retreated to prevent salt
without protecting your hands and
information on page 232. damage. At the same time, the underside of
arms. You may cut yourself on
I) Before reaching into the front the vehicle should be washed as well.
sharp-edged metal parts.
plenum panel. always re!"ove the
• Moisture and ice on brakes may
ignition key. Otherw1se. the
windshield wiper system could affect braking efficiency. Test the � WARNING
unintentionally be switched on. brakes carefully after each vehicle
possibly causing personal injury wash. Never touch the radiator fan. The
from the moving wiper linkage. auxiliary electric fan can switch on
suddenly and injure you-
• Do not wash. wax or dry the en� The engine compartment and transmission
gine with the engine ru !'l'!ing. Mov­ have been corrosion protected at the facto­
ing or hot parts could 1n1ure you. ry. Always switch off the ignition be­
Remove leaves from the plenum panel in fore cleaning the engine _
front of the windshield under the engine
hood. This prevents the water drain holes
from becoming blocked, and it prevents de­
bris from entering the vehicle interior
through the heating and ventilation ducts.

219
VEHICLE CARE -------

If the engine compartment is cleaned at any Chassis Body cavity sealing

time with grease removing solutions 1 ), or if The lower body shell of your Audi is also All body cavities which could be affected by
you have the engine washed, the antK:orr<r thoroughly protected against corrosion. corrosion have been given thorough protec­
sion treatment is almost always removed tion at the factory.
Any damage to the undercoating caused by
as well. It is therefore essential to ask: for a
road hazards should be repaired promptly. This sealing does not require any inspection
long-lasting corrosion protection of all sur­
faces, seams, joints and components in the or additional treatments. If any wax should
engine compartment. g WAR N I N G seep out of the cavity when the ambient

c£> If you must rinse off gasoline, oil

temperature is high, it can be removed with
a plastic scraper and a suitable solvent.
residue or grease while you are
washing your engine, then tha dirty
Do not apply additional undercoat­
ing or rustproofing on or near the c£> If you
use benzine for removing
water should be run through an oil exhaust manifold, exhaust pipes. the wax, keep sparks, flame and
separator filter. We recommend that catalytic converter or heat shields. lighted cigarattas away. Nsver
you have your engine washed at a During driving, the substance dump benzine on the ground, into
qualified workshop or service sta­ used for undercoating could over­ open streams or down sewage
tion. heat and cause a fire. drains.
Be sure to observe all safety and en­
vironmental regulations.

1 1 Use only the correct cleaning solutions.

Never use gasoline or Diesel.

220
 VEHICLE CARE

General notes Your authorized Audi Dealer stocks the

cleaning and preservation solutions recom­
• We recommend that you have the engine mended by the factory for this purpose and
compartment and the underside of your ve­ has the equipment necessary to apply
hicle inspected twice a year for any damage them. Therefore, any additional corrosion
to the protective coating, preferably before protection work should be performed by an
and after the winter season. Have neces­ .
Audi Dealer. Using incorrect cleamng solu­
sary repairs done as soon as possible. tions could damage rubber parts or painted
• Also, whenever the lower body sh�ll. surfaces.
axle, transmission or engine assemblies
have been repaired, any anti-corrosion coat­
ing lost on the affected surfaces should be � WAR N I N G
reapplied.
Use only the correct cleaning solu­
• Oil-based protective sprays must not be
tions. Never use gasoline, Diesel
applied. Only tar- or wax-based anti-corro­ fuel or solvents which could cause
sion protectors are compatible with the fac­ a fire.
tory applied corrosion protection. Bef_o re ap­
plication, road dirt, salt spray deposits and
oily substances must be removed.

221
 VEHICLE CARE --
--

Fuel tank

� WARNING
Under normal operating condi­
tions, never carry additional fuel
containers in your car. Such con­
tainers, full or empty, may leak
and could cause a fire in a colli­
sion. If you must transport fuel to
use for your lawn mower, snow
blower, etc., be very careful and al­
ways observe local and state laws
regarding the use, transportation
and storage of such fuel contain·
The fuel filler neck is located on the right When refueling, hang the fuel tank cap on ers. Make certain the container
rear side panel behind the fuel filler flap. the fuel filler flap as illustrated above. meets industry standards CANSII
The central locking system automatically ASTM F852-86).
Notes
locks and unlocks the fuel filler flap. If the
central locking system should fail, you can • Don't drive until the fuel tank is
still open the flap manually- see page 224 completely empty. Gasoline could
for further details. get in the exhaust system and dam­
age the catalytic converter.
Open the flap as illustrated above.
The capacity of the tank is:
• If any fuel has spilled onto the car,
it should be removed immediately to
approx. 1 8.5 US gallons (70 liters).
prevent damage the paintwork.

-222
 VEHICLE CARE

Refuelling the vehicle Notes

� WARNING • If you cannot fully insert the pump nozzle,
Your vehicle fuel tank has an on-board refu­
elling vapor recovery system. This feature Failure to shut the engine off while use another fuel pump or change gas sta­
helps to prevent fuel vapors from escaping refueling and I or to insert the tions.
from the tank and polluting the environment pump nozzle fully into the car's • Do not refuel your vehicle with the igni­
while you refuel your vehicle. filler neck could cause fuel over­ tion switched on. The fuel gauge may other­
In order to fill your tank properly while pro­ flow and fuel spray which can wise not indicate the exact fuel level after
tecting the environment. please follow this cause fire or serious injury. refuelling.
refueling procedure carefully:
• Turn off the engine. • Stop refueling when the fuel pump shuts
• Remove the fuel filler cap by turning it off automatically - do not add more fuel or
slowly counter clockwise allowing fuel "top off" .
pressure to dissipate. dih As soon as the correctly oper­
• Insert the fuel nozzle from the gasoline � ated nozzle switches off auto­
pump into the fuel filler neck as far as it will matically for the first time, the tank
go. is full. Do not try to add more fuel,
Select a medium refuelling rate, when filling
because fuel may spill out. In addi­
your tank.
tion, the expansion space in the fuel
tank will be filled - causing the fuel
to overflow when it becomes warm
and pollute the environment.
• After filling your tank, turn the fuel filler
cap clockwise until you hear a definite click.
To avoid fuel spilling or evaporating from the
fue I tank a Iways close fuel filler cap properly
and completely.

223
VEHICLE CARE -------

Filling a portable fuel container �� WARNING continued

in exceptional cases
• Never spill fuel inside the lug­
� WARNING gage compartment or vehicle inte­
rior. Fuel vapors are highly flam­
To reduce the risk of fire and per­ mable and can cause fire and seri­
sonal injury when filling a fuel con­ ous bums.
tainer for a lawn mower or snow
• Always observe local and state
blower, etc. please remember:
(provincaU laws regarding the use,
• Never fill a portable fuel con­
storage and transportation of such
tainer leaving It still in the luggage ·

containers.
compartment or on top of the car.
Static electricity can build up • Make certain the fuel container
while filling and can ignite fuel va­ meets industry standards (ANSI/
pors causing a fire. Always place a ASTM F852-86). Emergency unlocking of the
portable fuel container on the fuel filler flap
ground before filling. If the !?ower locking system should fail, you
can still open the flap manually:
o Open the rear lid.
• Remove cover from the right-hand trim
panel.
• To release the fuel filler fl ap pull the ac­
,

tuator in the direction of arrow (see illustra­

tion).
• Open the fuel filler flap.

224
 VEHICLE CARE

Fuel supply
..:lib Use only unleaded fuel in your Notes Octane rating
� vehicle. • Do not usa any fuel with octane Octane rating indicates a gasoline's ability
Fuel Recommendation ratings lower than 87 AKI or 91 RON to resist engine damaging "knock" caused

r-{
otherwise expansive engine damage by pre-ignition and detonation. Therefore
The fuel recommended for your ve­ �uying the correct grade of gasoline is ve
will occur.
hicle is unleaded premium grade Important to help prevent possible engine
gasoline with a minimum octane rat­ • Do not use leaded gasoline!
damage and a loss of engine performance.
ing of 91 AKP I / 95 RON or higher. The use of leaded gasoline will se­
Gasolines most commonly used in the
The recommended gasoline octane rating verely damage your vehicle's cata­
United States and Canada have the follow­
for your engine can also be found on a label lytic converter and its ability to con­
ing octane ratings that can usually be found
lo�ated on the inside of the fuel filler flap. trol exhaust emissions.
on the filler pump:
Th1s rat1ng may be specified as AKI or RON. Unleaded gasoline is available throughout
the USA, Canada, and in most European
Premium Grade: 91 - 96 AKI
Your vehicle may also be operated using un­
leaded regular gasoline with a minimum oc­ countries. We recommend that you do not Regular Grade: 87 - 90 AKI
tane rating of 87 AKI / 91 RON. However, take your vehicle to areas or countries Explanation of the abbreviations:
using 87 AKI I 91 RON octane fuel will lead where unleaded gasoline may not be avail­
to a certain loss of engine power. able. AKI = Anti Knock Index =

(R+M) I 2 = (RON+MON) I 2
RON = Research Octane Number
MON = Motor Octane Number.

1l = (R+ Ml / 2

225
VEHICLE CARE --
---

Use of gasoline containing alcohol Note Notes

or MTBE (methyl tertiary butyl Methanol fuels which do not meet • Do not use fuels that fail to meet
ether) these requirements may cause cor­ the specified criteria in this chapter.
You may use unleaded gasoline blended rosion and damage to plastic and
• If you are unable to determine
with alcohol or MTBE (commonly referred rubber components in the fuel sys-
·
whether or not a particular fuel
to as oxygenates) if the blended mixture tem.
blend meets the specifications, ask
meets the following criteria: Blend of gasoline and ethanol (grain your service station or its fuel sup­
Blend of gasoline methanol (wood alcohol or ethyl alcohol) plier.
alcohol or methyl alcohol) Anti-knock , index must be 87 AKI or • Do not use fuel for which the con­
Anti-knock index must be 87 AKI or higher. tents cannot be identified.
higher. Blend must not contain more than 1 0% • Fuel system damage and perfor­
Blend must contain no more than 3% ethanol. mance problems resulting from the
methanol. Blend of gasoline and MTBE use of fuels different from those
- Blend must contain more than 2% CO­ specified are not the responsibility
- Anti-knock index must be 87 AKI or
solvents. of Audi and are not covered under
higher.
the New Vehicle or the Emission
Blend must contain not more than 15% Control System Warranties.
MTBE. • If you experience a loss of fuel
economy or driveability and perfor­
mance problems due to the use of
one of these fuel blends, we recom­
mend that you switch to unblended
fuel.

226
--
-- VEHICLE CARE

Seasonally adjusted gasoline Gasoline additives Note

Many gasolines are blended to perform es­ A major concern among many auto Damage or malfunction due to poor
pecially well for winter or summer driving. manufacturers is carbon deposit build-up fuel quality is not covered by the
During seasonal change-over, we suggest caused by the type of gasoline you use. Audi New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
that you fill up at busy gas stations where Although gasolines differ from one
the seasonal adjustment is more likely to be manufacturer to another, they have certain
made in time. things in common. All gasolines contain
properties that can cause deposits to col­
lect on vital engine components, such as
fuel injectors and intake valves. Although
most gasoline brands include additives to
keep engine and fuel systems clean, they
are not equally effective.
After an extended period of using inade­
quate fuels, built-up carbon deposits can
rob your engine of peak performance.

227
VEHICLE CARE --
---

Maintenance
Your vehicle has been designed to help Important considerations for Maintenance, adjustments and repairs usu­
keep maintenance requirements to a mini­ you and your vehicle: ally require special tools, testing devices
mum. and other equipment available to specially
The increasing use of electronics, sophisti­ trained workshop personnel in order to as­
However. a certain amount of regular main­ cated fuel injection and emission control
tenance is still necessary to assure your ve­ sure proper performance, reliability and
systems, and the generally increasing tech­ safety of the vehicle and its many systems.
hicle's safety, economy and reliability. nical complexity of today's automobiles,
c£> By regularly maintaining your have steadily reduced the scope of mainte­ Improper maintenance, adjustments and
repairs can impair the operation and reliabil­
vehicle, you help make sure that nance and repairs which can be carried out
emission standards are maintained, by vehicle owners. Also, safety and en­ ity of your vehicle and even void your ve­
thus minimizing adverse effects on vironmental concerns place very strict hicle warranty. Therefore, proof of servicing
the environment. limits on the nature of repairs and adjust­ in accordance with the maintenance
ments to engine and transmission parts schedule may be a condition for upholding
For detailed vehicle maintenance consult a possible warranty claim made within the
your Maintenance booklet. which an owner can perform.
warranty period.
Under difficult operating condi­ Above all, operational safety can be ad­
tions, for example at extremely low out­ versely affected, creating unnecessary
side temperatures, in very dusty regions, risks for you and your passengers.
when towing a trailer very frequently, etc.,
some service work should be performed
between the intervals specified.
This applies particularly to:
• oil changes, and

• cleaning or replacing the air filter.

228
------- VEHICLE CARE

If in doubt about any servicing, nave 1t done

by your authorized Audi Dealer or any other � WARNING '4 WARNING continued
properly equipped and qualified workshop. • Serious personal injury may oc­ • The engine compartment of any
We strongly urge you_ to give your autho­ cur as a result of improperly per­ motor vehicle is a potentially haz­
rized Audi Dealer the opportunity to perform formed maintenance, adjustments ardous area.
all scheduled maintenance and necessary or repairs. • Always support your vehicle
repairs. Your dealer has the facilities, origi­ • Be extremely careful when with safety stands if it is neces­
nal parts and trained specialiststo keep your working on the vehicle. Follow sary to work underneath the ve­
vehicle running properly. commonly accepted safety prac­ hicle. The jack supplied with the
Performing limited maintenance tices and good judgment. Never vehicle is not adequate for this
yourself risk personal injury. purpose and could collapse caus­
The following pages describe a limited num­ • Do not attempt any of the main­ ing serious personal injury.
ber of procedures which can be performed tenance, checks or repairs de­ • Never reach into the area
on your vehicle with ordinary tools, should scribed on the following pages if around or touch the radiator fan.
the need arise and trained personnel be un­ you are not fully familiar with The auxiliary fan is temperature
available. Before performing any of these these or other procedures with re­ controlled and can switch on sud­
procedures, always thoroughly read all of spect to the vehicle, or are uncer­ denly.
the applicable text and carefully follow the tain how to proceed. Do not do any
instructions given. Always rigorously ob­ work without the proper tools and
serve the WARNINGS provided. equipment. Have the necessary
work done by your authorized
Audi Dealer or another properly
equipped and qualified workshop.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

229
VEHICLE CARE

J'4 WARN I N G continued � Changing the engine settings

will adversely aHect emission
levels. This Is detrimental to the en­
• If you must work underneath
vironment and increases fuel con­
the vehicle with the wheels on the
ground, always make sure the ve­
sumption.
hicle is on level ground. that the Always observe environmental reg­
wheels are always securely ulations when disposing of old en­
blocked and that the engine can­ gine oil. used brake fluid, dirty en­
not be started. Always remove the gine coolant, spent batteries or
ignition key before anyone gets worn out tires.
under the vehicle.
Always make sure the transmis­
sion selector lever (automatic
transmission) is in "P" (Park posi­
tion) and the hand brake is firmly
applied.
• Always be extremely careful
when working on the vehicle. Al­
ways follow commonly accepted
safety practices and general com­
mon sense. Never risk personal in­
jury.

230
 VEHICLE CARE

Engine hood
To close
Pull the hood down until the pressure from
the strut is reduced. Then Jet the hood fall
and latch in place - you do not need to
press the hood down again.

m WAR N I N G
• A hood that is not 'completely
latched could fly up and block
your view while driving. When you
close the engine hood, check it to
To unlock the engine hood, pull the re­ To open, pull the release lever in the direc­ make sure the safety catch has
lease lever on the left under the dashboard. tion indicated by the arrow. This will release properly engaged. The hood
The hood pops up sl ightly under spring pres­ the hook under the hood. should be flush with the surround­
sure. ing vehicle body parts.
Open the hood all the way. It will be held up
• If you ever notice while driving
Note by gas pressure in the strut.
that the hood is not secured prop­
Before opening the engine hood, erly, stop at once and close it.
make sure that the windshield wip­
ers are folded flat against the wind­
shield. Otherwise, they could dam­
age the paint on the hood.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

231
VEHICLE CARE -------

Engine compartment

� WARNING r4 WARNING continued M WARNING continued

To help avoid injury, before you • If work on the fuel system or the • If you must perform a check or

check anything under the hood: electrical system is necessary: repair with the engine running:
• Switch off the engine. Remove - Always disconnect the battery. First, fully apply the parking
the ignition key. Never smoke or work near heat­ brake, move selector lever to
•Set the parking brake fully. ers or open flames. Fluids in the P (Park).
Move the selector lever to P (Park). engine compartment could start Always use extreme caution to
• Always let the engine cool a fire. prevent clothing, jewelry, or
down. Hot components will burn Keep an approved fire extin­ long hair from getting caught in
skin on contact. guisher immediately available. the radiator fan, V-belts or other
• Never spill fluids on hot engine moving parts, or from contact­
• To avoid electrical shock and
components. They can cause a ing hot parts. Tie back hair be­
personal injury while the engine is
fire. fore starting, and wear no cloth­
running or being started, never
ing that will hang or droop into
• Never touch the radiator fan. touch:
the engine.
The auxiliary electric fan can - Ignition cables
switch on suddenly and injure you.
- Other components of the high
voltage electronic ignition system.

232
 - VEHICLE CARE

When adding fluids, always make

sure that they are poured into the
proper container or filler opening,
otherwise serious damage to ve­
hicle systems will occur.
r:Gb To detect leaks in time, inspect
� the vehicle floorpen from under­
neath regularly. If you see spots
from oil or other vehicle fluids, have
your vehicle inspected by an autho­
rized Audi Dealer.

D Always heed all WARNINGS

Pos.
� on page 232. 1 - Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . .

2 - Brake fluid reservoir . . . 242

Always exercise extreme caution 3 - Engine oil dipstick . . . . _ 235
when working under the engine 4 - Engine oil filler cap . . . 235
hood. 5 - Coolant expansion tank . . . 239
6 - Power steering reservoir . 241
7 - Windshield/headlight
washer container . . . . . . • • _ . . . . . 250

233
VEHICLE CARE -------

Engine oil
Specification and viscosity Another oil identification symbol B could be
Your engine was factory filled with an all added to the oil container to help you select
season high quality engine oil. If you need to the correct oil.
add oil between oil changes, use any high 1- The top portion indicates the oil quality
quality petroleum- or synthetic-based oil by API designations.
with correct specifications. 2 - The center portion shows the SAE oil
The following terms must appear on the oil viscosity grade.
container singly or in combination with oth­ 3 - The lower portion indicates that the oil
er designations: has fuel saving capabilities.
- API Service SJ Note
- ACEA A2 or ACEA A3 I B31-113C I Look for one of these symbols on the
Engine oils are graded according to their vis­ front of the oil container. and use
cosity. The proper grade to be used in your Engine oil identification symbol only oils that display these symbols.
engine depends on existing climatic or sea­ Oils of the proper qualityforyourvehicle will
sonal conditions. be identified with a new "starburst" sym­
The engine oil which was first put into your Engine oil additives
bol A. The starburst symbol indicates that
engine has a viscosity grade of SAE OW--30. the oil has been certified by the American Audi does not recommend the use of
You can use this oil over all temperature Petroleum Institute (API). oil additives. They may adversely af­
ranges for normal driving. If engine oil vis­ fect your New Vehicle Warranty.
costy grade SAE OW--30 is not available, you
can also use SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40.
See your authorized Audi Dealer tor more in­
formation regarding oil for your vehicle.

234
 VEHICLE CARE

Engine oil consumption Notes

The rate of the oil consumption depends on • The engine in your vehicle de­
the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at pends on oil to lubricate and cool all
which the engine is operated, the climate, of its moving parts. Therefore the
and road conditions as well as amount of engine oil should be checked regu­
dilution and oxidation of the lubricant. larly and kept at the required level.
Because of these variables, no standard • Lack of sufficient engine oil may
rate of oil consumption can be established, lead to severe engine damage.
but drivers should expect higher oil con­
• The oil pressure warning light is
sumption at high speeds and when the en­ not an oil level indicator.
gine is new.
Therefore, we recommend that you check A Always heed all WARNINGS
the oil level at regular intervals (for example, � on page 232.
• Pull out dipstick (arrow) and wipe it clean
each time you are refuelling, or before going
on a long trip). with a rag.
If the oil level should go below the minimal Checking the engine oil level • Reinsert dipstick; push it all the way in.
level, the check engine oil level warn­ The best time to check the engine oil level • Pull dipstick out again and read the level:
ing light* in the instrument cluster will is when the oil is warm.
come on. See page 144. You should check a You must not add oil.
-

the oil level using the oil dip stick as soon as To get a true reading, the vehicle must be on b - You can add oil. The oil level may go
possible, and then top off the oil as neces­ level ground. into the a range, but riot above the a
sary. A Always heed all WARNINGS range
� on page 232. c You must add oil.
-

After filling in oil, make sure that the oil

• After turning off the engine, wait a few level is somewhere within the b range.
minutes for the oil to return to the oil pan. • After checking the oil level, please make
sure that the dipstick is pushed back in all
the way.

235
VEHICLE CARE --
---

The oil level must never be above the Changing the engine oil
"a .. range.
The engine oil must be changed according
Otherwise oil could be drawn into the crank­ to the intervals specified in your Mainte­
case breather and get into the atmosphere nance booklet.
through the exhaust system. The oil This is very important because the lubricat­
would bum then In the catalytic con­
verter and cause damage.
ing properties of oil diminish gradually dur­
ing normal vehicle use.
Under some circumstances the engine oil
� WAR N I N G should be changed more frequently.
Change oil more often if you drive mostly
Spilled oil is a fire hazard. The oil short distances, operate the vehicle in dusty
filler cap must be secure to avoid areas or under predominantly stop-and-go
an oil spill. traffic conditions, or have your vehicle
Adding engine oil where temperatures remain below freezing
for extended periods.
A Always heed all WARNINGS
• Carefully screw the oil cap back on and in­
r!!J on page 232.
Detergent additives in the oil will make
sert the oil dipstick all the way. Otherwise fresh oil look dark after the engine has been
oil could leak out when the engine is run­ running for a short time. This is normal and
ning. is not a reason to change the oil more often
• Turn off the engine.
than recommended.
• Unscrew the oil cap from the cylinder
head cover.
• Add oil by a half quart (half liter) at a time.

• Check the oil level with the dipstick.

:236
------- VEHICLE CARE

� WARNING ,A WARNING continued � BefoN changing your oil, first

make sure you know where you
can properly dispose of the old oil.
• If you must change the engine • Engine oil is poisonous. Keep it
oil in your vehicle: well out of the reach of children. Always dispose of used engine oil
properly. Do not dump it on garden
• Wear eye protection. • Continuous contact with used
soil, wooded areas, Into open
• To reduce the risk of burns from engine oil is harmful to your skin.
streams or down sewage drains.
hot engine oil let the engine cool Always protect your skin by wash­
ing thoroughly with soap and wa­ Recycle used engine oil by taking it
down to the touch.
ter. to a used engine oil collection facil­
• When removing the oil drain ity in your area, or contact a service
plug with your fingers, stay as far station.
away as possible. Always keep
Because of the problem of proper
your forearm parallel to the
disposal, along with the special
ground to help prevent hot oil
tools and necessary expertise re­
from running down your arm.
quired, we strongly recommend that
• Drain the oil into a container de� you have your oil changed by an au­
signed for this purpose, one large thorized Audi Dealer or a qualified
enough to hold at least the total workshop.
amount of oil in your engine.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on page 232.

237
VEHICLE CARE --
--

Engine cooling system

The cooling system is sealed and generally For year-round driving, antifreeze is added at When adding coolant additive to
requires little attention. the factory for temperatures down to: your cooling system. please remem­
The cooling system has been filled at the -31 °F (-35 °C) USA ber:
factory with a permanent coolant which -40 °F (-40 °C) Canada. Under no circumstances may G12
does not need to be changed. The coolant ABD be mixed with other coolant ad­
consists of a mixture of water and the ditives (for example G 1 1 ).
manufacturer's coolant additive G 12 ABD g Always heed all WARNINGS
You can recognize G12 ABD in the
-antifreeze on a glycol base with anti-corro­ E!!1 on page 232. expansion tank by its red color. If
sion additives (50% for USA models; 60o/o the liquid in the expansion tank is
for Canadian models). This mixture assures Never use eny coolant additive brown, G 12 ABD has been mixed
the necessary frost protection and protects other than our G 1 2 ABD additive with another coolant additive. In
alloy components in the engine's cooling (check label) for your vehicle. This this case. your vehicle's coolant
system from corrosion and scaling. It also coolant additive is available at au­ must be changed as soon as pos­
raises the boiling point of the coolant. thorized Audi Dealers. sible.
Do not reduce the concentration of the cool­ Other types of antifreeze can. above
ant in the summer by adding plain water. all. significantly reduce corrosion Note
The proportion of coolant additive
protection. The resulting corrosion Mixing coolant additives can result
must be at least 500fa but not more
can cause a loss of coolant and in serious malfunction or engine
than 600fa to maintain antifreeze protec­
therefore serious engine damage. damage!
tion and cooling efficiency.

238
 VEHICLE CARE

Checking the engine coolant The expansion tank in your vehicle is

level equipped with an electric coolant level
The coolant expansion tank is located on the checking device.
left of the engine compartment - see il­ When the coolant level is too low, the warn­
lustration. ing light (see page 141) in the Auto-Check
The coolant level is automatically monitored System will blink until you add coolant and
by the Auto-Check System - see page 141 . the coolant level has been restored to nor­
However, it is still recommended to check mal.
the coolant lev�l visually from time to time Coolant losses
and always before going on a longer trip.
Coolant losses may indicate a leak in the
cooling system. In the event of coolant
� WARNING losses, the cooling system should be in­
To obtain an accurate reading, the engine spected immediately by your authorized
To reduce the risk of being burned. must be switched off. Audi Dealer. It is not enough merely to add
never open the hood if you see or Since the expansion tank is transparent, the coolant.
hear steam or coolant escaping cap need not be removed to check the cool­ In a sealed system, losses can occur only if
from the engine compartment. ant level. the boiling point of the coolant is exceeded
Wait until no steam or coolant can The coolant level must be between the as a result of overheating.
be seen or heard before carefully "MIN" and "MAX" marks when the en­
opening the hood and following gine is cold and can be slightly above the
the precautions on the next page. "MAX" mark if the engine is warm.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on page 232.

239
VEHICLE CARE

Adding coolant If, in an emergency, only water can be add­ Screw cap on again tightly.
ed, the correct ratio between water and an­
� WA R N I N G tifreeze (see page 238) must be restored as � WAR N I N G
soon as possible.
The cooling system is under pres­ If you have lost a considerable amount of Antifreeze is poisonous. Always
sura and can get very hot. Reduce coolant. then you should add cold antifreeze store antifreeze in its original con­
the risk of scalding from hot cool­ and cold water only when the engine is cold. tainer and well out of the reach of
ant by following these steps. children. If you drain the coolant,
Do not fill coolant above the "MAX" it must be caught and safely
• Turn off the engine and allow it
mark. stored in a proper container
to cool down.
Note clearly marked "poison...
• Protect face, hands and arms es­
caping fluid and steam by covering Coolant pollutes the environment
the cap with a large, thick rag.
• Turn the cap slowly and very
and could cause an engine fire. Ex­
cess coolant will be forced out <£> Drained coolant should not be
through the pressure relief valve in reused. Always dispose of used
carefully in a counter--clockwise di­
the cap when the engine becomes coolant observing all environmen­
rection while applying light, down­
hot. tal regulations.
ward pressure on the top of the
cap.
• To help avoid being burned, do
Always heed all WARNINGS
not spill antifreeze or coolant on
the exhaust system or hot engine on page 232.
parts. Under some conditions, the
ethylene glycol in engine coolant
can catch fire.

240
 VEHICLE CARE

Power steering

Radiator fan Your vehicle is equipped with a Servotro­ Note

nic power steering. The degree of • When the engine is running, never hold
The radiator fan is driven by the engine via power assistance is regulated electronically
the V-belt. The viscous clutch regulates the the steering wheel turned all the wayto the
according to road speed. right or to the left for longer than 15 sec­
speed of the fan according to the tempera­
ture of the coolant. The fluid reservoir is in the engine compart­ onds. The power steering pump will over­
ment near the windshield washer container. heat the hydraulic fluid if you hold the steer­
An auxiliary electric radiator fan switches on ing wheel all the way turned.
and off depending on coolant temperature The correct fluid level in the reservoir is im­
and other vehicle operation conditions. portant for the proper functioning of power This will damage the power steering
steering. system.
The power steering fluid level is checked Each time the steering wheel is turned all
� WAR N I N G during the scheduled Maintenance ser­ the way to the right or left when stopped,
vices. you will hear noises caused by the severe
• Always use extreme caution to If the electronic regulating system is not stress placed on the power steering pump.
prevent clothing. jewelry, or long
working properly, this is most noticeable At the same time, engine idle speed drops.
hair from getting caught in the en­
when turning the steering wheel at low • If the power steering system
gine driven radiator fan, V-belt or
speeds (for example when parking) - more should fail, or if the engine is not
other moving parts. effort will be required than usual. The fault running (for example, while being
• Never touch the auxiliary elec­ should be rectified by an Audi Dealer as towed). you will still be able to steer
tric radiator fan. The fan can soon as possible. the vehicle, however. more effort
switch on suddenly and injure you. will be required.
• If the power steering system should
have a leak, or is not functioning properly,
Always heed all WARNINGS contact your authorized Audi Dealer imme­
on page 232. diately.

241
VEHICLE CARE ------

Brake fluid

Checking brake fluid level Changing brake fluid

The correct fluid level is important for the The brake fluid reservoir can be dif­
proper functioning of the brake system. The ficult to reach, therefore, we recom­
fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir should mend that you have the brake fluid
always be between the "MAX" and changed by your authorized Audi
"MIN" markings. Dealer. Your dealer has the correct
The fluid level may drop slightly after some tools and know-how to do this for
time due to the automatic adjustment of the you.
brake pads. This is no cause for alarm. Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air. If
• If the brake fluid level falls con­ the water content in the brake fluid is too
high, corrosion in the brake system may re­
siderably below the "MIN"
mark, the brake warning light will sult after a period of time. The boiling point
coma on. Do not continue to operate of the brake fluid will also decrease consid­
The brake fluid reservoir is located on the erably.
the vehicle. The complete brake sys­
left of the plenum chamber at the back of
the engine compartment. tem should be thoroughly checked
by an authorized Audi Dealer or
another qualified workshop and the
cause corrected.
The brake warning lamp lights up to indicate
a low fluid level in the reservoir.
For more details see "Warning I Indicator
lights," page 1 26.
Contact an authorized Audi Dealer
immediately.

242
--
--- VEHICLE CARE

Therefore, the brake fluid must be

changed every 2 years. � WARNING
Note Brake failure can result from old or
Remember that brake fluid is harm­ inappropriate brake fluid. Observe
ful to the paint of your vehicle. these precautions:
• Use only brake fluid that meets
c£> Because of the problem ofpro� SAE specification J 1 703 and con­
forms to Federal Motor Vehicle
er disposal of brake fluid along
with the special tools required and Standard 1 16. Always check with
the necessary expertise, we recom­ your authorized Audi Dealer to
mend that you have your brake fluid make sure you are using the cor­
changed by your authorized Audi rect brake fluid. The correct type
Dealer. of brake fluid is also found labeled
on the brake fluid reservoir.
It is advisable to have the fluid changed dur­
ing a Maintenance Service. • The brake fluid must be new.
• Brake fluid is poisonous. There­
fore, it must be stored only in the
closed original container out of
reach of children.

243
VEHICLE CARE ------
Battery

� WARNING
�i'l
() Flush eyes immediately &
·. Battery acid contains

�
with water. sulfuric acid. Always wear

@
Always heed the following WARN­ Get medical help fast. gloves and eye protection.
INGS and safety precautions when Do not tilt the battery be­
working on the battery. cause acid could leak out of the
Always keep the battery ventilation openings. If you get
well out of the reach of battery acid in your eyes or on your
Shield eyes. Explosive children. skin, immediately rinse with cold

f)
gases can cause blind­

@
water for several minutes and call
ness or injury.
a doctor. If you should ingest any
battery acid, get a doctor immedi­
Always wear eye protec­
No ately.
tion. Do not let battery
- sparks acid or any lead particles
- flames get on your akin or cloth­ • Before work is done on the elec­
- smoking.

.
ing. trical system, disconnect the neg­
ative ground cable.
� Sulfuric acid.

A
• When working on the battery, be
� Can cause blindness or
When a battery is charged,
it produces hydrogen gas sure not to short circuit the termi­
severe bums. Battery . which is explosive and nals with tools or other metal ob­
posts, terminals and re­
·

could cause personal inju­ jects. This would cause the battery

®
lated accessories contain ry. to heat up very quickly, which
lead and lead compounds. could lead to damage or explosion
Wash hands after han­ and personal injury.
dling. Do not expose the battery
to an open flame, electric
"""' sparks or an open light. Do
not smoke. Do not reverse
polarity.

244
------- VEHICLE CARE

Do not disconnect the vehicle bat­ Winter operation

tery when the ignition is switched
on or when the engine is running.
During the winter months, battery capacity
Otherwise, you will damage elec­
tends to decrease as temperatures drop.
tronic components in the electrical
More power is also consumed while start­
system.
ing, and the headlights, rear window defog­
ger, etc., are used more often.
When working on the engine, pro­
tect the battery housing from ultra
Avoid unnecessary power consumption,
violet (UV) rays by not parking the
particularly in city traffic or when trave:ling
vehicle in direct sunlight.
only short distances. Let your authonzed
Audi Dealer check the capacity of the ve­
hicle battery before winter sets in. A well
charged battery will not only prevent start­
ing problems but will also last longer.
If your vehicle is left standing for Location of vehicle battery
several weeks at extremely low tem­
peratures, the vehicle battery g Always heed all WARNINGS
should be removed and stored � on page 232.
where it will not freeze. This will
prevent it from being damaged.
The vehicle battery is located under a cover
in the plenum chamber at the back of the
engine compartment. To remove the cover,
press the straps (arrows), swing up and re­
move.

245
VEHICLE CARE --
---

Battery acid level Charging of battery

g Always heed all WARNINGS �� WARNING continued � WARNING

� on page 232.
• If you get battery acid in your • The battery contains sulfuric
eyes or on your skin, immediately acid. Therefore, keep battery out
Under normal operating conditions, the rinse with cold water for several of reach of children.
battery in your Audi does not need any minutes and call a doctor. • Charge the battery in a well ven­
maintenance.
• Do not expose the battery to an tilated area. Keep away from open
At high outside temperatures it is advisable, open flame or electric spark. flame or electrical spark. Do not
however, to check the fluid level at regular Hydrogen gas generated by the smoke. Hydrogen gas generated
intervals through the transparent battery battery can explode and cause per­ by the battery is explosive.
housing. Also check the fluid level each sonal injury. • Always shield your eyes and
time you charge the battery.
avoid leaning over the battery
The fluid level should always be between whenever possible.
the "min" and "max" marks in each cell. Note
Do not overfill the battery. Other­ • If you gat battery acid in your
If the fluid level has reached the "min" eyes or on your skin, immediately
marks, let your authorized Audi Dealer cor­ wise battery acid will overflow
through the vent opening. This will rinse with cold water for several
rect the condition. minutes and call a doctor.
damage the paint and cause corro­
sion. • Fast charging a battery is dan­
� WARNING gerous and should only be at­
tempted by a competent mechanic
• Always shield your eyes and � WARNING with the proper equipment.
avoid leaning over the battery
whenever possible. Battery posts, terminals and re­
lated accessories contain lead and
• Do not let battery acid come in
lead compounds. Wash hands af­
contact with skin, eyes, fabric, or ter handling.
painted surfaces.

246
 VEHICLE CARE

Slow battery charging

f4 WARNING continued � WARNING • Connect charger cables.

Charger cables must be connected
• Never charge a frozen battery. It Heed all WARNINGS and follow in­ POSITIVE (+ ) to POSITIVE (+) and
may explode because of gas structions that come with your NEGATIVE (-) to NEGATIVE (-).
trapped in the ice. Allow a frozen battery charger.
battery to thaw out first.
• Do not reuse batteries which
� WARNING
have frozen. The baUery housing • Before charging the battery, switch off
the ignition and all electrical consumers. To reduce the danger of explosion,
may have cracked and weakened
never connect or disconnect char­
when the battery froze. • Make sure the area is well ventilated ger cables while the charger is op­
when you charge the battery. erating.
• It is not necessary to remove the battery
Always heed all WARNINGS from the engine compartment, and it is also
on page 232. not necessary to disconnect the cables. • Switch on charger.
• Make sure the electrolyte level in each • Charging rate not over 6 amps.
• Battery acid that may spill during
cell is between the min" and "max
.. ..
Normally, a battery should be charged at no
marks. If the fluid level is below the "min" more than 1 0 percent of its rated capacity.
charging should be washed off with
a solution of warm water and baking
mark, let your authorized Audi Dealer cor­ For example, a charging current of 4.5 amps
soda to neutralize the acid.
rect the condition. would be used on a battery rated at 45 Ah.
• Never use a fast charger as a boo­ Rated capacity of the battery in your vehicle
ster to start the engine. This will se­
is listed on the battery housing.
riously damage sensitive electronic • After charging, first turn off the charger
components, such as control units, and then disconnect charger cables.
relays, radio, etc., as well as the bat­
tery charger.
g Always heed all WARNINGS
� on page 232.

247
VEHICLE CARE --
--

Air cleaner
When disconnecting and You have also reset the seat memory* -see A dirty air cleaner element not only reduces
"Seats" the engine output and increases fuel con­
� page 81.
connecting the battery ...
sumption considerably but can also cause
When you disconnect the vehicle battery premature engine wear.
please note the following: The radio must be re-coded with the correct
radio code - see your radio Operating In­ Normally, it is not necessary to service the
- some data stored in the driver informa- structions. air cleaner more often than recommended
tion system are erased, in the Maintenance booklet. If the vehicle is
- the clock goes out, driven on very dusty roads, the air cleaner
Replacement battery must be serviced more frequently, even dai­
- the factory installed radio locks up, ly.
A replacement battery must have the same
- the Engine management system, specifications and dimensions as the origi­ If your air cleaner element must be
- the one-touch-up and one-touch-down nal equipment battery. Specifications are changed mora frequently, we rec­
functions of the power windows no lon­ listed on the battery housing. ommend that you have the air clean­
ger work, When installing the battery, make sure the er serviced by your authorized Audi
- all stored seat positions in the memory* ignition and all electrical consumers are Dealer or a qualified workshop.
are erased. switched off. The air cleaner element must never
Afteryou reconnect the battery, you must r.Gb. Because of the problem of be cleaned or soaked with gasoline,
reset the clock. � page 1 18. � proper disposal of a battery, we cleaning solvents or oil.
recommend that you have your au­
You also have to reset the Engine manage­ thorized Audi Dealer change the
ment system - see "Starter Switch " g
� page 1 13.
battery for you. Batteries contain Always heed all WARNINGS
sulfuric acid and lead and must al­ t!!3 on page 232.
You also have to reset the one-touch-up and ways be disposed of properly ob­
one-touch�down feature on power win­ serving all environmental regula­
dows - see "Power windows"
� page 71.
tions.

248
------- VEHICLE CARE

Spark plugs Belts

Spark plugs are replaced during the Audi Ribbed V-Belt

scheduled Maintenance Service. The radiator fan, hydraulic pump (power
� WARNING
If you have to replace the spark plugs be­ steering), alternator and air conditioner To prevent serious personal inju­
tween the Audi Maintenance services, be compressor are driven by one V-belt. ries stay well clear of the V-belt,
sure to note the following: The installed V-belt conforms to the highest The radiator fan and the V-belt
• Engine, spark plugs and the ignition sys­ quality requirements. The V-belt adjusts its driven accessories when the en­
tem are matched to each other. To avoid own tension. gine is running. The V-belt will be
faulty operation or engine damage, use only Replacing of the V-belt should be inspected and replaced by your au­
Original Audi spark plugs. It is especially im­ performed by your authorized Audi thorized Audi Dealer during a
portant to note the number of electrodes on Dealer or a qualified workshop. scheduled Maintenance Service.
the spark plug and the heat value. When replacing a belt, it is not sufficient to
• Since spark plug specifications may use just any belt of the same size. For safe Timing belt
change for technical reasons during a model and reliable operation, use only Genuine
year, we recommend that you obtain your Audi V-belts specially designed for your ve­ • Your engine is equipped with a long last­
spark plugs from an authorized Audi Dealer, hicle. The correct belts can be obtained at ing toothed belt. The belt will be in­
who has the latest information. your authorized Audi Dealer. spected and replaced during a scheduled
Maintenance Service.
Always heed all WARNINGS
on page 232. Always heed all WARNINGS
on page 232.

249
VEHICLE CARE -------

Windshield I headlight washer container

Filling the container Adjusting washer jets
To add washer fluid, just lift the filler cap by You need special equipment to adjust the
the tongue. The container can be filled to jets for the windshield and the headlight
the top. washer system. See your authorized Audi
Since clear water is usua lly not adequate for Dealer.
cleaning the glass, add a cleaning solution
to the water.
Use winterized windshield washer solvent
during the cold season even though the ve­
hicle is equipped with heated washer
jets. It helps to keep your windshield clean
and prevents the fluid from freezing in the
The windshield and headlight washer con­ winter.
tainer is located on the left side of the en­ Do not use engine coolant anti·
gine compartment. freeze or any other solution that can
damage the vehicle paint.
The fluid container for the windshield wash­
ers and the headlight washer system holds Follow the directions on the can for the cor­
about 4.9 quarts (4.7 liters). rect amount to be used.
After filling the container, press the cap onto
the filler neck.
A Always heed all WARNINGS
� on page 232.

250
 VEHICLE CARE

Wiper blades
Wiper blades must be in good condition so Notes
that you can see clearly through the wind­ • Commercial hot waxes applied by
shield. automatic car washes affect the
Clean your wiper blades regularly with a cleanability of the windshield.
windshield washer solution to prevent • To prevent damage to wiper
streaking. If the blades are very dirty, for ex­ blades, do not use gasoline, kero­
ample with insects, carefully clean the sene, paint thinner, or other sol­
blades with a sponge or a soft brush. vents on or near the wiper blades.
If the wiper blades begin to streak t�e wind­
• To prevent damage to the wiper
shield, this could be caused by resrdue left
on the windshield by automatic car washes. arms or other components, do not
attempt to move the wipers by hand.
Fill the windshield washer container with a
special solution available at yo� r authorized
Audi Dealer to remove the resrdue. Replacing wiper blades
To prevent damage to the wiping Removing
system, always loosen blades frozen
to glass before operating wipers. • Raise the wiper arm and hold wiper blade
Be sure to inspect the condition of your horizontally.
wiper blades regularly. For safety reasons, • Depress locking spring A and remove
replace your wiper blades once o; twrce a blade by pulling it towards the wrndsh1eld B.
year if necessary. See your authonzed Audr Installing
Dealer for replacement blades.
• The locking spring must click into place
on the wiper arm.
When installing wiper blades with molded
wind deflectors, always make sure the de­
flector points down.

251
VEHICLE CARE -------

Tires I Wheels
Tires are important but often abused parts • Store removed tires in a cool, dry and pre­
of a vehicle. They not only influence comfort ferably dark place. Tires which are not on M WARNING continued
and ride, but perform vital safety functio � s. wheels should be stored standing up. • Remove embedded material.
This section is intended to provide you w1th • New tires may have different tread
important information regarding their prop­ • Replace worn or damaged tires
er use, care and replacement. depths due to the configuration and des!gn immediately.
by the tire manufacturers. When replacing
• Be sure to inspect your tires at least ev­ tires, use ones with matching tread depth. • Replace missing valve dust
ery 2,000 miles (3 000 kilometres) for wear caps.
and damage. • Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc.
• Damage to wheels and tires is not always
� WARNING away from tires.
easy to see. If you believe that a tire or • Tires age even if they are not be­
• Keep tires inflated correctly.
wheel has been damaged, it is best to have
ing used. Tires which are more
it replaced as soon as possible. Internal tire than 6 years should be used only in
damage can never get better or ': heal" it­ an emergency and then with cau­ New tires
self, it can only get worse over t1me. Tire tion. New tires tend to be slippery and cannot of­
damage can lead to tire failure and loss of ferfull traction until they have been properly
vehicle control. See your authonzed Aud1 • Avoid damaging tires and wheel
Dealer for advice and assistance. rims. If you must drive over a curb broken in.
or other obstacle, drive slowly and
• Mark tires before removing them. Re­
as nearly as possible at a right
mount tires on the same vehicle side be­ angle. Frequently check tires for
� WARNING
cause the rotation direction must stay the uneven wear and damage.
same. To help avoid loss of control, al­
ways operate a vehicle with new
tires at lower speeds and with spe­
cial caution for the first 300 miles
(480 kilometres).

252
 VEHICLE CARE

lira service life Tire pressures should be checked at least Driving habits
The service life of your tires depends for the once a month and always before a long trip. Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard
most part on the following factors: Tire pressures are very important, braking all increase tire wear.
particularly when the vehicle is driv­
lire pressure Wheel balancing
en at higher speeds.
Required cold tire inflation pressures are If you are going to be driving at higher The wheels on new vehicles are balanced.
listed on a sticker inside the fuel filler flap or speeds (a lot of expressway driving), then it When driving, however, various conditions
on the rear passenger's door pillar (right is recommended to increase the tire pres­ can cause a wheel to become unbalanced.
side) - depending on the model. sure by 5 psi (0.3 bar). This may be noticed as vibrations in the
steering.
Always check tire pressures when the tires
are cold. When the tires are warm, the pres­ Since tire imbalance can cause wear on the
� WARNING sure will be higher. Do not reduce the steering, suspension and tires, you should
pressure of warm tires. have your wheels re-balanced. A wheel
• Incorrect tire pressures can lead should always be balanced if a new tire has
to a serious or fatal accident: Don't forget to check the spare wheel. The been mounted or a tire was repaired.
• Incorrect tire pressures cause inflation pressure is marked on the tire side­
increased tire wear and can affect wall. Incorrect wheel alignment
handling of the vehicle. Use an accurate tire pressure gauge when Incorrect wheel alignment causes exces­
• Incorrect pressures can also checking inflation pressures. Never exceed sive and uneven tire wear, impairing the
lead to sudden tire failure and the maximum tire inflation pressure listed safety ofth e vehide. If you notice excessive
deflation, causing loss of vehicle on the tire sidewall. Cold tire inflation pres­ tire wear, contact your authorized Audi
control. sure means: the vehicle has been standing Dealer.
for at least 3 hours or driven for less than
1 mile (1 km).
c£' Low tire pressures increase fuel Do not forget to replace the valve stem caps
consumption, which is detri­ after checking tire pressure.
mental to the environment.

253
VEHICLE CARE --
--

When the indicators appear in two or more

adjacent grooves, it is time to replace the
tires. We recommend, however, that you do
not let the tires wear down this far. Worn
tires cannot grip the road surface properly,
and are even less effective on wet roads.

� WARNING
• Worn tires can lead to a serious
accident.
• lires showing cuts. bruises or I BBD-2.02. I
other damage may lead to tire fail­
Tire wear ure. sudden deflation and loss of Tire rotation
The original tires on your vehicle have built­ vehicle control. If the front tires are worn more than rear
in wear indicators. They are molded into the • Since worn tires do not grip the tires, then you must rotate the front tires
bottom of the tread grooves and will appear with the rear tires as shown in the illustra­
as approximately 1h inch (1 2 mm) bands
road surface properly when the ve­
hicle is driven on wet roads, the ve­ tion. By doing this, all tires will have approxi­
when the tire tread depth wears down to hicle may tend to hydroplane mately the same service life.
1 /1 6 inches (1 .6 mm). Depending on the tire
sooner. Tires should always remain on same
manufacturer, there are six to eight wear in­ side of vehicle.
dicators evenly spaced around the circum­
ference of the tire. Markings on the sides of
the tires (e.g. the letters "TWI" or a triangle)
show the locations of the wear indicators.

254
 VEHICLE CARE

Only when tires show unusual wear such as Tire replacement • If you must replace tires different from
feather-edging should they be rotated diag­ Wheels and tires approved by the manufac­ those which were originally factory supplied
�nally. Your vehicle may be equipped with turer have been specially matched to your on your vehicle, always use the specific
trres which have a specified rotation direc­ vehicle and contribute greatly to the road­ brands, specifications and dimensions
tion. The rotation direction is identified by holding, driving characteristics and safety of which were specified by Audi for your ve­
arrow markings on the sides of the tires. the vehicle. hicle.
The rotation direction must not be reversed. Your authorized Audi dealer or Audi Client
Therefore, these tires cannot be switched Make sure that the new tires also meet the
specifications listed on the label located on Relations have information regarding the
diagonally. If in doubt, discuss any unusual t1res and wheel rims specified for your car,
tire wear with your authorized Audi Dealer's the inside of the fuel filler flap or on the driv­
er's door lock jamb. and can tell you which tires and tire
service department. manufacturers were approved by the fac­
After rotation adjust tire pressure and It's �mportant to remember that in spite of tory for original equipment installation.
torque wheel bolts diagonally to 90 tt lb h�vrng the same tire designation, the actual
s1ze of a tire can vary from tire manufacturer • We recommend that you have your tires
(120 Nm). Refer to "Changing a wheel" on
page 267 for details. to tire manufacturer. Using different tire and changed by an authorized Audi Dealer, be­
wheel rim combinations can result in re­ cause they have the special tools and nec­
duced clearance between the tire and the essary expertise.
vehicle body. Furthermore, your authorized Audi Dealer
Therefore, never mount tires that stocks a range of tires and wheels.
are of a different designation or • If the spare tire is different from the tires
have different dimensions from that you have mounted on your vehicle (for
those of the factory supplied tires example winter tires or wide profile tires),
which came equipped on your ve­ then use the spare tire for a short period of
hicle. time only and drive with extra care. Replace
the flat tire with a tire matching the others
on your vehicle as soon as possible.

255
VEHICLE CARE ------

• For safety reasons, tires should be re­ • Vehicles with quattro® must always Tire specifications
placed in pairs and not individually. The tires have tires of the same size, construction
with the deepest tread should always be and tread type. For details see page 207. � WARNING
mounted on the front wheels. • Never mount used tires if you are not
Never mix tires of different design
sure of their previous history.
such as steel belted radials with
• Whenever replacing a tubeless tire, al­
� WARNING ways install a new valve stem. Tire repair
radial bias belted or bias ply tires
etc. Mixing tire types will adverse­
It is essential to the safe operation should only be performed by a specialist. ly affect road holding and can lead
of your vehicle that you use only • In the interest of maximum safety and to loss of vehicle control and per­
rims and tires that have the same best all-around vehicle handling, always buy sonal injury.
designation. sizes and types as replacement radial tires that have the same
those with which your vehicle was specifications with regard to tire size, de­
originally equipped. sign, load carrying capacity, speed rating, A knowledge of tire designations makes it
Using tires and/or wheal rims dif­ tread pattern, tread depth, etc. This also ap­ easier to choose the correct tires. Radial ply
ferent from those which originally plies to Audi recommended alternate re­ tires have the following designations:
came with your vehicle can reduce placement tires.
the clearance between the wheels e.g. 225 / 55 R 1 7 97 H
and the vehicle body. The tires 225 lire width in mm
could then rub against the vehicle
body damaging the tire or the ve­ 55 Height/width ratio in %
hicle body. or both. and seriously
effect your safety as well as the
R lire construction: Radial
safe operation of your vehicle. 17 Rim diameter i n inches
97 Load rating code
H Speed rating code letter

256
------- VEHICLE CARE

The speed rating letter 9ode indicates the Note

maximum permissible road speeds: m WARNING Your vehicle is normally factory equipped
Summer tires: • Driving faster than the maxi­ with all season tires. which possess excel­
mum speed for which tires are lent driving characteristics and give your
S - up to 1 1 0 mph (180 km/h) Audi optimum driving comfort. The speed
rated and approved can lead to
T - up to 1 1 8 mph (190 km/h) sudden tire failure. This can cause limit of this tire is 130 mph (21 0 km/h). An
H - up to 1 30 mph (21 0 km/h) loss of vehicle control and lead to electronic speed limiter (see page 129) will
an accident and personal injury. normally prevent your vehicle from going
V - up to 1 50 mph (240 km/h) faster then the tire speed ravng.
• Never operate a vehicle at
Z - over 1 50 mph (240 km/h)
speeds greater than the maximum
W - up to 1 68 mph (270 k.m/h) speed rating of its tires.
Y - up to 1 85 mph (300 km/h).
� WARNING
• Always observe speed limits
"Z" tires carry the speed rating code letter and adjust your vehicle to prevail­ Never operate this vehicle at
in combination with the tire construction let­ speeds greater than 130 mph. Ex­
ceeding 130 mph (210 km I h) un­
ing road and traffic conditions.
ter "R".
Winter tires see page 260. der any conditions will lead to sud­
dan tire failure which can causa
loss of vehicle control and person­
al injury. Always observe speed
limits and adjust your vehicle
speed to prevailing road and traf­
fic conditions.

257
VEHICLE CARE --
--

The manufacturing date on the tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Traction
side wall (possibly only on the inside of the Quality grades can be found where applica­ The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
wheel): ble on the tire side wall between tread, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
DOT 1200 ... means that the tire was
... shoulder and maximum section width. For the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
produced in the 12th week of 2000. example: measured under controlled conditions on
Tire strength and performance decline with Treadwear 200, Traction AA, Tem­ specified government test surfaces of as­
age - even if the tires are not used. Tire perature A. phalt and concrete. A tire marked C may
manufacturers caution that a tire more than have poor traction performance.
All passenger car tires must conform to
six years old cannot be expected to perform Federal Safety Requirements in addition to
reliably and safely even in normal use. these grades. � WARNING
Treadwear
The traction grade assigned to this
� WARNING The treadwear grade is a comparative rating tire is based on straight-ahead
based on the wear rate of the tire when braking traction tests, and does
Old tires can fail in use, causing tested under controlled conditions on a spe­
loss of vehicle control and person­ not include acceleration, corner­
cified government test course. For exam­ ing, hydroplaning or peak traction
al injury. ple, a tire Qraded 1 50 would wear one and
one half (1112) times as well on the govern­
characteristics.
Replace tires after six years re­
gardless of tread wear. Always re­ ment course as a tire graded 1 00. The reia·
duce speed and drive cautiously if tive performance of tires depends upon the
you must use an old tire in an emer­ actual conditions of their use, however, and
gency. Replace the tire as soon as may depart significantly from the norm due
possible. to variations in driving habits, service prac­
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.

258
------- VEHICLE CARE

Temperature Wheel replacement • Before you plan on exchanging

The temperature grades are A (the highest), steel wheels, light alloy wheals, or
8, and C, representing the tire's resistance to
If you wish to equip your vehicle with tires
or wheels other than those installed at the winter tires already mounted on
the generation of heat and its ability to dissi­ factory, please note the following: wheel rims, consult your authorized
pate heat when tested under controlled con­ Audi Dealer. They have the technical
• For technical reasons it is not al­ information necessary to advise you
ditions on a specified indoor laboratory test
ways possible to use wheels from which wheal rims and wheel bolts
wheel. Sustained high temJ)erature can
other vehicles - under certain condi­ are compatible with the original fac­
cause the material of the tire to degenerate tions not even wheels from the same
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera­ tory installations.
vehicle model.
ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of perfor­ • Wheel rims and wheel bolts are
mance which all passenger car tires must matched to fit your Audi. When 1ft WARNING
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety installing different wheels (for ax­
• Incorrect tire/wheel parts may
Standard No. 1 09. Grades B and A represent ample, wheels with winter tires), the
higher levels of performance on the laborato­ correct wheel bolts with the proper cause an accident and personal in­
ry test wheel than the minimum required by length and conical shape of the bolt jury. Such parts will adversely af­
law. head must be used. The secure fit of fect the safe operation of your ve­
the wheels and the proper function­ hicle. Always use tires, wheel rims
ing of the brake system and safety and wheel bolts that meat specifi­
� WARNING are dependent upon this. cations of the original factory­
installed equipment.
•Wheel rims and wheal bolts are
The temperature grade for this tire • If wheel trim discs or a front
matched to fit your Audi.
is established for a tire that is spoiler are Installed, make sura the
properly inflated and not over­ airflow for cooling the brakes is
loaded. Excessive speed, under­ not obstructed.
inflation, or excessive loading, ei­
ther separately or in combination,
can causa heat buildup and pos­
sible tire failure.

259
VEHICLE CARE

Winter tires When installing winter tires, please

note the following: � WAR N I N G
The tires for your vehicle were selected for
optimal performance under a variety of driv­ • Only radial ply winter tires may be
installed. Ask your authorized Audi Dealer
• Tires with badly wom treads
ing conditions. and studs are very dangerous.
If your Audi is equipped with high perfor­ for the recommended tire size. Make sure they are replaced imme­
mance tires (identified by code letter V, W • Winter tires must be mounted on all four diately.
or Z on the tire flank) and you drive frequent­ wheels. • Never mix tires of different de­
ly on ice or snow, you should consider the • Because of the special design character­ sign such as steel belted radials
installation of all season or winter tires. Let istics of radial ply M+S tires, they must be with radial bias belted or bias ply
your authorized Audi Dealer advise and as­ inflated 3 psi above the cold tire inflation tires, etc. Mixing tire types will ad­
sist you. pressures required for the regular radial ply versely affect road holding and
For winter driving, the driveability of your tires. However, never exceed the maximum can lead to loss of vehicle control
vehicle can be improved by installing radial tire inflation pressure listed on the tire side­ and personal inlury.
winter tires (M+S) with or without studs 1 l . wall.
The all season tires with which your ve­ • Winter tires will not do their job if the
hicle may have been equipped at the factory tread depth is less than 5/32 of an inch
are performance tires advertised by the tire (4 mm).
manufacturer as suitable for all weather use
or with special mud and snow (M+S) capa­
bility.
Winter tires, sometimes also called snow
tires, are designed for maximum traction in
mud and snow.

,, Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bu­

reau for possible restrictions.

260
 VEHICLE CARE

• Winter tires with studs should be run � WARNING • If you want to mount snow chains
only at moderate speeds when new in order on your vehicle, consult your Audi
to give the studs time to settle. Dealer for proper rim I tire combina­
• Winter tires available for your
Do not drive a vehicle equipped with tion.
vehicle may have a maximum
winter tires at prolonged high speed rating which is less than the • Snow chains should only be
speed. maximum speed of your vehicle. installed on the rear wheels, never
Winter tires use a softer rubber compound • Driving faster than the maxi­ on the front wheels.
and a deeper tread pattern and therefore mum speed for which tires are Where snow chains are mandatory
have a lower speed rating and reduced trac­ rated and approved will lead to on certain roads, this normally also
tion and durability when used on dry roads. sudden tire failure. This can cause applies to vehicles with All Wheel
• When winter tires or all season tires are loss of vehicle control and lead to Drive.
mounted, make sure you observe the an accident and personal injury. When you install snow chains,
speed limitations for which the tire is rated. • Never operate a vehicle at check the tire air pressure first to
The following speed rating code letters are speeds greater than the maximum make sure it's correct, otherwise the
applicable: speed rating of its tires. chains will not fit the wheel prop­
0 - up to 1 00 mph (160 km/h) • Always observe speed limits erly.
Only use chains with fine pitch links protrud­
ing no more than 1h inch ( 1 5 mm), including
T - up to 1 1 8 mph (1 90km/h) and adjust your vehicle to prevail­
ing road and traffic conditions.
H - up to 130 mph (210 lcm/h). tensioner, from tire tread and side walls.
Wheels must rotate freely in all steering
Snow chains positions with chains mounted to prevent
damage to body, axle or brake components.
• For engineering reasons, snow chains Drive slowly and follow the chain
must only be installed on special winter ti­ manufacturer's instructions.
res• 1 ).
Remove chains when roads are free of
snow. Otherwise, the chains can damage
the tires and impair vehicle handling.

1 1 Not available at the time o f printing.

261
VEHICLE CARE
Difficult operating Additional accessories, Modifications and
conditions Parts replacement

Driving under difficult Your vehicle incorporates the latest safety Cl In your own interest, we advise

conditions design features ensuring a high standard of you to use only expressly approved
active and passive safety. This safety could Audi accessories and genuine Audi
Your Audi has been designed and equipped be compromised by non-approved changes spare parts.
for normal operating conditions. This also to the original new-vehicle condition. For
applies to the frequency and the extent of These parts and accessories have
this reason, if parts have to be replaced or been specially designed to be used
service requirements as stated in the Main­ if any modifications are made to the vehicle,
tenance brochure. on your vehicle.
please observe the following points when
If you are planning to drive your vehicle un­ installing additional accessories: • Approved Audi accessories and genuine
der difficult operating conditions (for exam­ Audi parts are available from authorized
• Always cons�lt an authorized Audi
ple, continuous trailer towing, very hot or Audi Dealers.
Dealer before purchasing accessories and
cold weather, very dusty conditions, poor before any modifications are carried out. These dealers also have the necessary facil­
fuel quality, etc.) you may want to make ities, tools and trained specialists to install
special preparations such as changing to an the parts and accessories properly.
appropriate oil viscosity, having your vehicle
thoroughly inspected, etc. Furthermore, the
maintenance should always be matched to
the operating conditions (see page 228).

262
------ DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE
Emergency
First aid kit warning triangle

• Make sure the first-aid kit must

meet all legal requirements.
• Don't forget to look at the expira­
tion data on the contents of your
first-aid kit. If the date has expired,
you should purchase another one as
soon as possible.

The first aid kit can be stowed in the center The factory-supplied warning triangle is
armrest (rear seats). The design of the cen­ fitted on the inside of the luggage compart­
ter armrest varies from model to model. ment lid.
Here we show it in two versions. To open the cover, turn the knob 90°
To open, pull the handle in front. Remove the emergency triangle (arrow).
Maxmimum load is 00 lbs. (0.5 kg) If you no longer have your original warning
triangle and to equip your vehicle with a
new one, contact your authorized Audi
Dealer for advice.

263
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------
Jack and tools

� WARNING ,... WARNING continued

• Always make sure the jack. the • Using a bumper jack to raise the
tools, the spare tire and even a flat vehicle will cause damage to the
tire are secured in place and not bumper system. Also, the jack may
loose, otherwise they could fly for­ slip, causing injury.
ward causing personal injury to • Do not support your vehicle on
passengers in the vehicle in an ac­ cinder blocks, bricks or other ob­
cident or sudden maneuver. jects. These may not be able to
• The jack must never be used as support the load and could cause
a support to work underneath the injury.
vehicle. If the jack is accidentally • Do not start or run the engine
The jack and vehicle tools are stored
dislodged, you could be seriously while the vehicle is supported by
behind the left luggage compartment trim
injured. the jack.
panel in a tool box. • Before you use the jack, be sure • If you must work under the ve­
To get to the tools, lift the box by the handle
the ground is level and firm. If nec­ hicle, always usa safety stands
(see illustration).
essary, use a sturdy board under specifically designed for this pur­
the jack. pose.
To install, lay the tool box on the lower
mounting in the vehicle and then push it to
the rear until you hear it lock into place.

264
 DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

Your vehicle comes equipped with the fol­ Note

lowing tools: Never use the hexagonal opening in
- Vehicle jack the handle of the screwdriver to
Before storing the jack, make sure it is loosen or tighten the wheel bolts.
wound back down as far as it will go.
Hook for removing hook caps � WARNING
- Lug wrench
Always make sure the spare tire
Plastic pin for changing wheels and even a flat tire are secured in
- Screwdriver with a hexagonal opening in place and not loose, otherwise
the handle for removing wheel bolts. they could fly forward causing per­
The screwdriver has a reversible blade sonal injury to passengers in the
(flat blade on one end and Phillips head vehicle in an accident or sudden
on the other). maneuver.
- Open ended wrench 1 0 x 1 3
- Towing loop for transporting the vehicle
(see page 281).

265
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ----

Spare wheel
The following points must be ob­ • For engineering reasons, snow chains
served when the deflated full size must not be used on the deflated full size
spare tire is used: spare tire.
• The deflated full size spare tire is If the vehicle must be driven with snow
only designed for brief, temporary chains, and one of its rear tires is flat, you
use. Therefore, replace it with a nor­ will first need to install the collapsible rear ti­
mal wheel as soon as possible. re on the front axle. This is because for engi­
• Never drive at speeds over 50 mph neering reaons snow chains can only be in­
(80 km/h). Avoid jackrabbit starts, hard bra­ stalled on special winter tires* 1 ) and only
king and aggressive turns! on rear wheels.
• Do not take the vehicle to automatic car
After you've installed the spare tire on the
washes when the deflated full size spare front axle, install the snow chain on the
tire is installed. wheel you've removed from the front axle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a spare wheel and then install this wheel on the rear axle
(deflated full size spare tire) and an accom­ • The deflated full size spare tire was de­ in place of the wheel whose tire is flat. As
panying compressor. veloped especially for your vehicle model. It soon as possible, correct the tire pressure
The deflated full size spare tire and com­ must not be used on other models. Simi­ to the proper setting.
pressor are located beneath the floor of the larly, do not use spare wheels from other ve­
• Never install normal or winter tires on the
luggage compartment. The spare wheel is hicle models on your car.
deflated full size spare tire rim.
held down by a knurled bolt.
• Never drive the vehicle with more than
On vehicle's equipped with a children's one deflated full size spare tire installed.
bench seat, the seat must be folded back to
allow the spare wheel to be removed - see
page 94.
"Changine a wheel" and "Inflating the de­
flated full size spare tire" - see page 267.

11 N ot available at the time of printing.

266
 DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

Changing a wheel
• The deflated full size spare tire cannot be
repaired or mounted using conventional � WARNING �� WARNING continued
shop equipment. This work always has to You or your passengers could be • After installing the spare wheel,
be performed by the manufacturer of the injured while changing a wheel if make sure that you remount the
collapsible tire. you do not follow safety precau­ flat tire/Wheel in its storage area
• All the air must be let out of the tire after tions: properly and tighten the plastic
use before stowing it in the storage area • If you have a flat tire, move a knurled screw securely.
provided for it in the vehicle. Once all the air safe distance off the road. Turn off • To help prevent the vehicle from
is out, the tire will return to its original form. the engine, turn the emergency moving suddenly and possibly
To let the air out of the tire, either use a flasher on and use other warning slipping off the jack, always fully
sharp object to press down on the metal pin devices to alert other motorists. set the parking brake and block
in the valve, or use the valve-removing tool • Passengers must not remain in the wheel diagonally opposite the
on the back side of the dust cap to unscrew the vehicle when it is jacked up. wheel being changed. When one
the valve stem. This includes children as well as front wheel is lifted off the
adults. ground, placing the automatic
transmission in P (Park) will not
• Make sure that passengers wait
prevent vehicle movement.
in a safe place away from the ve­
hicle and well away from the road­
way and traffic.
• Before you change a wheel, be
sure the ground is level and firm.
If necessary, use a sturdy board
under the jack.

267
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

·"7 r.- & .- -·t I In the jack mode. the LED's on the control
�
. ... ,.. . . .
- ------- buttons (1) and (3), the yellow LED in the
.... ... . . ...
-
' . .. . ...
manual mode on the ride level display (2) as
.. - - . . well as the ride level control indicator light
on the instrument cluster must all be on
(see page 1 23).
J • Now switch off the ignition and change
the tire.
Shutting off the jack mode once
you've finished changing the tire
You can shut off the jack mode again by si­
multaneously pessing buttons (1) and (3) for
Step 1
at least 5 seconds. The indicator light in the
instrument cluster, the LED for the manual Step 2
To avoid damaging parts of the air mode, and the LED's in the control buttons Take jack, tools and spare wheel out of the
suspension system. you must have will go out. luggage compartment.
the ride level adjustment system in The hub caps can be removed with the hook
The original state of the system and full
the jack mode whenever a jack or lift which is provided in the vehicle's tool kit.
functionality of the ride height control sys­
is used to raise the vehicle:
tem will be restored. Insert the hook into a hole and pull the hub
Activating the jack mode In addition, the jack mode is automatically cap off.
• Before using the jack or lift to raise the ve­ deactivated when the vehicle speed of
hicle, you must press buttons ( 1 ) and (3) at about 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.
the same time for at least 5 seconds with
the ignition switched on.

268
------ DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

B4B·744

On wheels equipped with a bolt-on Step 3 Step 4

hubcap• (double spoke design) the
mounting bolts (see arrows) must, • Mount the lug wrench over the wheel • Position the vehicle jack under the ve­
for safety reasons, never be loose­ bolt all the way and turn to the left - see il­ hicle closest to the wheel to be changed:
ned. lustration. When doing this, hold the lug The arrows in the illustration show the loca­
wrench at the end. tions on the vehicle underbody where you
If the wheel bolts do not come loose, you should place the jack.
can push the end of the lug wrench, if nec­ The jack should be placed approximately
essary, using your foot. Make sure you are 6 in. (1 5 em) behind the front wheel, or
standing firmly on the ground and hold on to 1 0 in. (25 em) in front of the rear wheel.
the vehicle for support.
Loosen all wheel bolts about one turn.
Do not yet remove the -bolts.

Always heed all WARNINGS

on next page.

269
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

� WARNING � WARNING
You or your passengers could be o Do not raise the vehicle until

injured while changing a wheel if you are sure the jack is securely
you do not follow safety precau­ engaged.
tions: • Passengers must not remain in
• Jacking at any other place may the vehicle when it is jacked up.
damage the vehicle or may result • Make sure that passengers wait
in personal injuries. in a safe place away from the ve­
• An unstable surface under the hicle and well away from the road­
jack may cause the vehicle to slip way and traffic.
off the jack. Always provide a firm
base for the jack on the ground. If
necessary. use a sturdy board un­ Step 5 • To raise the vehicle, turn the handle
der the jack. • Turn the handle on the jack until the jack clockwise. Only raise the vehicle as much
• On hard. slippery surface (such arm just fits underneath the vehicle. as is needed to change a wheel.
as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar
• Position the jack arm on the lower sill of
to prevent the jack from slipping.
the vehicle so that the rib in the recess is
surrounded by the jack claw (A) and the
movable base plate (8) of the jack lies flat on
the floor.
When you straighten the jack, make sure
claw doesn't slip off the rib.

270
------ DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

l<:z� • Mount the spare tire and remount the

wheel bolts lightly using the screwdriver

(r . -
handle. Then unscre�J'o4the plastic pin and in­
sert the remaining wheel bolt.
The wheel bolts must be clean and easy to
turn.
• lighten all wheel bolts slightly with the
lug wrench.

Step & • Install plastic pin in its place.

• Unscrew the wheel bolt nearest the top, Inserting the pin in the bolt hole assures that
using the screwdriver handle (see above il­ the holes in the wheel are in line with the
lustration). Place it on a clean surface (for threaded holes in the wheel hub.
example inside the hub cap, or on a piece of • Then fully unscrew the other wheel bolts
toweling) next to the jack and remove the and remove the wheel leaving the plastic
wheel. pin in the bolt hole.
Remove any dirt or corrosion present on
mounting surface of wheel or vehicle be­
fore wheel replacement.

271
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

• Turn on the compressor. The required tire Step 9

pressure wil be reached within a few min­ • Slip the plastic cover over the wheel con­
utes. Use a pressure gauge to check the tire taining the flat tire. Then stow this wheel in
pressure. Never operate the compressor the luggage comopartment and secure it so
for longer than 5 minutes. that it does not shift.
Note
• Carefully observe the points on
You'll find adhesive labels on the deflated page 288 when using the deflated
full size spare tire containing i nstn.1ctions for full size spare tire.
using the tire as well as information on the
specified tire pressure. Notes
Step S • The hex socket in the screwdriver can be
used to make it easier to handle the wheel
Step 7
• Unscrew the pressure hose from the val­ bolts. To do this, pull out the reversible bla-
ve and screw the dust cap back on.
·

de.
Inflating the deflated full size • To lower the vehicle, turn the handle Never use this plastic tool to loosen
spare tire counter-clockwise until the jack is fully re­ or tighten the wheel bolts.
• Remove the dust cap from the valve (1 l leased. Remove jack. After you change a tire:
by unscrewing it. • Then go crosswise from one bolt to
• Deactivating the jack moda - see
• Take the pressure compressor hose out
another tightening them firmly. page 268.
of the case, and screw the coupling nut se­ • If necessary, press the hubcap back onto
• Use a torque wrench to check the
curely onto the valve. the hub of the spare wheel. wheel bolt tightening torque as
• Insert the compressor· connector in to soon as possible. With alloy wheels
the socket located on the side of the lug­ and a deflated full size spare tire, the
gage compartment or inset it ino the ciga­ torque should be 88.5 ft-lb (120
rette lighter socket - see page 1 8 1 . Nm).

272
 DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

• Be sure to check the tire pressure Note

as quickly as possible after you
m WA R N I N G Remember that the deflated full size
install a wheal that is fitted with • If you are going to equip your ve­ spare tire is for temporary use only!
new tires. hicle with tires or rims which dif­
If you notice while changing a tire fer from those which were factory
that the wheal bolts are corroded installed, then be sure to read the
and difficult to turn, then they information on page 257.
should be replaced before you • Always store damaged wheel,
check the tightening torque. jack and tools securely in luggage
Until then, drive with extra care and compartment.
at reduced speeds.

273
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

Fuses
Replacing a fuse • Replace the blown fuse with a fuse of the
same amperage. You can recognize the
� WAR N I N G blown fuse by the burnt metal strip.
• Reinstall the fuse box cover.
A fuse with too high amperage
could damage the electrical part
and cause a fire. Do not use a fuse Notes
with a higher amperage than the · • If a fuse blows repeatedly. do not
fuse being replaced. keep on replacing it. The cause of
the short circuit or overload must be
found. On no account should fuses
• To avoid damaging the electrical be repaired (e.g. patched up with tin
system. turn off all lights and acces­ foil or wire) as this may cause seri­
A problem in the electrical system may be sories and remove the ignition key ous damage elsewhere in the electri­
caused by a blown fuse. before replacing a fuse. cal circuit or cause fire.
Fuses are arranged in a centralized unit. The • Open the cover of the centralized unit by • Some of the equipment listed is found on
unit is located behind a cover at the end of inserting a screwdriver in the slot of the certain models only or may be options.
the dashboard on the left hand side. cover and pry it off.
The crank handle for manual operation of • Check the fuse listing on the next pages Color codes:
the electric sunroof* is clipped on the inside to find out which fuse belongs to the com­
of the fuse box cover. ponent that has failed. light brown: . . . . . • _ . . . .
. __ . _ . 5 amps
Two spare fuses are provided in the row of brown: . . . . . _ 7.5 amps
• Remove blown fuse with the plastic clip
fuses on the right. red: . . . . . . . 1 0 amps
provided. The clip is located on the holder in
.

the fuse box. light blue: . . 1 5 amps

It is a good idea to keep a supply of spare yellow: . . . . . 20 amps
fuses on hand. They are available from your
Audi Dealer. transparent (white): . . • 25 amps
light green: . . 30 amps

274
 DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

No. A1l No.

5- Instrument cluster, seat heating, 14 - Interior lights, reading lights,
test connection for cruise control, anti-theft alarm system,
bulb monitor, Automatic vanity mirror, seat memory . . . . . . . 1 0
Transmission display, switch lighting, 1 5 - Instrument cluster, climate control,
mirror switches and actuators, mirror and seat memory, .
airbag warning light, outside navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
temperature indicator, climate
control, solar roof, acoustic parking 1 6 - Electronic Stability Programm . . . . . 5
assistance system, navigation­ 1 7 - Navigation system, 4 Level Air
system, car telephone, 4 Level Air Suspension, automatic headlight
Suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 0
! B45-087C I . . .

6 - Power locking system . . . . . . . . . 5 1 8 - High-beam, right . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

. . .

Fuse arrangement 7 - Anti-lock brake system (ABS), 1 9 - High-beam, left . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 10

No. A11 brake light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 20 � Low beam, right, headlight
1 - Heated washer jets -. . 5 8 - Car telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .. 15
. . . • .

2 - Turn signals . . . . . . . .
. . 10 9 - Heated mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 2 1 - Low beam, left, headlight
1 0 - Automatic headlight adjustment . 5 adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3 - Headlight washer (relay)
illumination for glove compartment, 1 1 - Cruise control 22 - Side marker and tail light, right . 5
climate control, Automatic (Automatic Transmission) . . . 10 23 - Side marker and tail light, left . . . . . 5
Transmission, instrument cluster . . . 5 1 2 - On Board Diagnostic system . . . . 1 0 _ 24 - Wiper and washer system . . 25
4 - License plate light . . . 5
1 3 - Brake lights . . . . .
. 10 25 - Blower for heating (climate
control), solar roof 30

l) Amps

275
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

No. A11 No. A11 Automatic circuit breakers

26 - Rear window defogger, 35 - Vacant The electric power windows and the elec­
air recirculation . . . . . . . . 30 36 - Front fog lights, tric seat adjusters are protected with circuit
27 - Heated steering wheel, rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . 15 breakers which reset automatically after
rear window wiper , . . . . . 15 37 - Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
the circuit overload has been corrected.
28 - Fuel pump . . . . . . . , . . . . 20 38 - Luggage compartment light,
29 - Engine timing . . . . . . . . . . 30 power locking system . . . . . . . . . . 20
30 - Power roof . . . . .
. .... 20 39 - Emergency flasher system . . . . . . 1 5 .

31 - Back-up lights, cruise control, 40 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

-

Automatic Transmission, 41 - Anti-lock brake system (ABS) . . . . 25

data link connector for
On Board Diagnostic, 42 - Electronic Stability Programm . . . 25 .

automatic dimmng inside mirror 15 43 - $-contact (radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

32 - Engine timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 44 - Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 30
33 - Cigarette lighter 15
34 - Engine timing 15

1 l Amps

276
------ DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE
Installing I
Replacing bulbs replacing a radio
It is becoming increasingly more and more Gas discharge lamps f you wish to install a radio or replace the
difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs since (Xenon lights)• factory installed radio, please note the fol­
in many cases, other parts of the car must lowing:
first be removed before you are able to get Your vehicle may be equipped with gas dis­
charge lamps. Due to the high electrical • The factory installed radio connectors are
to the bulb. This applies especially to the designed for Genuine Audi Radios.
light bulbs in the front of your car which you voltage, have the bulbs exchanged by a
can only reach through the engine compart­ qualified technician. When installing a different radio, difficulties
ment. Headlights with xenon light are identified by could arise such as:
For your safety, we recommend that you the high voltage sticker(see symbol above). - the radio may not fit into the space pro­
have your authorized Audi Dealer replace vided
any bulbs for you, since your dealer has nec­ � WARNING - the electrical connections may not be
essary tools, the correct bulbs and the ex­ compatible
pertise. Only your authorized Audi Dealer - different connector terminals may be
or a qualified workshop should needed.
g Always heed all WARNINGS change the bulbs in gas discharge
• Therefore, we recommend that you have
lamps (xenon light). Due to the
� on page 232. your authorized Audi Dealer install or re­
high voltage, improper handling
can cause serious personal injury.
place the radiO.
They are the most familiar with the techni­
cal features of your vehicle. They also offer
Genuine Audi Radios with the necessary
installation components and instructions.

� WA R N I N G
Improperly installing a radio could
cause a short circuit.
This could result in an electrical
fire.

277
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

Emergency starting
Note
Starting by pushing or towing
�, WARNING continued ,Al WARNING continued
Your vehicle with automatic trans­ • A discharged battery can al­ • The voltage of the booster bat­
mission cannot be started by push­ ready freeze at temperatures just tery must also have a 12-Volt rat­
ing or towing. below 32 °F (0 °C). Before connect· ing.
ing a jumper cable. the frozen bat­ The capacity (Ah) of the booster
tery must be thawed completely. battery should not be lower than
Starting with jumper cables otherwise it could explode. that of the discharged battery. Use
• Do not allow battery acid to con· of batteries of different voltage or
� WARNING tact ayes or skin. Flush any con­ substantially different Ah rating
tacted area with water immediate­ may cause an explosion and per­
• Batteries contain electricity. ly. sonal injury.
acid. and gas. Any of these can • Use of batteries of different
• Improper use of a booster bat­
cause vary serious or fatal injury. voltage or substantially different
tery to start a vehicle may cause an
Follow the instructions below for amp. (Ah) rating may causa an ex­
explosion.
safe handling of your vahicle"s bat· plosion and Injury. The capacity
tery. • Vehicle batteries generate ex­
(Ah) of the booster battery should
• Always shield your ayes and
plosive gases. Keep sparks. flame
not be lower than that of the dis­
and lighted cigarettes away from
avoid leaning over the battery charged battery.
whenever possible. batteries.
• Do not try to jump start any ve­
hicle with a low acid level in the
battery.

278
------ DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

Note Use of jumper cables Removing the battery cover - see

• Applying a higher voltage booster page 245.
battery will cause expensive dam­ � WARNING Improper hook-up of jumper cables
age to sensitive electronic compo­ can ruin the generator.
Always connect POSITIVE (+ ) to
• To avoid serious personal Injury
nents, such as control units, relays,
POSITIVE (+). and NEGATIVE (-) to
radio, etc. and damage to the vehicle, heed
all warnings and instructions of
• Vehicle with discharged battery: NEGATIVE (-).
the jumper cable manufacturer.
Turn off lights and accessories, move lever If in doubt, call for road service.
of automatic transmission to N (Neutral) • The jumper cables must be long
or P (Park) and set parking brake. enough so that the vehicles do not
touch.
• When connecting jumper
cables, make sure that they cannot
get caught in any moving parts in
the engine compartment.

279
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ----

1 Connect clamp of plus cable to positive 5 Start the engine of the vehicle with the
(+)
- -

terminal (1 ) of discharged vehicle booster battery. Run the engine at a

battery. moderate speed.
2- Connect clamp on opposite end of 6- Start engine with discharged vehicle
cable to positive (+) terminal (2) of battery in the usual manner.
booster battery. If engine fails to start, do not continue
3 - Connect clamp of minus cable (black) to to crank but contact your nearest Audi
negative (-) terminal (3) of booster bat­ Dealer or qualified workshop.
tery. 7 With engine running, remove jumper
4- Connect clamp on opposite end of neg­ cables from both vehicles in exact re­
ative cable to the negative (-) terminal verse order: Steps 4 thru 1 .
(4) of the discharged vehicle battery.
Check that all screw plugs on
A - Discharged vehicle battery the battery calls are screwed in
B - Booster battery firmly. If not, tighten plugs prior
to connecting clamp on negative
battery terminal.
11r,:!1 Always heed all WARNINGS
r!!l on page 232.

280
------- DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

Emergency towing with commercial tow truck

The following information is to be used by
commercial tow truck operators who know
how to operate their equipment safely.
General hints
• Never tow your Audi otherwise
this will cause damage to the engine
and transmission.
• Never wrap the safety chains or
winch cables around the brake lines.
• To prevent unnecessary damage.
your Audi must be transported with
a car carrier (flat bed truck).
Front towing anchorage Screw the towing eye tightly into the
C?n the right side under the bumper, you'll
To load the vehicle on to the flat bed. threaded hole until it stop turning.
use the towing loop found in the ve­
hicle tool kit and attach to the front fmd a threaded hole. Screw the towing loop After us.e, unscrew the towing loop and put
anchorage. into this hole. 1t back In the tool kit. The towing loop
must always be kept in the vehicle.
In ord.er to access the front towing anchor­
age, f1rst remove the front grille by pulling it When reinstalling the front grille, first insert
� WARNING off - see illustration. the tabs into the guides provided for them.
Then push grill back into place.
A towed vehicle i s not safe for pas­
sengers. Never allow anyone to
ride in a towed vehicle for any rea­
son.

281
00-/T-YOURSELF SERV/CE ----

Rear hook up
• Center the vehicle in relation to the car
carrier ramp.
• Attach the winch hook to the towing an­
chorage in the rear.
Check carefully to make sure the
hook-up is secure before moving the
car up the car carrier ramp.

Rear towing anchorage Front hook up

The rear towing anchorage can be found on • Center the vehicle in relation to the car
the right side of the vehicle, under the bum­ carrier ramp.
per. It is covered by a flap. • Attach the towing loop in the front se­
To access the anchorage, you must first re­ curely.
move the flap: • Attach the winch hook to the towing
The cover has four quick release fasteners, loop.
tener ( 1 ) to the left 1I4 of a turn. Now remove
two on each side. Using a coin, turn the fas­
Check carefully to make sure the
the flap. hook-up is secure before moving the
car up the car carrier ramp.
To reinstall, re-insert the flap and turn the
fasteners to the right.

282
 DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

Lifting vehicle

Lifting with workshop hoist � WARNING �� WARNING continued

and with floor jack
• To reduce the risk of serious in­ • If you must lift your vehicle with
Notes
jury and vehicle damage, lift the a floor jack to work underneath,
• The vehicle should never be lifted vehicle only at the special work­ be sure the vehicle is safely sup­
or jacked up from underneath the shop hoist and floor jack lift points ported on stands intended for this
engine oil pan, the transmission illustrated. Failure to lift the ve­ purpose.
housing, the front or rear axle or the hicle at these points could cause
body side members. This could lead the vehicle to tilt or fall from a lift
to serious damage. if there is a change in vehicle • Before driving over a workshop
The same lifting points as illustrated on the weight distribution and balance. hoist, check that the vehicle weight
next page for the hoist also apply when a This might happen, for example, does not exceed the permissible lift­
floor jack is used. when heavy components such as ing capacity of the hoist.
e To avoid damage to the under­ the engine block or transmission • Before driving over a workshop
body or chassis frame, it is neces­ are removed. hoist, ensure that there is suHicient
sary to insert a rubber pad between • When removing such heavy clearance between the hoist and
the floor jack and the lift points. components, anchor vehicle to low parts of the vehicle.
hoist or add corresponding
• To prevent damaging the shock
weights to maintain the center of
absorbers when lifting the vehicle
gravity. Otherwise, the vehicle
with a jack or on a hoist, the level
might tilt or slip oH the hoist,
selection must be in the jack mode.
causing serious damage or person­
See next page.
al injury.

283
DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE ------

Deactivating
To deactivate the jack mode, press buttons
( 1 ) and (3) at the same time for at least 5
seconds. The warning light in the instru­
ment cluster, the LED for manual mode, and
the LED's on the control buttons will all turn
off.
The original system state and full functional­
ity of the ride height system are now re­
stored.
In addition, the jack mode will automatically
be deactivated when vehicle speed ex­
ceeds 3 mph (5 krn/h).
Jack mode Lifting points
Activating The lift arms and the floor jack must be ap­
.� WARNING plied beneath these points only.
Before lifting the vehicle with a jack or lift,
press buttons ( 1 ) and (3) at the same Make certain that n o one is lying Lifting point front
time for at least 5 seconds with the ignition under the vehicle or has his I her The lifting point is located on the floor pan
switched on. head or hands in the wheel house reinforcement about at the same height as
When the system is in the jack mode, the while the ride height is changing the jack mounting point.
LED's on control buttons (1) and (3), the yel­ or when a iack is being used.
Do not lift the vehicle at the vertical sill rein­
low LED for the manual mode on the level forcement.
indicator (2) and the warning light for level
control in the instrument cluster (see pa­
ge 1 23) will all come on.
Once this happens, turn off the ignition.The
vehicle can now be lifted.

284
------ DO-IT-YOURSELF SERVICE

Lifting with vehicle jack

Refer to "Changing a wheel" on page 267

Lifting point rear

The lifting point is located on the vertical re­
inforcement of the lower sill for on-board
jack.

285
 TECHNICAL DATA -------

Engine data

Maximum output SAE net 250 hp at 5800 rpm

Maximum torque SAE net 258 ft. lbs. at 1850 rpm
No. of cylinders 6
Displacement 1 63 CID (2671 cm3)
Stroke 3.40 in (86,4 mm)
Bore 3.19 in (81 .0 mm)
Compression ratio 9.3 : 1
Fuel1l Premium unleaded
1 1 For further details see "Fuel supply" on
page 225.

286
 TECHNICAL DATA

Capacities

Capacities (approx.)

Fuel tank • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 0 • • • 0 • • 1 8.5 gal (70 liters)

Reserve (of total capacity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 gal (9 liters)

Windshield and headlight washer container . . 5.0 quarts (4.7 liters)

Engine oil
with filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . 6.0 quarts (5.7 liters)
The oil level should be checked while topping up.
Do not overfill see page 235.
-

Always head all WARNINGS

on page 232.

287
 TECHNICAL DATA --
---

Dimensions

Dimensions (approx.) 1 I

Length 1 89.4 in 4810 mm

Width across mirrors 76.1 in 1 932 mm
Height unloaded
- Low level 60.1 in 1 526 mm
- Highest level 62.7 in 1 592 mm
Ground clearance loaded
- Low level 5.6 in 142 mm
- Highest level 8.2 in 208 mm
Turning circle diameter 38.3 ft 1 1 .70 m

Note
1J The specifications refer to the basic model. When driving up steep ramps, on rough
Differences may occur depending on the roads, over curbs, etc. it is important to re­
model type and options ordered, for example, member that some parts of your vehicle,
tire sizes.
such as spoilers or exhaust system compo­
nents, may be close to the ground.
Be careful not to damage them.

288
 TECHNICAL DATA

Weights
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Notes
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) � WARNING • The vehicle capacity weight fig­
for front and rear are listed on a sticker on ures apply when the load is distrib­
• The actual Gross Axle Weight
the left door jamb. uted evenly in the vehicle (passengers
Rating at the front and rear axles
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating in­ should not exceed the permissible and luggage). When transporting a
cludes the weight of the basic vehicle plus weights, and their combination heavy load in the luggage compart·
full fuel tank, oil and coolant, plus maximum must nbt exceed the Gross Vehicle ment, carry the load as near to the
load, which combines passenger weight Weight Rating. rear axle as possible so that the ve­
(150 lbs/68 kg per designated seating posi­ hicle's handling is not impaired.
•Exceeding permissible weight
tion) and luggage weight.
ratings can result in vehicle dam­ • Do not exceed the maximum per­
Luggage weight is not increased by the use age, accidents and personal injury. missible axle loads or the maximum
of a roof rack, unless the passenger capac­ Gross Vehicle Weight.
ity is reduced accordingly. Always remember that the vehicle's
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the The vehicle capacity weight (max. handling will be affected by the ex­
maximum load that can be applied at each load) is listed inside the fuel filler flap. tra load. Therefore, adjust your
axle of the vehicle. speed accordingly.
• Always observe local regulations.

289
TECHNICAL DATA -------

Vehicle identification
Roof weight The safety compliance sticker
The maximum permissible roof weight is is your assurance that your new vehicle
200 lbs (1 00 kg). complies with all applicable Federal Motor
Only use the roof rack system specifically Vehicle Safety Standards which were in ef­
designed, tested and approved by Audi. fect at the time the vehicle was manufac­
tured. You can find this sticker on the left
Distribute the load evenly and do not ex­ door jamb. It shows the month and year of
ceed the Permissible Roof Weight (in­ production and the vehicle identification
cluding the weight of the roof rack system) number of your vehicle (perforation) as well
or the Gross Vehicle Weight. as the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
For more details see page 1 9 1 . and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The Vehicle Identification

Number (YIN)
is located on the driver's side so that it is vis­
ible from the outside through the wind­
shield - see illustration.

290
 TECHNICAL DATA

5 - Engine and transmission code letter The high voltage warning label
6 - Paint no. I Interior is located on the lock carrier.
7 - Optional equipment numbers The spark ignition system meets all
Vehicle data 2 to 7 are also found in your requirements of the Canadian Inter­
Maintenance booklet. ference-Causing Equipment Regula­
tions.

D Always heed all WARNlNGS

f!!l on page 232.

The vehicle identification label

is located in the luggage compartment un­
der the carpeted cover in the recess of the
spare wheel.
1 Production control no.
-

2 Vehicle identification no.

-

3 - Type code number

4 - Type designation/
Engine output in Kilowatts

291
CONSUMER INFORMAnON -------

Reporting safety defects Outside the U.S.A. or Canada

(Applicable to U.S. only) Operating your vehicle outside • service may be inadequate due to lack of
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect the U.S.A. or Canada proper service facilities, tools or testing
which could cause a crash or could cause in­ equipment;
Government regulations in the United
jury or death, you should immediately in­ States and Canada require that automobiles • replacement parts may not be readily
form the National Highway Traffic Safety meet specific emission regulations and available.
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to noti­ safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built Audi cannot be responsible for me­
fying Audi of America, Inc. for·the U.S.A. and Canada differ from ve­ chanical damage that could result
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it hicles sold in other countries. from inadequate fuel, service or
may open an investigation, and if it finds If you plan to take your vehicle outside the parts availability.
that a safety defects exists in a group of ve­ continental limits of the United States or
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam­ Canada, there is the possibility that
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become in­
• unleaded fuels for vehicles with catalytic
volved in individual problems between you,
your dealer, or Audi of America, Inc. converter may not be available;
• fuel may have a considerably lower oc­
To contact NHTSA. you may either call the tane rating. Improper fuel may cause engine
Auto Safety Hotline toll-free at: damage;
1 -800-424-9393
(or 366-0123 in Washington, D.C. area)
or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. DepartmentofTransportation,
washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

292
 CONSUMER INFORMATION

Service Repair Manuals

Audi Official Factory service manuals are
published as soon as possible after model
introduction.
Service manuals are available from either of
the following sources:
Robert Bentley, Inc.
Order directly from the publisher: Call toll­
free 1 (800) 423-4595 (from the United
States and Canada, 8:30 AM to 5:00 PM
EST) or go to www.rb.com on the Inter­
net.
Dyment Distribution, Inc.
Call toll-free 1 (800) 544-8021 from 8:00
AM to 8:00 PM, EST. Monday thru Friday.

293
NOTES

294
--

--- NO�S

295
ALPHABEnCAL INDEX ------

A Airbag system . •

- Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . • • • . . . . 25
41
B
Acoustic park assist 1 12 - Disposal . . . . . . . . . • • . • . .. 41 Back-up lights - Automatic
Adding - Front airbags . ... . . .... .. 25 transmission . 108
- Brake fluid . . . 242 - How it works (front airbag) . .. 27 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • 244
- Engine coolant . . . . . • • • 240 - Seating position .. 29 - Charging . . . . • . . • . . . . . 246
- Engine oil . . . . . . . . • . • . . _ _ 236 - Service . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . 41 - Replacing . .... 248

Additional accessories . . 262 Alarm system . . • . . . . • • • • . . . . 67 - Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . 245

Adjustable steering column . .... 98 All Wheel Drive . . .. 207 Belt tensioner . . . . . . • • • . • . . . 24
Adjusting Alternator . .... 120, 127 Body cavity sealing . 220
- Climate controls . . . . .. . . .. 1 63 Ambient lighting . . . . . . . _ . . ... 172 Bolt-on hubcap . . . . . . . . . • .. 269

- Head restraints . • . ... . 75, 79 Anti-Lock Brake System . . • . . . . 202 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. _ . 48
- Mirrors . . . . .. . . . • • . . .. ... 72 Anti-theft alarm system . .. . ... 67 Boot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
- Seats . . . . . . . ... . 76 Armrest . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . 85, 263 Brake booster . . .. . . . ... . . . ... . 201
Brake fluid
. . . . . . . . . . . .

- Washer jets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Armrest with telephone . . . . . _ . . 1 90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . • . . 242

Air circulation - luggage compart- Ashtray . ......... . .. . 1 80 Brake fluid reservoir . .. 242
ment . . .....
. . . . 89
. . . . . . . . .
Auto-Check System . . . 1 38 Braking . ...... . . . . 201
Air cleaner . . . . . . . . . .. . _ . . . . . . . 248 Automatic air recirculation . ..... 164 Break-in period . . • . .. . . 193
Air conditioning . . . . . . . , . . 162 Automatic headlight adjustment . 1 48 Bulb replacing . • . . . • • • • . . • 277
Air outlets . .... 165 Automatic shift lock . . . .... . . 1 06 Buzzer 1 13
Air recirculation . . . • • • , • • .. 1 64 Automatic transmission . . .... 1 04
Air suspension . 1 53 - Back-up lights . . . . . . . . . . . 1 08
Air vents . . . . . . • . . ... . 165 - Ignition key safety interlock 1 04
Airbag . .. . . ... . . .... . . 25 - Reverse 1 08
- System components 25 - Tiptronic 105

?00
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

c
Chime
Cigarette lighter
... 57, 1 1 3, 1 49
1 81
D
Capacities . . . • • • . • . . . . . . . . • o o 287 Cleaning Dashboard . . . . . . • • • • . • • . • . . . . 8
Care of - Engine compartment . . . . . . 219 Data . . . . . . . o • • • • • • • • • • • • • 286
- exterior . 212 - G lass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 7 Date display . . . . . . • . . 0 • 117
- interior . . 217 - Inside of vehicle . . . . 217 Daytime running lights . 148
Cargo net . . 89 - Leather upholstery . . .. . . . 217 Deflated full size spare tire . . . . . 266
earphone . . • • . . • • 190 - Outside of vehicle . . . . . • . . 212 Defrosting windows . . . . . . . • . . . 1 51
Catalytic converter • . . . • • o 197 - Safety belts . ..... . . . . . . . . . 218 Difficult operating conditions .. . 262 .

CB radios . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . • . . . 1 89 - Windows· . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .. 215 Digital clock . . . . . . ....... . . . . 117

CD changer . . . . . . . ...... . ..... 1 84 Cleaning and protection . . ...... 2 1 2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 288
Central locking system . . . . . . 0 • • 59 Climate controls . . . . . . . . . . . . o • 1 62 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . 59
- Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . • . • . 63 Clock . . ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Driver information system . . . . . . 130
Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . o • • 267 Coat hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . • 179 - Calling up the menu . . . . . . . . 131
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . • 236 Com partment for Service - Display types . . . . . . . . . • . • 133
Checking engine oil level . .... . . 235 Literature Wallet . . . . . . . . . . .. . 1 83 .,) - Entering settings . . . . • . ..• . 1 34
Child restraint anchorages . . . . . . . 53 Convenient entry function . ... . . 1 01 - Menu display . . . . . . . • • • . . . 1 31
Child safety . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Convertible locking retractor . . . . . 51 - Navigation display . . . .. _ . . . . 1 30
Child safety lock for rear doors . . . 62 Convertible seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Driving economically . . .. 1 95
Child seat bench . . . . 92 Coolant temperature gauge . .... 1 1 8 Driving in foreign countries . .. . . 292
Child seats Cooling system . . . . . . . . 238 Driving on slopes . . . . .. ... . . .. 200
- Booster seats . . . . . . • • • • • . . 48 - Expansion tank 0 • • • • • • • • • 239 Driving under difficult conditions 262
- Convertible seats . . • . . o • • 47 Cruise control . . .. 1 58 Driving with Four-Wheel Drive . . 207
- Infant seats . . .. . . . . . . . . . . 45 Cup holder . . . . . . . . . • . • . . • . . 182 Duplicate key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
- Older children . . . • . . . . .. . . 49 Curb weight . . . . . . . . _ . . .. . . . 289

297
ALPHABETICAL INDEX ------

Dust filter . .. . . .... . . . . . . . . . . 167 - Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . 263 - Coolant . . . . . ..

. . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Dynamic headlight dimmer Emission control system . . . ... . 1 97 - Driving to minimize pollution
control . 1 44 and noise . . . . 195
- Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
- Malfunction Indicator Lamp 1 25

.. 223
Engine
- Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
- Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
• . .

E - Compartment
- Cooling . . . .
.

.
. . . • • • • .

. . . 238
232

- Starting procedures :. . . 1 14
253
. . . • . • •

- Tire pressure . . . .
. . . .

Electric adjustable seats . . . . .. . . 78 - Data 286

...... 225
. . . . . . . . • • • . . . . . . • . . . .

Electrical socket . . . . . . . . 181 - Hood 231 - Unleaded fuel

. .. 213
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . • •

Electrical socket i n the luggage - Oil . . . . . . • • . . . . . , • 234 - Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . _

compartment . ... . ....... . . 1 81 - Oil level . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 144 Exhaust system .. .. , . . , • . • • 1 97

Electrically heated seats . ... . . 150 .
- Oil pressure . . . ... . 143 Expansion tank . . • . . .. • ... 239
Electromagnetic interference - Oil sensor defective . . . . . . . 1 44
compliance . . . . ...... . ... . . 291
. Engine oil
Electronic differential lock . .. . .. 204
- Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . 236 F
Electronic immobilizer .... 57, 124
- Additives . 234
.

. . • • • • • . . . • •
Fan speed .. .. . . 164
Electronic speed limiter . . . .... . 129
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- Changing . • • . .. . 236 Fastening eyes 89

Electronic Stability Program
. . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . _

- Checking . . . . . 235 Fastening the safety belt 20

(ESP) . . . . .
. . _ . _ . . . . _ . _ .
. . 124, 152, 205
- Grades . 234 Filler cap . . . . . . . . .. 223
Emergency
.
.

- Temperature gauge 117 First aid kit 263

· - Flasher 1 25 , 1 52 . . . . . . . . . . • .

Entering selections into the Floor jack 283

- Key . . . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . •

menu .. . . . . . . . ... . ... . . . . 132

c£' Environment Floor mat fasteners 1 02
.

- Starting . _ . • • • • . . . • • . . . . 278 . . . •

- Towing . . . . .. . 281 Fluid

.. 243
. . . _ . . . _ . . .

- Brake fluid . - Brake 242

. 212
- Unlocking fuel tank flap . . . . . 224 . . . . . . . . . . • .

- Cleaning and protection . . . .

298
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX

- Capacities . . . • . . . . . . . . • . . . 287 - Engine oil temperature . . 1 17 High voltage label . . . . . • • . • 291

- Coolant . . . . . . .. 238 - Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Hood release . .. 231
- Windshield washer tank . .. . 250 - Odometer . . . . . • . . • . . • .. . 1 19 Hooks . . . . . . . . . • • • • • . . .. 89
Fog lights . . . . . . .. . . 149 - Speedometer . • . . . . . . . . . . 119 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . _ . . . . . . . . .. 8
Folding master key _ . . . . . . • . . 56 - Tachometer . . _ . _ . . . . . . . . . 117 Hydroplaning . ... 1 95, 207
Four-Wheel Drive . . . . . • • . . 207 General illustration .. . .. 8
Front airbags . . 25 Generator . . . . . . . . . ... . 1 20, 127
I
. . . . • • • .

Front axle load . . . • • . • • • . 289 Glove box light . . . . 1 78

Front fog lights . . . . . . . . 1 49 Glove compartment . . . . 1 78
Identification label . . 291
. . . . . . .

Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 76 Ground clearance . . . 153

Identification number . . . . . . . . . 290
. _ . .
.

Fuel - Tank capacity ..... . . . . . 222 Gross axle weight rating . . . . . . . 289
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fuel economy 1 95 Gross vehicle weight rating . . . . . 289
Ignition key safety interlock . . . . . 104
. . . . . . . . . • .

Fuel gauge . . ... 119

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 124
. . . • •

Fuel supply . . . . . . . 225

H Increasing size of luggage
. . . . . . . . . . • .

Fuel tank . . . . . • . .... .. . 222 compartment . . . . . . . . . . 88

- Capacity . 287 Indicator lights . . . . . . . 10, 122
Head airbags . . . 39
. • . • • . . • . . • • • .
. • • . . • • • .•.

Fuses . 274 Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Head restraints . . . ... 75
. . • . . . . • . . . • • . . . . . .
. . • .

Headlight adjustment . . • . • • . 1 48 Inside day-night mirror . 72

Headlight dimmer Installing a radio . . . . . . 277
G
. . . . . • , • . ... 1 56
Headlight flasher . . . . . . . . . . . • . . 157 Installing a roof rack . . 191
Garage door opener . . . • , • . . .. 173 Headlights - Cleaning . . 214 Installing wiper blades . . . . - . . . 251
Gas discharge lamps . . . 277 Heated seats . ........ 1 50 Instrument cluster . . . . .. 116
Gasoline additives . . . .. 227 Heated steering wheel . 150 Instrument illumination . 1 49
Gauges and instruments Heating . . . . ......... . 162 Instrument panel . . . .. . .. 8
- Coolant temperature 118 High beam . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . 1 25 Interior lights . ..... . . .. . . . .. 171
ALPHABEnCAL INDEX ------

J Light bulbs
Light switch
. .

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
.

.
• •

.
.

.
.
.
.

.
.

.
. ,

. • .
. • .

.
277
1 48
Menu button .

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . - . . . - . ... . .. . . 131
72
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . , • • • . . 269 Loading a roof rack 192 Mobile telephones . . . . . . ' . .. 189
Jack and tools . . . • • . . .. . 264 Lock positions of trunk lock Modifications ' . . . . . . . . .. . 262
Jack mode . .. . .... 155, 284 cylinder . ...... . . . . . 63
Jack support positions . . . . . . . 269 Locking retractor ... 51
N
. . . . . . . . • .
. .

Jumper cables . . .. . . . 278 Locking the vehicle . . • . . • ... 61

Locks
Navigation display 130
- Doors . . . 59
. . • . . • . . . .

K
. _ . . . . . . . . . • • .

Notes to owner . '. 2

- Rear lid . . . . • . . . . . • • • • • • . . 63
Number of seats 19
Lubricants . .. . . .. . . . . . . . 234
Key coding, air conditioning 166
Luggage compartment . . . .. 88, 184
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Kick-down .. . ...... . . . . . ... . . 1 09
.
Luggage compartment light . .. . 172
Luggage net . ... . . . . . . . . . ...... 89
0
OBD (On Board Diagnostic) . . . . 1 28 .

L M
Octane rating . .. . . ...
Odometer . . .
.

. .
225
119. . . . • • . . . • •

Lane changer • • . . . • • • . . 1 56 Off-road ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Maintenance . . ...
. •

. . . . • . 228
Lifting Off-road driving 1 99
Maintenance booklet . .. 4
- Floor jack . . . . 283 Off-road mode .. 202
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) 1 25
. • . . . . .

- Jack . . . . . . . . . . 267 Oil

Master key . ... . .. 56
- Workshop hoist . 283 - Additives ... , . 234
Memory
. • • . . . . . • .

Lifting point - Change 236

- Front seats . ..... . . 81
. . . . . • . . •

- front 284 - pressure . . . .. 143

- Outside mirrors . . . . ..
. . . . . • • • . • • . • . . . . . . . • • •
74
.
. . . . .

- rear . . . . . . • . .. 285 - Specification .. 234

- Steering wheel position . . . .. 1 01
. . . . . . . . • . . . • • • . . • •

Lifting vehicle . . . . . . . . • • • . ... 283

300
------ ALPHABETICAL INDEX

On Board Diagnostic System

(OBD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 128 Q Remote rear lid release
Remote Transmitter ... . . . . . . .
. 65
1 73
Opening the vehicle . .. . 61 quattro . . . 207 Removing the roof rack . . • • • • . 1 92
Outside air temperature . . . _ . . 1 37 - Snow chains 261 Replacing a fuse . . . . . . . . . • • . . 274
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . • • . 72 - Winter tires 207 Replacing batteries
Owner's literature storage . . .... 1 83 - Master key . . . . . . . . . • • . • . . . . 57
- Vehicle battery . . . 248
R
. . . . . . • • .

Replacing bulbs .. 277

p
.

Replacing the radio 277

Radiator fan . . . . • • . . . . • • • • 241
Park assist . 1 12 Replacing wiper blades 251
Radio 277
. . . . • . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .

Parking brake lever . 1 03 Reporting safety defects . . .... 292

Radio frequency display . . . . 138
.
. . . . . . . • .
. • .

Partition net . . . 91 Ride height adjustment . 1 53

. . . . . . . . . • . . . • • •
Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . - . . . 171
Parts replacement 262 Roof rack ..... . . 1 91
. . . . . . • • .
Rear axle load . .......... . . 289
Payload 289 Roof weight . . .. . 289, 290
Rear facing child seat bench . . . 92
. • . . . •
. . . . . . . . , • • . . • • •
. .

Pedals . . . . . . 1 02 Rough roads . 1 99

Rear fog light : . ... . . . . 149
. . • . . . . •
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ .
. . . . .

Phone 190 Rugged terrain . 199

Rear lid 63
. . • . . . . . • . • . . •
. . . . . • . . • • • • • . . . • • . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . .

Pollen filter . . . . . . • . • . . • • . . 167 Rear lid - child safety lock . . ..... 65

Power
- Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . 59
Rear lid light ............
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . 172
. • . . . 86
s
- Mirrors . . • . . • . • • . . . . . . . . 72 Rear view mirror . . . . . . . . . • • • . . 72 Safe driving hints . . • • ..... . . . 194
- Roof . . . 168 Rear window defogger . . . . 151 Safety belt
20
. . • • . .
• •

- Steering . . . . • • . . 241 Remote control . .. . . . . . . . 59 - Fastening . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • .

- Windows 69 - coordination to a memory - Unfastening . 24

button . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. 82 Safety belt warning light .. . 17, 1 27

301
ALPHABETICAL INDEX

Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . 14 Spark plugs . . . . _ . . . . . _ . . . . . _ . . 249

- Belt tensioner . .. . . .. . . . . 24 Speed range . . . . . . • . . . , 193
Safety compliance sticker . . . . . . 290 Speedometer . . . . . . . • . . 119 Tachometer • • . . . • • • • . . . • . • . . 117
Seat belts and older children .. .. 49 . Starter switch . . . . . . . . . . . • . • . . 113 Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . I • • • 57
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . _ . . . . 19 Starting menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 31 Technical data . . . • 286
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . , . 76 Starting procedures . . . . ... , , 1 1 4 Telephone . . . .. . . . . . . 1 90
Secondary key . . . . . . • . _ . • • . . 56 Starting with jumper cables . . . . . 278 Temperature gauge ... . . 118
Securing a child seat . . . . ... . . . 51 Steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . , , • • • 113 Tie-down hooks . . . . 89
Securing luggage . . . . . . . . • . , . 89 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . • • • . . _ . 98 Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 98
Self-leveling suspension . . • 1 23 - Tiptronic . ........ . .. 106 Tiptronic . . . . . . . . . _ . . _ . . _ . . . . . 1 05
Service interval display . . . . • • • . . 1 21 Steering wheel with Audio - steering wheel . . . . . • • . , . . 106
Service literature wallet . . . • . • . . 1 83 controls ............. . . . . . . 1 85
.
lire
Service Repair Manuals . . • • 293 Stopping engine .. . . . . . . . 1 15 - Pressure . . . . . • • . . • . . 253
Setting a date . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . 1 35 Storage compartment light . .... 178 - Replacement . . _ . . . . . . 255, 259
Setting the menu . 131 Storage compartments ..... . .. 182 .
- Rotation ... 254
Setting the time I date
. . . . . . . . . . . _ . .

. . . . . . 1 18 Storing outside mirror setting . ... 81 - Specification • • . . . . • 256

S I DEGUARD . ...... .. . 39 Storing seat position . ....... 81, 83 - Wear . . . . . . . 254
•

Ski sack . . . . . . . . . . . • . • • . • • • • • . . 96 Storing steering wheel position . . 81 lire quality grading information . 258 .

Sliding roof 1 68 Sun shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . 177 Tires .......... ... 252

Sliding I prop-up roof
. . . . . . . . _ . . • . . _ . . . . .

. . . . . • . . , . 168 Sun visors ... .... . ...... .

. . . 177 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . • . • 264
Snow chains . . . . . • • • . . 261 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • • . . 168 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . . • 281
Socket . . . . . . • . . . • . • . .... . 181 _Suspension, self-leveling . ...... 1 23 Towing anchorages • • . .. . . 281
Solar roof . . . 1 66, 1 70 Switches . . . . .
. 1 48 Trailer towing . . . . . . • • . . , • . . • • 208
Spare wheel .. 266 - Driving instructions _ _ . . . . . . . 210

302
------ ALPHABETICAL INDEX

- Technical requirements . . . 208 Vehicle identification . . .. 290 - Fuel . . . . . . • • • • • . . • 143

- lips .21 1 Vehicle identification label . . 291 - Generator 1 27
- Headlights I tail lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . .

- Trailer brakes . . ." . . . . . . • . . 209 Vehicle identification number . . 290 . . . .... 1 43

Transporting heavy objects . . . . . . 88 Vehicle jack . ....... ... . . 265 - High beam . . ... . . .. 1 25
frip computer . . .. ... .. . 146 Vehicle literature . . . • . . • • • • . . .. 2 - Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 125
Trip odometer . • . . . . • • . . . 1 20 Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . • • • . .. 1 62 - Safety belts . .. . . . . . . . . . . . 1 27
Turn signals . . . . . ... . . .
. 1 25, 1 56 Voltage warning label . . • . . . . . . 291 - Speed warning . . . . • • • • 1 44
Voltmeter 1 20 - Turn signals . . . . . • 1 25
- Washer fluid .. 1 43
u
. . . • . . • • • • .

Warranty booklet . . .. .. 4
w
. . . . . . . •

Washer reservoir .. .. . . ..... 250

Undercoating . . . . . . . . . . 1 98, 220
.

Washer system .. . . 1 60
Unfastening - Safety belt . . . . . . . 24 Warning and indicator lights .... 1 0
. . . . • . . . • . • .
.

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Universal Transmitter . . . 1 73 Warning lights . . . . . . ... . . . 1 0, 1 22
. . . . . . .

Warning I indicator lights

Wheels replacement . ..... 255, 259
Unleaded fuel . . . 225
Unpaved roads . 1 99 - Airbag system . ...... . . . . 1 25 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . 69
- Cleaning . .... 2 1 5
- Anti-lock brake system . .... 1 25 . . . . . . . . • . • • .

- Battery voltage . . . . . .... . . 1 43 - Defrosting . ... . .. 1 63

v
.

Windshield washer container . . 250

- Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . ... 1 26
.
• •

- Capacity .. . . . 287
- Brake light . ... 141
.

V-belt . . . . . . 249
.

Wioter operation
- Brake pads worn .. . 1 43
Valet key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 56
. . • .

- Battery ..... . 245

- Coolant level .. .. . . . . 1 41
.

Vehicle battery . 245

.

- Cooling system . . . . 238

- Coolant temperature 1 41
Vehicle care
- Snow chains 261
- Electronic power control . ... 1 23
- Exterior . . . 212
- Tires . . . . . . 260
. • • • • . . . • • . . . . •

- Engine oil level . ... . .... . .. 1 44 .

- Interior 217
- Vehicle care 213
· . . . . • . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

- Engine oil pressure .... . ... 1 43

- Windows . . .. 215
.
. • • . . . . . . •

303
 ALPHABEDCAL INDEX ----

'

- Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1 5
- Windshield washer system . . 250
Winter tires . . . . . . . . ... 207; 260
· Wiper . 0 0 0 0 . 0 • • • • • 0 . . • • • • 1 60
Wiper blades 0 0 • 0 0 • • • 251
Workshop hoist . . . . . .. 283

X
Xenon lights . • . . • . . • . . 1 57, 277

304
Beuiebsanleitung
Audiallroad
Nordameriu
englisch 10.0()
211.561.,BH.21